5. 小双品复注巴利 5. Cūḷayamakavaggo
265 段
《萨雷亚咖经》的注释巴利
1. Sāleyyakasuttavaṇṇanā
439 大众聚集时,有些人是为了“表演欢庆的方式逗王子笑”,有些人是为了“看那场游戏”,就这样在大众聚集在一起的时候。天舞,是指天界的乾闼婆。由于依着“善哉?善哉!”这样一问一答的交替言说,而被称为善说,那些人从一开始就得到了“善”这个通称。那些善者的主宰,就是王子,是憍萨罗人,出生在憍萨罗。他们的住处等,全都和前面所说的一样。因此他说“那个地方被称为憍萨罗”。巴利
439.Mahājanakāyesannipatiteti keci ‘‘pahaṃsanavidhiṃ dassetvā rājakumāraṃ hāsessāmā’’ti, keci ‘‘taṃ kīḷanaṃ passissāmā’’ti evaṃ mahājanasamūhe sannipatite. Devanaṭanti dibbagandhabbaṃ. Kusalaṃ kusalanti vacanaṃ upādāyāti ‘‘kacci kusalaṃ? Āma kusala’’nti vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavattakusalavāditāya te manussā ādito kusalāti samaññaṃ labhiṃsu. Tesaṃ kusalānaṃ issarāti rājakumārā kosalā. Kosale jātā. Tesaṃ nivāsoti sabbaṃ pubbe vuttanayameva. Tenāha ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti.
“游方”这个说法本身是一般性的表达,但因为后面有“与大……到达”这段话,说明这里指的是特别的游方,所以注释者说“进行不急促的游方”。“大”:既因为功德大,也因为人数多。在那个比丘众中,有些人依增上戒学而戒具足,同样有些人戒与定具足,有些人戒、定、慧具足,因为功德大,所以那个比丘众是大;如果不提这一点,只显示人数多,就说了“百位”等话。“集会”:指依靠别的村子维持生活而聚集到这里;村就是居住的村子,这里指萨喇婆罗门村。“住处”:就是世尊居住的地方。“此处”:指在这部《萨雷亚咖经》中。“未加限定”:没有限定为某个园林、某座山或某棵树下,没有以具体形态限定说明。因此,因为未加限定,以推想的方式说明必然成立的道理,所以说“应该有一片树林”,意思是“肯定会有”。巴利
Cārikaṃ caramānoti sāmaññavacanampi ‘‘mahatā…pe… tadavasarī’’ti vacanato visesaṃ niviṭṭhamevāti āha ‘‘aturitacārikaṃ caramāno’’ti. Mahatāti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. Tasmiñhi bhikkhusamūhe keci adhisīlasikkhāvasena sīlasampannā, tathā keci sīlasamādhisampannā, keci sīlasamādhipaññāsampannāti guṇamahattenapi so bhikkhusamūho mahāti. Taṃ anāmasitvā saṅkhyāmahattameva dassento ‘‘sataṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Aññagāmapaṭibaddhajīvikāvasena samosaranti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ, gāmo nivāsagāmo. Nti sālaṃ brāhmaṇagāmaṃ. Vihāroti bhagavato viharaṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ sāleyyakasutte. Aniyamitoti asukasmiṃ ārāme pabbate rukkhamūle vāti na niyamito, sarūpaggahaṇavasena na niyamitvā vutto. Tasmāti aniyamitattā. Atthāpattisiddhamatthaṃ parikappanavasena dassento ‘‘vanasaṇḍo bhavissatī’’ti āha, addhā bhaveyyāti attho.
他们说“他们得知了”,是为了说明“他们通过耳门……知道了”这个意思。由于限定作用遍及整句,所以说“这只是个填补句子的虚词”。而在表示“确定”这一含义时,则是用这个说法来表明:“kho”这个词是用来表达所希望之义的确定。当“听闻”这个词和“kho”结合时,就像被花朵装饰得圆满一样,前后词句也因此紧密连贯;如果不取这个字,就做不到这样,所以说“仅仅是为了让音节连贯流畅而已”。“matta”这个词是排除其他可能的意思,借此说明它并不表达别的含义;而“eva”这个词则使音节的连贯成为必然。在萨喇村出生、长大的人就叫萨喇村人,就像“katteyyak┓ubbheyyakā”一样。巴利
Upalabhiṃsūti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255; a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.64) savanavasena upalabhiṃsūti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sotadvāra…pe… jāniṃsū’’ti āha. Avadhāraṇaphalattā sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti āha ‘‘padapūraṇamatte vānipāto’’ti. Avadhāraṇattheti pana iminā iṭṭhatthāvadhāraṇatthaṃ kho-saddaggahaṇanti dasseti. ‘‘Assosu’’nti padaṃ kho-sadde gahite tena phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni saṃsiliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahiteti āha ‘‘padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattamevā’’ti. Matta-saddo visesanivattiattho. Tenassa anatthantaradīpanataṃ dasseti, eva-saddena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikataṃ. Sālāyaṃ jātā saṃvaḍḍhakā sāleyyakā yathā ‘‘katteyyakā ubbheyyakā’’ti.
“已平息罪恶”是指:彻底地、毫无剩余地,连习气也一并平息了罪恶。这样一来,世尊的息恶就与外道离贪者、有学、无学之人的息恶区分开来,显得格外殊胜。因为虚词有多种含义,这里指的是“传闻”的意思,所以说“‘kho’是表传闻义的虚词”。“仅仅是称呼”是指亲切的称呼语。因为“bho”“āvuso”“devānaṃpiyā”这些,都是亲切的言辞。“以种姓故”:这里“它救护”所以叫“种姓”。当“乔达摩”这个称呼与觉知一起生起时,它使所缘确定下来而加以救护、守护,所以叫“乔达摩种姓”。就像觉知没有所缘境就不能生起一样,名称没有所诠之义也不能生起,所以说它救护、守护它们。但从义理上说,应当知道这是指别族相续之外的、由该族始祖传下来的、属于该族成员共同所有的通名。显示高贵种姓,是说从尊贵、崇高、广大的刹帝利族类而来。因为从一切刹帝利最初的大选王以来,释迦王族就未曾混杂,最为殊胜。“不为任何衰损所及”:就是不被亲属衰损、财富衰损等任何衰损、减损所征服、压倒。因为事实上,该族任何时候都没有过那样的衰损,而且在出家之时能显得极为圆满,这是世间公认的。“从释迦族出家”这句话,是为了说明世尊是出于信心而出家,因为说明了舍弃庞大的亲属眷属和庞大的财富聚积而出家。在这里,以“沙门”一词显示了出家考察者们对世尊的广泛尊重,因为说明了已平息罪恶等;以“乔达摩”一词显示了在世间人当中最为高贵的种族出身。巴利
Samitapāpattāti accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattā. Evañhi bāhirakavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamanato bhagavato pāpasamanaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ idha anussavattho adhippetoti āha ‘‘khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti. Ālapanamattanti piyālāpavacanaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete ‘‘bho’’ti vā ‘‘āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃpiyā’’ti vā. Gottavasenāti ettha taṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ. Gotamoti hi pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya tāyati rakkhatīti gotamagottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so tāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. So pana atthato aññakulaparamparāsādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uccākulaparidīpanaṃ uditoditavipulakhattiyakulavibhāvanato. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññenāti ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenacipi pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo. Tathā hi kadācipi tassa kulassa tādisapārijuññābhāvo, abhinikkhamanakāle ca tato samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññātoti. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavato saddhāpabbajitabhāvadīpanaṃ vuttaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya pabbajitabhāvadīpanato. Ettha ca samaṇoti iminā parikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito samitapāpatādīpanato, gotamoti iminā lokiyajanehi uḷāratamakulīnatādīpanato.
“现起”在这里的“abhi”一词,是表示“如此这般地说明”的用法;但由于这种关联,原本是属格意义的“对尊贵的乔达摩”这一宾格说法,也因为显示“如此这般的关联”而被说成是“如此这般说明”的意思。因此说:“其意思是:对于这位尊贵的乔达摩尊者。”“贤善”:就是善良。而他的贤善在于所缘境殊胜,所以说“具足善好的功德”。这里“具足”的意思,就是以那种对象为所缘。“最上”:这里也一样,如说“世尊一词就是‘最上’的意思”。由于“世尊是阿拉汉”等话是在简略地列举和称扬这些功德,而“kitti”就是声音、称誉,所以说“只是称誉而已”。“sadda”一词也同样有称誉的意思,例如“有大称誉的仙人们,具德、苦行”。“称赞之声”:就是赞扬的称颂。“遍覆”:因为无有对立、不与他人共通,所以是征服、压倒。巴利
Abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyāne, taṃyogato pana ‘‘bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samānaṃ itthambhūtayogadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti. Kalyāṇoti bhaddako. Sā cassa kalyāṇatā uḷāravisayatāyāti āha ‘‘kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato’’ti. Taṃvisayatā hettha samannāgamo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo yathā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; visuddhi. 1.142; udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50). ‘‘Bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā guṇānaṃ saṃkittanato saṃsaddanato ca kittisaddo vaṇṇoti āha ‘‘kittiyevā’’ti. Kittipariyāyopi hi sadda-saddo yathā taṃ ‘‘uḷārasaddā isayo guṇavanto tapassino’’ti. Thutighosoti abhitthavudāhāro. Ajjhottharitvāti paṭipakkhābhāvena anaññasādhāraṇatāya ca abhibhavitvā.
这位世尊:就是那位圆满了三十种巴拉密、摧毁了一切烦恼、证得无上正等正觉的觉者——他是天神中最殊胜的天神,帝释天神中最殊胜的帝释天神,梵天神中最殊胜的梵天神,是世间的怙主;因为具足祥瑞等种种原因,而获得了“世尊”这个名号,他就是这位世尊。“世尊”这个称呼,是对导师名号的称扬。正如经文中所说:“‘世尊’这个名字不是母亲取的”等等。而接下来所说的“世尊”,则纯粹是对功德的称扬。为了表明:用“应供”等词句,在包括天神的世间中,极为彰显地从各个方面阐明了佛陀的种种功德,所以“iti pi”应当分别与每一个词搭配,因此说“以此因缘是应供,以此因缘是正自觉者……以此因缘是世尊”。就像在“Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ tacchaṃ”等句子中那样,这里的“iti”表示现前可见的因由,“pi”表示汇集,由此显示这些功德的众多。为了说明对于具足信心与智慧的聪慧之人,那些观察功德的因由都是现前可见的,所以说“就是因为这个和那个原因,这样说”等等。此后,应从《清净道论》中了解。“这些”:指“应供”等词。其详细的义理解释应当采纳。正是从《清净道论大复注》中所说的“以极远离故为应供,以极近故为应供……”等语句中,“应供”等词的含义应当详细了知。巴利
So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi bhagavāti laddhanāmo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti hi idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 149, 198, 210; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2). Parato pana ‘‘bhagavā’’ti guṇakittanameva. Evaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīhi padehi ye sadevake loke ativiya paññātā buddhaguṇā, te nānappakārato vibhāvitāti dassetuṃ paccekaṃ itipi-saddo yojetabboti āha ‘‘itipi arahaṃ, itipi samāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya hi idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakāraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho tena tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvadīpanato. Tāni guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni saddhāsampannānaṃ viññujātikānaṃ paccakkhāni evāti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Tato visuddhimaggato. Tesanti ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ. Vitthāro atthaniddeso gahetabbo. Tato eva taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.130) vutto ‘‘ārakāti arahaṃ suvidūrabhāvato, ārakāti arahaṃ āsannabhāvato, rahitabbassa abhāvato, sayañca arahitabbato, natthi etassa rahogamanaṃ gatīsu paccājāti, pāsaṃsabhāvato vā araha’’ntiādinā ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho vitthārato veditabbo.
这里也有这样的说法:巴利
Bhavanti cettha (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.130; sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) –
“ 那些志趣低劣的人,不能正确地修行;
世尊远离他们,因此应供者被认为远在天边。
那些正确修行、一心追求最上目标的人,
世尊与他们亲近,因此也是应供、胜者。
恶法名为‘隐’,以善士所当离故;
彼诸恶法已善断,故世尊称为阿拉汉。
亲证正法之圣者,行境清净;
怙主不为彼等所弃,是故名为阿拉汉。
他的隐秘出行,在轮回中完全不存在;
他已经断除了生死,被称为阿拉汉、善逝。
在包括天神的世间里,没有任何众生能在功德上和他相比;
因此,从值得赞叹这一点来说,他也是两足者中最殊胜的阿拉汉。
远离愚钝者,亲近有智慧者。
因彻底断除隐秘之事,因应受智者礼敬;
他在各种生命存在状态中没有任何隐秘,所以值得赞叹,是阿拉汉、胜者。”巴利
‘‘Sammā nappaṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato. Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Bhagavā tehi āsanno, tenāpi arahaṃ jino. Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato. Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato. Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato. Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo. Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, āsannā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jino’’ti.
“美好的”就是善妙的。而对于见到它的人,应当知道它能带来利益和安乐,所以说“带来利益、带来安乐”。其中,“带来利益”是指带来现世的利益、来世的利益以及究竟意义上的利益。“带来安乐”是指带来包含在其中的三种安乐。“如是之人”就是指那样的人。为了说明世尊具备种种功德,对于以四种量为标准的世间,在一切方面都极其令人生起净信,所以说了“以众多的……”等话。其中,“如实……阿拉汉”这一段,是就那些以法为量、以粗涩为量的众生对世尊生起净信来说的;其余的则是就其他众生来说的。仅仅见到也是善妙的,这里应当讲猫头鹰的故事。能听到一句也好,那就更加善妙,这里应当讲青蛙天子的故事。巴利
Sundaranti bhaddakaṃ. Tañca passantassa hitasukhāvahabhāvena veditabbanti āha ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Tattha atthāvahanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthasañhitahitāvahaṃ. Sukhāvahanti tappariyāpannatividhasukhāvahaṃ. Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ. Yādisehi pana guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato, tehi catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbathāpi accantāya pasādanīyoti dassetuṃ ‘‘anekehipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathābhūta…pe… arahatanti iminā dhammappamāṇānaṃ lūkhappamāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahatamāha, itarena itaresaṃ. Dassanamattampisādhuhotīti ettha kosiyasakuṇassa vatthu kathetabbaṃ. Ekaṃ padampi sotuṃ labhissāma, sādhutaraṃyeva bhavissatīti ettha maṇḍūkadevaputtavatthu kathetabbaṃ.
用这个方法说到“在家者的提问”,这是就大多数情况而说的。因为大多数在家者确实就是这样问的。非在家者的提问,道理也一样。通过“如同他们不能……回答”这一段,显示导师折伏那些婆罗门居士的方法。因为他们喜欢简略,所以世尊用简略的方式教导;他们不懂其中的意义,就请求详细解说。而他们喜欢简略,是因为自认为有智慧;当所教导的意义无法理解时,那种我慢就站不住脚了。因此,世尊思量了折伏他们我慢的方法后,只用简略的方式回答问题,并不是完全不观察教导的方式。所以说“因为他们自认为有智慧”等等。意思是:你们向我请求,却不理解我简略所说的意义。巴利
Iminā nayena agārikapucchā āgatāti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi agārikā evaṃ pucchanti. Anagārikapucchāyapi eseva nayo. Yathā na sakkonti…pe… vissajjentoti iminā satthu tesaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dasseti. Tesañhi saṃkhittarucitāya saṅkhepadesanā, tāya atthaṃ ajānantā vitthāradesanaṃ āyācanti, sā ca nesaṃ saṃkhittarucitā paṇḍitamānitāya, so ca māno yathādesitassa atthassa ajānante appatiṭṭho hoti , iti bhagavā tesaṃ mānaniggahavidhiṃ cintetvā saṅkhepeneva pañhaṃ vissajjesi, na sabbaso desanāya asallakkhaṇatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṇḍitamānikā hī’’tiādi. Yasmā maṃ tumhe yācatha, saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ na jānitthāti adhippāyo.
440 在“以一种方式为智事”等句里,“vidha”这个词是“部分”的意思,它把格和数的变化调换了一下,以工具格单数说成“三种”。但意思应该按工具格复数来理解,所以说“三种”就是“以三种部分”。或者,“vidha”这个词是“方式”的意思。正因为它是“方式”的意思,就把可得的“不如法行、非正行”这一共性,或者“以身门为性质”这一共性,归结为一个整体,说成“三种”。如果着眼于方式的不同,那就应该说成“三种方式”。这里说“以身”,身指的是能造作的身体,它是不如法行的门,因为没有它,不如法行就不能生起。“以身”是表示原因的具格。虽然由名为不如法行的思所发起的那种表色,并不是《发趣论》里所说二十四缘中任何一种能成为思的缘,但当它那样生起时,被称为身业之思的生起;因此,通过那个门可以了知它,就好像它是它的原因一样,这只是一个笼统的说法。或者说“以身门”,就是以身体为门、以身为门,这是表示这种状态的具格。通过这个门而行非法,所以叫“不如法行”,也就是那样生起的思。而“不如法”,应该看作是由它发起的加行。不离法的叫“如法”,不是法的叫“不如法”,不如法又是行,所以叫“不如法行”。以寂止违逆法这个意义叫“等”,或者以相同、相似、相应叫“等”,就是善行。从等离开,或者与它相违,叫“不等”,就是恶行。那就是不等之行,所以叫“不等行”。在一切黑分和白分里,按照“以语有四种不如法行、不等行”等总说和别说所讲的一切黑分,以及按照“诸居士!以身有三种如法行、等行”等总说和别说所讲的一切白分。巴利
440. ‘‘Ekavidhena ñāṇavatthu’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 751) viya koṭṭhāsattho vidha-saddo, so ca vibhattivacanavipallāsaṃ katvā paccatte karaṇavacanavasena ‘‘tividha’’nti vutto. Attho pana karaṇaputhuvacanavasena daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘tividhanti tīhi koṭṭhāsehī’’ti. Pakārattho vā vidha-saddo, pakāratthattāyeva labbhamānaṃ adhammacariyāvisamacariyābhāvasāmaññaṃ, kāyadvārikabhāvasāmaññaṃ vā upādāya ekattaṃ netvā ‘‘tividha’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakārabhede pana apekkhite ‘‘tividhā’’icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyenāti ettha kāyoti copanakāyo adhippeto, so ca adhammacariyāya dvārabhūto tena vinā tassā appavattanato. Kāyenāti ca hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi adhammacariyāsaṅkhātacetanāsamuṭṭhānā sā viññatti, na ca sā paṭṭhāne āgatesu catuvīsatiyā paccayesu ekenapi paccayena cetanāya paccayo hoti, tassā pana tathāpavattamānāya kāyakammasaññitāya cetanāya pavatti hotīti tena dvārena lakkhitabbabhāvato tassā kāraṇaṃ viya ca sabbohāramattaṃ hoti. Kāyadvārenāti vā kāyena dvārabhūtena kāyadvārabhūtenāti taṃ itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Adhammaṃ carati etāyāti adhammacariyā, tathāpavattā cetanā. Adhammoti pana taṃsamuṭṭhāno payogo daṭṭhabbo. Dhammato anapetāti dhammā, na dhammāti adhammā, adhammā ca sā cariyā cāti adhammacariyā. Paccanīkasamanaṭṭhena samaṃ, samānaṃ sadisaṃ yuttanti vā samaṃ, sucaritaṃ. Samato vigataṃ, viruddhaṃ vā tassāti visamaṃ, duccaritaṃ. Sā eva visamā cariyāti visamacariyā. Sabbesu kaṇhasukkapadesūti ‘‘catubbidhaṃ vācāya adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hotī’’tiādinā uddesaniddesavasena āgatesu sabbesu kaṇhapadesu – ‘‘tividhaṃ kho gahapatayo kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hotī’’tiādinā uddesaniddesavasena āgatesu sabbesu sukkapadesu ca.
“残忍”(rudda)的意思是让人哭:由于行为粗暴,使那些依附他人的众生流泪,所以叫残忍;把其中的 r 音换成 l 音,就成了“暴恶”(ludda)。“粗硬”就是暴恶。“残酷”就是粗恶。“凶恶者”就是行凶的人。那种惯于杀害他人的人,即使并无沾染,也仍被称为“血手”——正如惯于布施的人,即使手没洗净也行布施,仍被称为“净手”。“打击”只是给予打击,而加重的打击就是杀害他人,为了说明“已杀……”等含义才这样说。其中,“耽着”就是深深投入、热衷。巴利
Rodeti kurūrakammantatāya parapaṭibaddhe satte assūni mocetīti ruddo, so eva luddo ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā. Kakkhaḷoti luddo. Dāruṇoti pharuso. Sāhasikoti sāhassakārī. Sacepi na lippanti. Tathāvidho paresaṃ ghātanasīlo lohitapāṇītveva vuccati yathā dānasīlo paresaṃ dānatthaṃ adhotahatthopi ‘‘payatapāṇī’’tveva vuccati. Paharaṇaṃ pahāradānamattaṃ hataṃ, pavuddhaṃ paharaṇaṃ parassa māraṇaṃ pahatanti dassento ‘‘hate’’tiādimāha. Tattha niviṭṭhoti abhiniviṭṭho pasuto.
依靠这个关系,用“他人的”这个属格来指明所有者,那就是属于他人的财产。因为凡是笼统拿来的东西,就是通过那个指明所有者的说法来表明的,所以说“属于他人的”。或者,“他人的、他人的财物和用具”是一个复合词,意思是任何属于他人的东西,特别是他人的财物和用具。“由那些他人”就是指由那些东西的主人。依靠这个关系,一个人被称为“盗”,那就是偷盗,所以说“这是盗取心的名称”。这是就偷盗来说的,不是依信任、暂时借用等方式来说的。巴利
Yassa vasena ‘‘parassā’’ti sāminiddeso, taṃ sāpateyyaṃ. Yañhi sāmaññato gahitaṃ, taṃ teneva sāminiddesena pakāsitanti āha ‘‘parassa santaka’’nti. Parassaparavittūpakaraṇanti vā ekamevetaṃ samāsapadaṃ, yaṃ kiñci parasantakaṃ visesato parassa vittūpakaraṇaṃ vāti attho. Tehi parehīti yesaṃ santakaṃ, tehi. Yassa vasena puriso ‘‘theno’’ti vuccati, taṃ theyyanti āha ‘‘avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Theyyasaṅkhātena, na vissāsatāvakālikādivasenāti attho.
“或死”里的“或”字,表示还有没明说出来的其他可能。以此把出家之类的情况包括进去。用这个方式来说:如果母亲已经死了或失踪了,由父亲来保护,那她就是父护;如果父母都不在了,由兄弟来保护,那她就是兄护,等等,就是针对这些情况说的。“同类家族”,是指通过婚娶而结成同类的家族。或者是针对盗贼法规,由国王等施设刑罚来判定。在《正见经》(中部注1.89)里,则是依邪行的特征这样说:“以非法意图,身门所生起,对不可行处的违犯之思。”巴利
Mate vāti vā-saddo avuttavikappattho. Tena pabbajitādibhāvaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etenupāyenāti yaṃ mātari matāya, naṭṭhāya vā pitā rakkhati, sā piturakkhitā. Yaṃ ubhosu asantesu bhātā rakkhati, sā bhāturakkhitāti evamādiṃ sandhāyāha. Sabhāgakulānīti āvāhakiriyāya sabhāgāni kulāni. Dassukavidhiṃ vā uddissa ṭhapitadaṇḍārājādīhi. Sammādiṭṭhisutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89) ‘‘asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā’’ti evaṃ vuttamicchācāralakkhaṇavasena.
“手足等因”,就是手脚等被砍断这类原因。“财因”,就是得财之因与失财之因。“所得”,就是能获得食物和衣服等,所以叫所得。“一点点”,就是任何一点点财物。因此说“或者任何”等等。“正在知道”,就是那件事有虚假性,他正知道那一点。巴利
Hatthapādādihetūti hatthapādādibhedanahetu. Dhanahetūti dhanassa lābhahetu jānihetu ca. Lābhoti ghāsacchādanāni labbhatīti lābho. Kiñcikkhanti kiñcimattakaṃ āmisajātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ vā’’tiādi. Jānantoyevāti musābhāvaṃ tassa vatthuno atthi, taṃ jānanto eva.
所谓“卵状”,是指树上像卵一样的节瘤。这些节瘤坚硬、不平坦、难以调理,同样,以辱骂和轻蔑的方式说出的言语也被称为“卵状”。因此说“如对有病的树”等。“粗涩”就是粗暴;而它这种粗涩,因为是嗔恚的近因,所以由此成为腐败的。因此说“如同所谓”等。“辛辣”就是不可意。“不可意”就是不能令心欢喜,正因如此能引发嗔恨,是使内心染污产生的东西。“对于要害处”:因为一触碰就生苦,所以指像生等类似要害的地方。“能作系着”:对于这样说的人,以“我就是要这样说”的意图而紧紧系着,不是从字面上系着。“邻近于嗔”:因为是嗔恨的起因。“有过失之语”:由自身所起的过失,这些都是有过失之语的同义词。巴利
Aṇḍakāti vuccati rukkhe aṇḍasadisā gaṇṭhiyo. Yathā thaddhā visamā dubbinītā ca honti, evamevaṃ khuṃsanavambhanavasena pavattavācāpi hi ‘‘aṇḍakā’’ti vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sadose rukkhe’’tiādi. Kakkasāti pharusā eva, so panassā kakkasabhāvo byāpādanimittatāya tato pūtikāti. Tenāha ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi. Kaṭukāti aniṭṭhā. Amanāpāti na manavaḍḍhanī, tato eva dosajananī, cittasandosuppattikārikā. Mammesūti ghaṭṭanena dukkhuppattito mammasadisesu jātiādīsu. Lagganakārīti evaṃ vadantassa evaṃ vadāmīti atthādhippāyena lagganakārī, na byañjanavasena. Kodhassa āsannā tassa kāraṇabhāvato. Sadosavācāyāti attano samuṭṭhāpakadosassa vasena sadosavācāya vevacanāni.
“非时”是指不合适的时机。“不依因”是指没有结果。因为果不离因,所以果才被称为依因。不依因就是没有结果,意思是空虚无实。“不住真实”是指说话不真实。“与不具律仪防护相关”是指属于没有律仪防护的言语,对听者也不能带来律仪防护。“藏入心匣中”是指因为是不利所集,所以不让它进入内心并安放其中。“无出处”是指并非世尊在某经中如此宣说,即缺乏经典出处。“无界限”是指缺乏限定。为了说明言语如何缺乏限定,所以说“经或……”等。“可被引证”是指问难。“外道之说”是指不触及那部经或本生经中所收内容的本身之说,而只是其外的言论。“成就”是指增长、达到。“世代本生经等”是指随生、次生、根本者才存续。“引来”是指从所收经典之外,依照问难和譬喻事例,引来与那不相符的内容。“使人知道”是指为了使人知道而说此义,谁有能力。“为他说”是指对那样的说法者,即使多说也适宜。“不依义”是指对自己和他人都不带来利益。巴利
Akālenāti ayuttakālena. Akāraṇanissitanti nipphalaṃ. Phalañhi kāraṇanissitaṃ nāma tadavinābhāvato. Akāraṇanissitaṃ nipphalaṃ, samphanti attho. Asabhāvavattāti ayāthāvavādī. Asaṃvaravinayapaṭisaṃyuttassāti saṃvaravinayarahitassa, attano suṇantassa ca na saṃvaravinayāvahassa vattā. Hadayamañjūsāyaṃ nidhetunti ahitasaṃhitattā cittaṃ anuppavisetvā nidhetuṃ . Ayuttakāleti dhammaṃ kathentena yo attho yasmiṃ kāle vattabbo, tato pubbe pacchā tassa akālo, tasmiṃ ayuttakāle vattā hoti. Anapadesanti bhagavatā asukasutte evaṃ vuttanti suttāpadesavirahitaṃ. Aparicchedanti paricchedarahitaṃ . Yathā pana vācā paricchedarahitā hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘suttaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upalabbhanti anuyogaṃ. Bāhirakathaṃyevāti yaṃ suttaṃ, jātakaṃ vā nikkhittaṃ, tassa sarīrabhūtaṃ kathaṃ anāmasitvā tato bahibhūtaṃyeva kathaṃ. Sampajjitvāti viruḷhaṃ āpajjitvā. Paveṇijātakāvāti anujātapārohamūlāniyeva tiṭṭhanti. Āharitvāti nikkhittasuttato aññampi anuyogaupamāvatthuvasena tadanupayoginaṃ āharitvā. Jānāpetunti etadatthamidaṃ vuttanti jānāpetuṃ yo sakkoti. Tassa kathetunti tassa tathārūpassa dhammakathikassa bahumpi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Na atthanissitanti attano paresañca na hitāvahaṃ.
贪欲的思惟,大多数是因为看见他人的所有物而生起的,所以说“因贪欲而观视者”。或者说,贪欲的人对所贪求的东西,无论它放在哪里,都像是亲眼看见一样地贪求,所以说“因贪欲而观视者”。这时还不构成业道的差别,仅仅只是贪本身而已,因为还没有以决意为己有的方式转起。然而,为了显示怎样才构成业道的差别,所以说“然而若时”等。“决意为己有”:就是以“这是我的”的想法执取,令心转向它。巴利
Abhijjhāyanaṃ yebhuyyena parasantakassa dassanavasena hotīti ‘‘abhijjhāya oloketā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhijjhāyanto vā abhijjhāyitaṃ vatthuṃ yattha katthaci ṭhitampi paccakkhato passanto viya abhijjhāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhijjhāya oloketā hotī’’ti. Kammapathabhedo na hoti, kevalaṃ lobhamattova hoti pariṇāmanavasena appavattattā. Yathā pana kammapathabhedo hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariṇāmetīti attano santakabhāvena pariggayha nāmeti.
心已败坏的人,就是因嗔恨而令心陷入败坏的人。因此说“心已腐败的人”。因为嗔恨就像毒一样,会让心产生腐败的状态,如同毒使血液腐败。由于嗔恨而有被污染的心念,就像因为毒而让酥油等变质一样,是因嗔恨而令心念被污染。令他们被杀,就是愿他们被杀害。令他们达到死亡,就是愿他们达到死亡。或者愿他们没有,就是愿他们彻底不存在。因此说“乃至一丝一毫也愿他们没有”,意思是愿他们达到无余的毁灭。令他们被杀害,就是仅凭前面所说的那种想法,也就是纯粹想要彻底毁灭的念头。巴利
Vipannacittoti byāpādena vipattiṃ āpāditacitto. Tenāha ‘‘pūtibhūtacitto’’ti. Byāpādo hi visaṃ viya lohitassa cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ janeti. Dosena duṭṭhacittasaṅkappoti visena viya sappiādikopena dūsitacittasaṅkappo. Ghātīyantūti hanīyantu. Vadhaṃ pāpuṇantūti maraṇaṃ pāpuṇantu. Mā vā ahesunti sabbena sabbaṃ na hontu. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcipi mā ahesu’’nti, anavasesavināsaṃ pāpuṇantūti attho. Haññantūti ādicintanenevāti ekantato vināsacintāya eva.
邪见者,就是以不如理的方式生起见解的人。而这种见解完全与善法对立,所以说它是“见不善者”。“颠倒见者”,就是执取与法性相颠倒的见解。“无施”这句话,是以所施之物为代表来说布施,因此注释说“这是就布施没有果报而说的”。那么对于食物等物品的布施,他又是怎么否定的呢?“已祠、已供”这里也是同样的道理。“大施”,是指对一切人都共通的大布施。“供客之礼敬”,就是对宾客应当做的礼敬。“果”,是指利益果和等流果。“异熟”,就是同类之果报。“对他世者,此世无”,是说处于他世者,由业所得之此世是不存在的。“对此世者,他世无”,是说处于此世者,由业所得之他世是不存在的。其中,原因他说:“一切在那里就那里断灭。”这些众生,无论生于何处,即在诸有、诸生、诸趣等处中,就在那里即那里断灭,以坏灭消亡的方式而消灭。以无果报之义来说,对于父母,正行与邪行的果报不存在,所以说“无母、无父”,并不是说父母不存在,也不是说对父母的正行与邪行不存在,因为那些是世间所共知的。如同水泡一样,这些众生的生起只是单纯的,并非死后再生而来的,为了显示这一点,所以说“无化生众生”,因此注释说“这是说没有死后化生的众生”。沙门,是指如实地了知者,对任何人任何事都不说而保持缄默,否则便成了空谈虚夸,他人能为他人做什么呢?如此,自己修证之事对任何人根本无机缘,因为于彼处即断灭故,因此说为“那些对此世……宣说者”。至此,是以“无施”等语来表示的。十事邪见者,就是有十种事应被否定,因此称为十事邪见。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikoti ayoniso uppannadiṭṭhiko. So ca ekantato kusalapaṭipakkhadiṭṭhikoti āha ‘‘akusaladassano’’ti. Vipallatthadassanoti dhammatāya vipariyāsaggāhī. Natthi dinnanti deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Dinnaṃ pana annādivatthuṃ kathaṃ paṭikkhipati. Esa nayo ‘‘yiṭṭhaṃ huta’’nti etthāpi. Mahāyāgoti sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānaṃ. Paheṇakasakkāroti pāhunakānaṃ kattabbasakkāro. Phalanti ānisaṃsaphalañca nissandaphalañca. Vipākoti sadisaṃ phalaṃ. Paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthīti paraloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo ayaṃ loko na hoti. Idhaloke ṭhitassapi paraloko natthīti idhaloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo paraloko na hoti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantī’’ti . Ime sattā yattha yattha bhavayonigatiādīsu ṭhitā tattha tattheva ucchijjanti nirudayavināsavasena vinassanti. Phalābhāvavasenāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalassa abhāvavasena ‘‘natthi mātā, natthi pitā’’ti vadati, na mātāpitūnaṃ, nāpi tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ abhāvavasena tesaṃ lokapaccakkhattā. Bubbuḷakassa viya imesaṃ sattānaṃ uppādo nāma kevalova, na cavitvā āgamanapubbakoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadatī’’ti. Samaṇena nāma yāthāvato jānantena kassaci kiñci akathetvā saññatena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā ahopurisikā nāma siyā, kiṃ paro parassa karissati, tathā attano sampādanassa kassaci avasaro eva natthi tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti āha ‘‘ye imañca…pe… pavedentī’’ti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā byapadesena. Dasavatthukāti paṭikkhipitabbāni dasa vatthūni etissāti dasavatthukā.
441 无贪等项因为前面已经从含义上说明了,所以它们的意思本来就很清楚。巴利
441.Anabhijjhādayo heṭṭhā atthato pakāsitattā uttānatthāyeva.
442 442. “一起离去、一起前往,所以叫共住者”,也就是共同存在、一起运作的人;这种状态就是共住性。因为是一起运作,所以说“达到了共住的状态”。梵天神的身体是一个集合体,所以叫梵身;因为属于这个集合体、投生到那里,所以叫梵身天。虽然这个名称本来可以通称一切梵天神群体,但因为“光”等说法已经把第二禅地及以上的天众另外区分出来了,剩下的就用这个名称,就像“牛”和“黄牛”的关系一样,所以说“梵身天:指初禅地的天人”。所谓“光”,并不是另外有一类独立的天人叫“光”,而是因为少光天等都有“有光明”这个共同特点,就把它们合在一起立了这个名称,叫“光”,就像把梵辅天、梵众天、大梵天王合称为梵身天一样。“少光天等”中的“等”字,包含了无量光天、光音天这些天众——这是巴利经文。“不一起取”:就是不把它们笼统地合在一起称为“光”,也不笼统地合在一起称为“一身、想之异等”。“分别取”:就是根据原因有优劣等差别,而分别取少光天等名称。就这样,世尊开示了法行、平等行,开示了随顺轮回的善趣之道,以及随顺还灭的漏尽之道后,以破除三有的方式显示了漏尽,以阿拉汉果为顶点,圆满结束了这次教示。巴利
442. Saha byayati gacchatīti sahabyo, sahavattanako, tassa bhāvo sahabyatā, sahapavattīti āha ‘‘sahabhāvaṃ upagaccheyya’’nti. Brahmānaṃ kāyo samūhoti brahmakāyo, tappariyāpannatāya tattha gatāti brahmakāyikā. Kāmaṃ cetāya sabbassapi brahmanikāyassa samaññāya bhavitabbaṃ, ‘‘ābhāna’’ntiādinā pana dutiyajjhānabhūmikādīnaṃ upari gahitattā gobalībaddañāyena tadavasesānaṃ ayaṃ samaññāti āha ‘‘brahmakāyikānaṃ devānanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmidevāna’’nti. Ābhā nāma visuṃ devā natthi, parittābhādīnaṃyeva pana ābhāvantatāsāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā pavattaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘‘ābhā’’ti yathā ‘‘brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmānaṃ brahmakāyikā’’ti. Parittābhānantiādi panāti ādi-saddena appamāṇābhānaṃ devānaṃ ābhassarānaṃ devānanti imaṃ pāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekato aggahetvāti ābhāti vā, ekattakāyanānattasaññāti vā ekato aggahetvā. Tesaṃyevāti ābhāti vuttadevānaṃyeva. Bhedato gahaṇanti kāraṇassa hīnādibhedabhinnatādassanavasena parittābhādiggahaṇaṃ. Iti bhagavā āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvāti evaṃ bhagavā dhammacariyaṃ, samacariyaṃ, vaṭṭanissitaṃ sugatigāmipaṭipadaṃ, vivaṭṭanissitaṃ āsavakkhayagāmipaṭipadaṃ katvā tibhavabhañjanato āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
在这里站定之后,就是在这法行与平等行的解说中站定之后。天界应当合并计算,就是把二十六种天界都合并在一起算。二十种梵天界,是按照各类众生所归属的群体来算,有二十种梵天界,意思就是二十类梵天众。以十善业道,就是按各自相应的情况,以十善业道作为业的亲依止缘,或者仅仅作为亲依止缘,由此显示了结生。巴利
Idha ṭhatvāti imasmiṃ dhammacariyāsamacariyāya niddese ṭhatvā. Devalokā samānetabbāti chabbīsatipi devalokā samodhānetabbā. Vīsati brahmalokāti taṃtaṃbhavapariyāpannanikāyavasena vīsati brahmalokā, vīsati brahmanikāyāti attho. Dasakusalakammapathehīti yathārahaṃ dasakusalakammapathehi kammūpanissayapaccayabhūtehi kevalaṃ upanissayabhūtehi ca nibbatti dassitā.
“三种善行”是指三种欲界的善行。这里之所以取“欲界”这个说法,是着眼于意善行。“唯以异熟”这句话,是为了说明:结生正是由这个异熟的生起而发生的,不是仅仅靠亲依止的关系。为了解释“依亲依止之力”这个说法的含义,就说了“十善业道确实是戒”等等。在“修习第二等”等地方,也应该把“立足于戒”这句话引过来连接。那么,为什么这里说“依亲依止之力”呢?《无碍解道》里确实说过:“以初禅来说,舍断诸盖是戒,远离是戒,思是戒,律仪是戒,不犯是戒”等等,在一切禅那中都举出了戒。那么,按照这个说法,上界天界的众生也应该以异熟来说其结生,不是吗?不是的。因为那是为了遍知而作的教导,而“为了遍知而教导”这一性质,在《清净道论大复注》中“于其处舍断”等处已经阐明过了。同样,这里说“十善业道确实是戒”等等,也是要说明戒对色界、无色界存在的亲依止性,而不是说它能直接产生结生。那么,为什么在这里,对以修习为特征的法行,在分析各种存在时,没有提到无想有情呢?所以说“无想有情……没有被列出”。因为外道不能如实知见,把无想有情错误地当成有情的解脱,修习能导向那里的禅那,结果就投生到无想有情中。这里只是简略说明,至于这里应当详细说的内容,应该按照《长部梵网经注》及其复注中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānanti tiṇṇaṃ kāmāvacarasucaritānaṃ. Kāmāvacaraggahaṇañcettha manosucaritāpekkhāya. Vipākenevāti iminā vipākuppādeneva nibbatti hoti, na upanissayatāmattenāti dasseti. ‘‘Upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘dasa kusalakammapathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyādīni bhāvetvātiādīsupi ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha ‘‘upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.41) – ‘‘paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānaṃ sīlaṃ, veramaṇi sīlaṃ, cetanā sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīla’’ntiādinā sabbesupi jhānesu sīlaṃ uddhaṭanti tassa vasena uparidevalokānampi vipākena nibbatti vattabbāti? Na, tassa pariññāya desanattā, pariññāya desanatā cassa ‘‘yattha ca pahāna’’ntiādinā visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.837, 839) pakāsitā eva. Tathā hi idhāpi ‘‘dasa kusalakammapathā hi sīla’’ntiādinā sīlassa rūpārūpabhavānaṃ upanissayatā vibhāvitā, na nibbattakatāya. Kasmā panettha bhāvanālakkhaṇāya dhammacariyāya bhavavisese vibhajiyamāne asaññabhavo na gahitoti āha ‘‘asaññabhavopana…pe… na niddiṭṭho’’ti. Bāhirakā hi ayathābhūtadassitāya asaññabhavaṃ bhavavippamokkhaṃ maññamānā tadupagajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā asaññesu nibbattanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ brahmajālaṭṭhakathāyaṃ taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.68-73; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.68-73) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
《毗兰若经》的注释巴利
2. Verañjakasuttavaṇṇanā
444 “住在毗兰若的人”就是指住在毗兰若村里的人。不过有些人说:“住在不同地方的人就叫毗兰若人。”按照他们的看法,巴利圣典里应该写成“verajjakā”。“没有确定该做什么”是指没有以“就叫这个名称”这种方式明确规定该做的事。这里的差别在于:这两部经的开示方式有差别,一部是以人为中心来说的,另一部是以法为中心来说的,但其中的义理和开示理路,就像从中间断开的两块黄金,其实并没有区别。这里就是为了说明这个道理。那么,为什么世尊有时以人为中心来开示,有时以法为中心来开示呢?这是因为开示方式的善巧变化,以及所应调伏者的意乐不同。诸佛世尊已经达到了开示方式自在变化的境界,所以他们随自己的喜好,有时以人为中心,有时以法为中心来说法。对于那些还没有进入教法次第的应调伏者,就为他们以人为中心来开示;对于已经进入的,就为他们以法为中心来开示。以人为中心的开示属于世俗谛的范围,另一种则属于究竟义谛的范围。前者随顺悲悯,后者随顺智慧。或者,前者是为随信行的种姓者说的,因为他们以人为衡量标准;后者是为随法行的种姓者说的。又或者,因为信仰性格而以世间主宰者之故,所以以人为中心;因为智慧性格而以法主宰者之故,所以以法为中心。前者是义理还需要引导的,后者是义理已经确定的。总之,应当知道,世尊是观察到这些种种差别之后,才在各地作这两种不同的开示。巴利
444.Verañjavāsinoti verañjagāmavāsino. Keci pana ‘‘vividharaṭṭhavāsino verañjakā’’ti etamatthaṃ vadanti, tesaṃ matena ‘‘verajjakā’’ti pāḷiyā bhavitabbanti. Aniyamitakiccenāti ‘‘iminā nāmā’’ti evaṃ na niyamitena kiccena. Ayaṃ visesoti ayaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānakato imesu dvīsu suttesu desanāya viseso, attho pana desanānayo ca majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya avisiṭṭhoti dasseti. Kasmā pana bhagavā katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanaṃ deseti, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānanti? Desanāvilāsato veneyyajjhāsayato ca. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te yathāruci katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Ye pana veneyyā sāsanakkamaṃ anotiṇṇā, tesaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanaṃ desenti. Ye otiṇṇā, tesaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sammutisaccavisayā puggalādhiṭṭhānā, itarā paramatthasaccavisayā. Purimā karuṇānukūlā, itarā paññānukūlā. Saddhānusārigottānaṃ vā purimā. Te hi puggalappamāṇā, pacchimā dhammānusārīnaṃ. Saddhācaritatāya vā lokādhipatīnaṃ vasena puggalādhiṭṭhānā, paññācaritatāya dhammādhipatīnaṃ vasena dhammādhiṭṭhānā. Purimā ca neyyatthā, pacchimā nītatthā. Iti bhagavā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ avekkhitvā tattha tattha duvidhaṃ desanaṃ desetīti veditabbaṃ.
3. 《大方广经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāvedallasuttavaṇṇanā
449 449. “重”就是恭敬,像石伞那样,是应当被敬重的状态。与恭敬在一起,就是“有恭敬”。当尊者对某件事说了话,因为恭敬而回应、听从,这叫“随顺”;与随顺在一起,就是“有随顺”。凡是随顺,或者与随顺同类的敬重行为,都属于随顺。有恭敬的人说出有随顺的话,就是“有恭敬有随顺语”。或者说,敬重的行为就是恭敬,有恭敬者的有随顺语,就是“有恭敬有随顺语”。这里显示的是:有恭敬的人,凭他本身的性质,就会说出那样的话。在其他地方,“du”这个音也可以表示谴责,比如“苦”“坏儿子”等。但在这里不是这样,因为不存在低劣的智慧,所以说“并没有所谓智慧恶劣这回事”。像“恶戒者”这类词里,“du”这个音表示“没有”,所以说“意思是没有慧、没有智慧”。“多少”是指以什么为标准。这个标准,因为是对所要衡量的意义加以限定,而“nu”这个音又是表示疑问的,所以说“多少是问原因的限定”,然后说“意思是:以多少而这样说”。通过“问原因的限定”这句话,显示“多少”是总体上的提问,不是从具体差别来问。为了说明它是提问的一种,就依照《大义释》里以提取意义的方式列出的所有提问,用“提问也叫做……”等来说明。以它照亮未见之物,就是“照亮未见”,也就是提问。以已见之物相互对照,通过交谈来作出决定,就是“已见和合”。以它切断疑惑,就是“断疑”。出于同意而提问,就是“同意问”。比如“比丘们,你们怎么想”这样的提问,就是在问“你们同意吗”,所以是问了同意。出于想要说而提问,就是“想说问”。巴利
449. Garubhāvo gāravaṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇīyatā. Saha gāravenāti sagāravo, garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patissavo, saha patissavena sappatissavo, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃ kiñci garukaraṇaṃ. Sagārave sappatissavacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ. Garukaraṇaṃ vā gāravo, sagāravassa sappatissavacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ. Etena sabhāveneva sagāravassa tathāpavattaṃ vacananti dasseti. Aññattha du-saddo garahatthopi hoti ‘‘dukkhaṃ dupputto’’tiādīsu viya, idha pana so na sambhavati kucchitāya paññāya abhāvatoti āha ‘‘paññāya duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. ‘‘Dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya abhāvattho du-saddoti vuttaṃ ‘‘appañño nippaññoti attho’’ti. Kittakenāti kena parimāṇena. Taṃ pana parimāṇaṃ yasmā parimeyyassa atthassa paricchindanaṃ hoti, nu-saddo ca pucchāya jotako, tasmā ‘‘kittāvatā nu khoti kāraṇaparicchedapucchā’’ti vatvā ‘‘kittakena nu kho evaṃ vuccatīti attho’’ti āha. ‘‘Kāraṇaparicchedapucchā’’ti iminā ‘‘kittāvatā’’ti sāmaññato pucchābhāvo dassito, na visesato, tassa pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ mahāniddese āgatā sabbāva pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘pucchā ca nāmā’’tiādinā. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā, pucchā. Diṭṭhasaṃsandanā sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave’’tiādipucchāya hi ‘‘kiṃ tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetuṃ kamyatāya pucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā.
“相”是指任何一种想要被了解的自性。“未了知”是说,以任何一种智慧来看,都还没有被了知。“未见”是说,以“见”这种作用来说,就像眼前的东西一样,却还没有被看到。“未称量”是说,没有被以“它有这么多”这种方式衡量过。“未审定”是说,以审定的作用来说,还没有完成智慧的作用。“未明显”是指对智慧而言未显现的状态。“未显了”是指没有被智慧弄得清楚明白。这里说的是以已经见到的事情来互相印证、讨论发问,不是阐明没见到的事情,也不是为了断除疑惑。巴利
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ icchito yo koci sabhāvo. Aññātanti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvaṃ āha. Adiṭṭhanti dassanabhūtena paccakkhaṃ viya adiṭṭhataṃ. Atulitanti ‘‘ettakaṃ ida’’nti tulanabhūtena atulitataṃ. Atīritanti tīraṇabhūtena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ. Avibhūtanti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ. Avibhāvitanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ. Idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā, na adiṭṭhajotanā vimaticchedanā cāti.
这个意思要怎么理解呢?于是说“长老确实……”等等。“自己作决断”就是自己亲自对那些问题的含义加以辨别判定。“这部经”指的是这部由二十五个问题所庄严的经,而不是随便哪一部经都毫无遗漏地达到了终点。为了说明“自己提出问题之后又自己作决断”这句话里有四种情况,就说“有些人确实……”等等。只能提出问题,就是只知道提问的方式。不能决断,就是没有能力决断,不知道解答的方式。“殊胜之处”就是不同于其他人的不共之处。与长老相似,就是没有与长老相似的弟子。巴利
Kathamayaṃ attho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘thero hī’’tiādi. Sayaṃ vinicchinantoti sayameva tesaṃ pañhānaṃ atthaṃ visesena nicchinanto. Idaṃ suttanti idaṃ pañcavīsatipañhapaṭimaṇḍitasuttaṃ, na yaṃ kiñci anavaseseneva matthakaṃ pāpesīti. ‘‘Sayameva pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto’’ti ettha catukkoṭikaṃ bhavatīti dassento ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādimāha. Pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetuṃyeva sakkotīti pucchanavidhiṃyeva jānāti. Na nicchetunti nicchetuṃ na sakkoti, vissajjanavidhiṃ na jānātīti attho. Visesaṭṭhānanti aññehi asadisaṭṭhānaṃ. Therena sadisoti therena sadiso sāvako natthi.
把两者对应结合起来、合为一体,就是“合和”;意思是说,就像一切知智在那里运作那样,完全不违背它。“游舞”就是做游舞。因为达到了说法第一的顶尖地位,又在那里拥有无碍的智慧,所以能像佛陀的游舞一样,把握四众弟子的情况而宣说佛法。巴利
Saṃsanditvāti saṃyojetvā samānaṃ katvā, yathā tattha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pavattaṃ, tathā taṃ avilometvāti attho. Līḷāyantoti līḷaṃ karonto. Dhammakathikatāya aggabhāvappattiyā tattha appaṭihatañāṇatāya buddhalīḷāya viya catunnaṃ parisānaṃ gamanaṃ gaṇhanto dhammakathaṃ katheti.
从“这里或那里逐步推进”这句话的意思是:从已经学到的教法路线上,不管到了哪里,哪怕只稍微往前推进一点,也完全按照已经学到的既定规则来进行。因此说“杖端”等话。“单句”就是只安放一句经文。“单杖桥”就是用一根木杖搭成的桥。通过上下引出经文句子,把三藏佛语上下贯通起来。先放下一句像天然湖一样的偈颂或经文,然后从中引出各种譬喻和道理,又用那些经文句子来让它们觉悟、激发出来,所以被形容为“像在天然湖里让五色花盛开,又像在须弥山顶点亮千盏灯芯”。巴利
Ito vā etto vā anukkamitvāti uggahitakathāmaggato yattha katthaci īsakampi anukkamitvā uggahitaniyāmenevāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭi’’ntiādi. Ekapadikanti ekapadanikkhepamattaṃ. Daṇḍakasetunti ekadaṇḍakamayaṃ setuṃ. Heṭṭhā ca upari ca suttapadānaṃ āharaṇena tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto. Jātassarasadisañca gāthaṃ, suttapadaṃ vā nikkhipitvā tattha nānāupamākāraṇāni āharanto tāni ca tehi suttapadehi bodhento samuṭṭhāpento ‘‘jātassare pañcavaṇṇāni kusumāni phullāpento viya sinerumatthake vaṭṭisahassaṃ jālento viyā’’ti vutto.
“一次提起”是指在同一个词被提起的刹那。按词来算,有六百万个词;按偈颂来算,有一万五千首偈颂。就像不一朵一朵地摘花,而是直接抓住藤蔓,把花一起聚拢拿走一样。因此说“一次就全部提取”。“具足智慧行持者”,是指具备卓越智慧行持的人;“具足坚定者”,是指具备执持之力的人。巴利
Ekapaduddhāreti ekasmiṃ paduddhāraṇakkhaṇe. Padavasena saṭṭhi padasatasahassāni gāthāvasena pannarasa gāthāsahassāni. Ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhanto viyāti paccekaṃ pupphāni anocinitvā vallimeva ākaḍḍhitvā ekajjhaṃ pupphāni katvā gaṇhanto viya. Tenāha ‘‘ekappahārenevā’’ti. Gatimantānanti atisayāya ñāṇagatiyā yuttānaṃ. Dhitimantānanti dhāraṇabalena yuttānaṃ.
“具有无量理趣与充实”是说:从缘所生之法、所说的义理、涅槃、果报、唯作等各方面来看,所缘境有无量的差别种类,以无量的理趣而积聚、充实。应当这样连接理解:就像为了渡越四种瀑流的人,在渡口所安置的船一样。所谓“具有千轭之良骏车乘”,是就韦迦亚塔车乘而说的。巴利
Anantanayussadanti paccayuppannabhāsitatthanibbānavipākakiriyādivasena anantapabhede visaye pavattiyā anantanayehi ussannaṃ upacitaṃ. Caturoghanittharaṇatthikānaṃ titthe ṭhapitanāvā viyāti yojanā. Sahassayuttaājaññarathoti vejayantarathaṃ sandhāya vadati.
提问时,是用追问释义的方式,以“劣慧者、劣慧者”这样的重复词来问的;因此,法将舍利弗在回答所问之义时,也按照与提问相应的方式,用重复词说“不了知、不了知”。在这里,为了说明“iti”这个词表示原因,他说:“因为不了知,所以被称为劣慧者。”所谓“这是苦”,是指这五取蕴就是苦圣谛。而这五取蕴,简要来说,就是被逼迫、被感受、被感知、被造作、被了别这么一些。除此之外,再没有任何种类的法可以称为苦圣谛。他不能以圣道的智慧如实了知:从真实自性的特相——也就是逼迫、造作、热恼、变异的特相——他不能了知;从生起的次第,他也不能了知。“在其余诸缘和合时”,就是生起、出现;而这个生起就是集谛,因为它属于轮回流转的体性,所以说“是流转之苦的能生者”,意思是能令苦谛生起。所谓从真实自性的特相来了知,就是从如实无间断的作用,以及从结集、作为因、结合、障碍这些特相来了知。巴利
Yasmā pucchāyaṃ byāpanicchānayena ‘‘duppañño duppañño’’ti āmeḍitavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā dhammasenāpati pucchitamatthaṃ vissajjento pucchāsabhāgena ‘‘nappajānāti nappajānātī’’ti āmeḍitavasenevāha. Tattha iti-saddo kāraṇatthoti dassento ‘‘yasmā nappajānāti, tasmā duppaññotivuccatī’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Tañca kho ruppanaṃ vediyanaṃ sañjānanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ vijānananti saṅkhepato ettakaṃ. Ito uddhaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ nāma natthīti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato pavattikkamato ceva pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmalakkhaṇato ca yathābhūtaṃ ariyamaggapaññāya nappajānāti. Avasesapaccayasamāgame udayati uppajjati, svāyaṃ samudayo saṃsārapavattibhāvenāti āha ‘‘pavattidukkhapabhāvikā’’ti, dukkhasaccassa uppādikāti attho. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ anupacchedakaraṇarasato ceva sampiṇḍananidānasaṃyogapalibodhalakkhaṇato ca.
到达名为这样的状态是指依靠这个名为“不再转起”的原因。“寂灭”是指以不再生起的寂灭方式而止息,因此说“两者都不再转起”。所谓以如实自性为特征,就是从如实存在的不死作用,以及从“出离、远离、灭、不死”这些特征来了知。“这是道”:这是以正见等为首、以和合为特征的道,因为依此而行,所以称为道。“导向苦灭”:通过作证现观的方式,朝向苦灭——也就是涅槃——前进,并为此而发动。“所谓以如实自性为特征”,就是从如实存在的“断除烦恼”作用,以及从“出离、见因、增上”这些特征,却不了知。在紧接着的一轮,即第二轮中。依此理趣,就是按照第一轮所说“这是苦,这有这许多苦”等那样的方式。因为在那里,是说明劣慧者,以否定了知的方式而开示;而在这里,是说明具慧者,以肯定了知的方式而开示,这就是差别所在。在此处,指的就是第二轮。巴利
Idaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ patvāti idaṃ nāma appavattikāraṇaṃ āgamma. Nirujjhatīti anuppādanirodhavasena nirujjhati, tenāha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ appavattī’’ti. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ accutirasato ceva nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhatāmatalakkhaṇato ca. Ayaṃ paṭipadāti ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādikā samodhānalakkhaṇā paṭipajjati etāyāti paṭipadā. Dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchatīti dukkhanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena gacchati ārabbha pavattati. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ kilesappahānakaraṇasarasato ceva niyyānahetudassanādhipateyyalakkhaṇato ca nappajānāti. Anantaravāreti dutiyavāre. Imināva nayenāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭhamavāre vuttanayena. Tattha hi duppaññaniddesattā pajānanapaṭikkhepavasena desanā āgatā, idha paññavantaniddesattā pajānanavasenāti ayameva viseso. Etthāti dutiyavāre.
通过听闻业处而学习,就是以听闻教典作为入口,来领会其中的义理。“除却渴爱”等语句,就是展示这种学习方式的例子。“专注”是指以内观投入的方式专注,从而建立起内观业处。它不朝向“还灭”,因为在还灭上的专注不属于它的领域,所以不会发生。“这位”就是指修习四圣谛业处的那个人。巴利
Savanatoti kammaṭṭhānassa savanato uggaṇhāti. Ganthasavanamukhena hi tadatthassa uggahaṇaṃ. Ṭhapetvā taṇhantiādi tassa uggahaṇākāranidassanaṃ. Abhinivisatīti vipassanābhinivesavasena abhinivisati vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ paṭṭhapeti. No vivaṭṭeti vivaṭṭe abhiniveso na hoti avisayattā. Ayanti catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko.
“五蕴”就是五取蕴。虽然可以按蕴来切入内观,也可以按眼等、受等许多不同方式来切入,这些都容易修、也容易理解,但为了通过四界之门来说明它,所以说“以界业处的方式进入”。所谓“确定色”,就是依“被恼坏”这个含义来确定色,把它和其他法区分开来,不混淆。“以彼为所缘”是指那些以色为所缘而生起的心法。所谓“确定名”,就是依“朝向”这个含义,把受、想、行、识这四类法确定为名。就像劈开一对多罗树干一样,把这对组合拆开,确定“这是非色,这是色”——只有这两类法,其中没有我,也没有我所。这样来确定、区分、把握名色。到这里,就显示了见清净。不过,这个名色并不是没有原因的。因为一切并不是在任何地方、任何时候都恒常存在,所以它是有因的。是什么样的因呢?不是大自在天等错误的因。这里应当说明的内容,要按《清净道论大注》里所说的方式来理解。正因为它有因,所以它也有缘。无明等就是它的缘,也就是无明、渴爱、取、业、食等。如此,依照“这个名色……”等前面所说的方式,对无明等诸缘以及色、受等缘所生的法加以确定、区分、把握。经中确实这样说:“无明生起则色生起,渴爱生起则色生起。”到这里,就显示了度疑清净。巴利
Pañcakkhandhāti pañcupādānakkhandhā. Khandhavasena vipassanābhinivesassa cakkhādivasena vedanādivasena ca satipi anekavidhatte sukaraṃ suviññeyyanti catudhātumukhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhātukammaṭṭhānavasena otaritvā’’ti āha. Rūpanti vavatthapetīti ruppanaṭṭhena rūpanti asaṅkarato paricchindati. Tadārammaṇāti taṃ rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanakā. Nāmanti vedanādicatukkaṃ namanaṭṭhena nāmanti vavatthāpeti. Yamakatālakkhandhaṃ bhindanto viya yamakaṃ bhinditvā ‘‘arūpaṃ, rūpañcā’’ti dveva ime dhammā, na ettha koci attā vā attaniyaṃ vāti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti paricchindati pariggaṇhāti. Ettāvatā diṭṭhivisuddhi dassitā. Taṃ panetaṃ nāmarūpaṃ na ahetukaṃ. Yasmā sabbaṃ sabbattha sabbadā ca natthi, tasmā sahetukaṃ. Kīdisena hetunā? Na issarādivisamahetunā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.447) vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Sahetukattā eva sapaccayaṃ. Avijjādayoti avijjātaṇhupādānakammāhārādayo. Evanti ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādinā vuttappakārena avijjādike paccaye ceva rūpavedanādike paccayuppannadhamme ca vavatthapetvā paricchinditvā pariggahetvā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, taṇhāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50). Ettāvatā kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiṃ dasseti.
“生起之后”是指在因缘和合中生起之后。“以非有之义”是指紧接着就坏灭的意义。“无常”就是不恒常、不稳固。所谓“将无常相加上去”,就是在那些五蕴之上,把称为“无常性”的共相加上去。“从那之后”是指从加上无常相之后,或者从那种无常的状态之后。“以生灭逼恼的行相”是指以不断生生灭灭、反复逼恼的行相为因,所以是苦、是不可意的,或者本身就是苦。“以不受操控的行相”是指不随任何人的意愿而运转的行相。“无我”是指五蕴不是自己,五蕴中也没有任何东西是“我”,所以叫无我。“加上三相之后”是指这样——因为无常的就是苦,苦的又是无我——在五蕴上把这三种共相都加上去之后。“如理作意者”是指:由于生灭智的生起,舍弃了已经生起的内观随烦恼,确定了正道与非道,然后依照生灭智等内观的次第,对诸行如理作意,在种姓智之后,证得出世间道。巴利
Hutvāti hetupaccayasamavāye uppajjitvā. Abhāvaṭṭhenāti tadanantarameva vinassanaṭṭhena. Aniccāti aniccā addhuvā. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropetīti tesu pañcasu khandhesu aniccatāsaṅkhātaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ niropeti. Tatoti aniccalakkhaṇāropanato paraṃ, tato vā aniccabhāvato. Udayabbayappaṭipīḷanākārenāti uppādanirodhehi pati pati abhikkhaṇaṃ pīḷanākārena hetunā dukkhā aniṭṭhā, dukkhamā vā. Avasavattanākārenāti kassaci vasena avasavattanākārena. Anattāti na sayaṃ attā, nāpi nesaṃ koci attā atthīti anattāti. Tilakkhaṇaṃāropetvāti evaṃ aniccassa dukkhabhāvato, dukkhassa ca anattabhāvato khandhapañcake tividhampi sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā. Sammasantoti udayabbayañāṇuppattiyā uppanne vipassanupakkilese pahāya maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā udayabbayañāṇādivipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā saṅkhāre sammasanto gotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ lokuttaramaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
以同一个智慧来通达,就是“一通彻”。所谓通彻,是以没有障碍、在所缘境中无执而行的方式透彻通达。现观,是不偏离地证得,也就是觉悟。确定“这是苦,这些就是苦,没有比这更多的苦”,并如实了知,按前面所说的方式就是通彻,这叫遍知通彻。这是就智慧生起之后,对苦的自性等加以确定时不再有迷乱这种运行方式来说的,并不是说道智有“这是苦”这样的运行,所以说“而在他那个刹那……”。对于已经断除的烦恼,由于不再有可断除性,彻底舍断、根绝,就是断除;断除本身按前面所说的方式就是通彻,这叫断除通彻。这也是就以下情形说的:若某烦恼未被断除,道的修习就不可能存在;若道的修习不存在,那烦恼就可能生起;智慧在打击它、使它成为不再生起的法时,以没有障碍、无执而行的方式运作,依此而说。体证,是现量的亲证,是舍弃传闻、思构等方式之后,纯粹以自性为所缘,确定“就是这个”,如实地把握;体证本身按前面所说的方式就是通彻,这叫体证通彻。这也是就以下情形说的:当某一障碍未被根除时,智慧不能以寂灭为所缘;当该障碍被根除后,智慧便以自性明现地生起,依此而说。巴利
Ekapaṭivedhenāti ekeneva ñāṇena paṭivijjhanena. Paṭivedho paṭighātābhāvena visaye nissaṅgacārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ. Abhisamayo avirajjhitvā adhigamanasaṅkhāto avabodho. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti paricchinditvā yāthāvato jānanameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pariññāpaṭivedho, idañca yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na pana maggañāṇassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiñcassa khaṇe’’tiādi. Pahīnassa puna apahātabbatāya pakaṭṭhaṃ hānaṃ cajanaṃ samucchindanaṃ pahānaṃ, pahānameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pahānapaṭivedho. Ayampi yena kilesena appahīyamānena maggabhāvanāya na bhavitabbaṃ, asati ca maggabhāvanāya yo uppajjeyya, tassa padaghātaṃ karontassa anuppattidhammataṃ āpādentassa ñāṇassa tathāpavattiyā paṭighātābhāvena nissaṅgacāraṃ upādāya evaṃ vutto. Sacchikiriyā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ anussavākāraparivitakkādike muñcitvāva sarūpato ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ ta’’nti yāthāvasabhāvato gahaṇaṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho. Ayampi yassa āvaraṇassa asamucchindanato ñāṇaṃ nirodhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkoti, tassa samucchindanato taṃ sarūpato vibhāvitameva pavattatīti evaṃ vutto.
修习就是令生起和令增长。在这里,在初道时,以令生起的意义称为修习;在第二道等时,以令增长的意义称为修习;在两种情况下,也可以理解为两者兼具。因为初道也能随宜地使趋向出起观的遍知等增长而运作,所以在这里也可以理解为以增长为意义的修习。在第二道等时,由于断除了尚未断除的烦恼,以及能成就其他修行者,所以也有以令生起为意义的修习。这修习本身按照前面所说的方式就是通达,因此称为修习通达。这也是就智慧生起之后,对道法自性的确定不再有迷乱的运作方式而说的。暂且不论已证得的道法,即使在如其运作的果上,这位还在有学位的圣者,也像对已证得的谛法一样,完全远离迷乱。因此说:“见法、得法、知法、深入法。”正如他的法被阐明那样,依于所证得的谛法,在道心路过程之后,对道、果、已断烦恼、剩余烦恼和涅槃的省察便运作起来。因为苦谛法就是身见等。这个义理在“以遍知现观”等处也应当说明。从作用方面说,即从无迷乱的意义说。关于“以灭为所缘”,这里的“亦”字应当理解为省略所示;因为在灭上也能获得无迷乱的通达。所谓“此”,是指以四谛为业处的这个人。巴利
Bhāvanā uppādanā vaḍḍhanā ca. Tattha paṭhamamagge uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, dutiyādīsu vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena, ubhayatthāpi vā ubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggopi hi yathārahaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminiyaṃ pavattaṃ parijānanādiṃ vaḍḍhento pavattoti tatthāpi vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Dutiyādīsupi appahīnakilesappahānato puggalantarasādhanato ca uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti bhāvanāpaṭivedho. Ayampi yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā maggadhammānaṃ sarūpaparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vutto. Tiṭṭhantu tāva yathādhigatā maggadhammā, yathāpavattesu phalesupi ayaṃ yathādhigatasaccadhammesu viya vigatasammohova hoti sekkhopi samāno. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti (mahāva. 27). Yathā cassa dhammā tāsaṃ jotitā yathādhigatasaccadhammāvalambiniyo maggavīthito parato maggaphalapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesanibbānānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā pavattanti. Dukkhasaccadhammā hi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo. Ayañca atthavaṇṇanā pariññābhisamayenātiādīsupi vibhāvetabbā. Kiccatoti asammohato. Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇatoti ettha ‘‘ārammaṇatopī’’ti pi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho daṭṭhabbo nirodhepi asammohapaṭivedhassa labbhanato. Etassāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa puggalassa.
这里说的“有慧者”,是直接从具有智慧这一点来确定的,因为此处正是要表达这个意思。从法义上说,是依巴利文本;从义理上说,是依注疏;从关联上说,是依每一部经各自的前后连接;从前后次第上说,是依前文与后文相互对照。这里的前后次第,应当按结集的顺序来理解,或者按每一处教导中前一部分与后一部分相互对照来理解。“识行者”是指以了知为行、以审察为行,因为他在三藏佛语中对种种考察的行持极为广大。不能说他是有慧者,因为他还没有由圣道产生的智慧。“今日今时就能证得阿拉汉果”,意思是短暂、极其迅速,这就是此处要表达的意思。不过,他仍然可以归入有慧者这一边,因为他毕竟还具有有学这一层面的身份。但在经中只说到通达,因为经文是依现观四谛来说的。巴利
Paññavāti niddiṭṭho nippariyāyato paññavantatāya idha adhippetattā. Pāḷitoti dhammato. Atthatoti aṭṭhakathāto. Anusandhitoti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte taṃtaṃanusandhito. Pubbāparatoti pubbenāparassa saṃsandanato. Saṅgītikkamena cettha pubbāparatā veditabbā. Taṃtaṃdesanāyameva vā pubbabhāgena aparabhāgassa saṃsandanato. Viññāṇacaritoti vijānanacarito vīmaṃsanacarito tepiṭake buddhavacane vicāraṇācāravepullato. Paññavāti na vattabbo maggenāgatāya paññāya abhāvato. Ajja ajjeva arahattanti ittaraṃ atikhippamevāti adhippāyo. Paññavāpakkhaṃ bhajati sekkhapariyāyasabbhāvato. Sutte pana paṭivedhova kathito saccābhisamayavasena āgatattā.
“此”指的是紧接着前面所说的那位圣者。“造业之心”,是指让修行的业运作起来的心。“他也了知乐受”——是谁在感受?这是谁的受?为什么会有受?他正是通过把握“没有感受者”这一点,从乐受的自性、集起、灭尽、滋味、过患等方面,如实地辨别、把握乐受,这才叫作“了知乐受”。其余两句(苦受、不苦不乐受)也是同样的解释方式。因为“念处”这个词已经标示出念处这个论题,所以应当借助那个论题来理解这里的含义;因此,这部复注中所说的道理,也应当按同样的方式去理解。虽然这个识也能了知受以外的所缘,但紧接着的段落已经显示观是缘色而入的;所以这里是为了显示缘无色而入,或者依照提问者的意乐,才用“他也了知乐受”等语句来加以说明。巴利
Esāti anantare vutto ariyapuggalo. Kammakārakacittanti bhāvanākammassa pavattanakacittaṃ . Sukhavedanampi vijānātīti ko vediyati, kassa vedanā, kiṃkāraṇā vedanā, sopi kassaci abhāvaggahaṇamukhena sukhaṃ vedanaṃ sabhāvato samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato ca yathābhūtaṃ paricchindanto pariggaṇhanto sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vijānāti nāma. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Yasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāne’’ti iminā satipaṭṭhānakathaṃ upalakkheti. Tāya hi tadattho veditabbo, tasmā taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyampi (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.380) vuttanayena tassattho veditabbo . Kāmañcetaṃ viññāṇaṃ vedanāto aññampi ārammaṇaṃ vijānāti, anantaravāre pana rūpamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa dassitattā idha arūpamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhantipi vijānātī’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhaṃ, pucchantassa vā ajjhāsayavasena.
“相结合”就是相应。因此说“以同生等特征、以结合之义”。“不结合”就是不相应。“破坏后”就是以见到另一地的方式破坏属于另一地者,或者使之破碎。问结合性,就是问包含在该心生起中的五种识的结合性。如果这样,对不结合性既然根本没有怀疑,提问的机会又从何而来?并非如此,因为在同一心生起中的道慧与道识、观慧与观识,有混合式的结合性可得。“令脱离”就是使它们彼此分离。说“无法显示其差别”,这只是就结合性本身而说的,不是指自性上的差别;从自性差别来看,它们的差别是极为明显的。因此说“或从所缘,或从依处,或从生起,或从灭”。接着,为了以境的差别清楚地显示那自性差别,而说“然而那些那些”等。“境”就是活动之处、自在之境,因此心与慧在处处被称为先行者。巴利
Saṃsaṭṭhāti sampayuttā. Tenāha ‘‘ekuppādādilakkhaṇena saṃyogaṭṭhenā’’ti. Visaṃsaṭṭhāti vippayuttā. Bhinditvāti aññabhūmikassa aññabhūmidassaneneva vināsetvā, saṃbhinditvā vā. Saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchatīti taṃcittuppādapariyāpannānaṃ pañcaviññāṇānaṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchati. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ pucchāya avasaro visaṃsaṭṭhabhāvāsaṅkāya eva abhāvato? Na, cittuppādantaragatānaṃ maggapaññāmaggaviññāṇānaṃ vipassanāpaññāvipassanāviññāṇānañca vomissakasaṃsaṭṭhabhāvassa labbhamānattā. Vinivaṭṭetvāti aññamaññato vivecetvā. Nānākaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkāti idaṃ kevalaṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sabhāvabhedaṃ, sabhāvabhedato pana nānākaraṇaṃ nesaṃ pākaṭameva. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇato vā vatthuto vā uppādato vā nirodhato vā’’ti. Idāni tameva sabhāvabhedaṃ visayabhedena suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visayoti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ issariyabhūmi, yena cittapaññānaṃ tattha tattha pubbaṅgamatā vuccati.
虽然观慧也是依靠慧的力量来运作,道也是与识一起生起,并不是单独运作的;但在世间法中,心是主导,因为它以承担重任的方式而活动。正因如此,心被称为“六门之主、王”。同样地,在出世间法中,慧是主导,因为摧破敌对法特别依赖于慧,所以在道法中,正见首先被举出。而且,这是依据它们各自在所缘境上的活动差别而安立的。这种安立方式不只是长老们显示过,世尊也显示过。为了阐明这一点,论主说“正自觉者也是如此”等。在没有慧的地方,以心来提问是无可言说的,比如“比丘,你以什么心”等。然而,在有慧的地方,也有以心来阐明的情况,比如“他将心安住于内、令寂静、令专一、令等持”,以及“当欲界善心生起时”等。但在注疏中,为了以对比的方式显示——世间法中以心发问,出世间法中以慧发问——而说“比丘,你证得了什么慧”等。应当知道,这是依多数情况而说的。确实,有些地方世间法也以慧为首来解说,比如“初禅的获得者,与欲俱行的想和作意现前,这是退分慧”等;也有以想为首来解说的,比如“肿胀想,或者其余色界、无色界的想,这些法是同义还是异义”等。同样地,出世间法在某些地方也以心为首来解说,比如“当修习出世间心时”,也有以触等为首来解说的,比如“当修习出世间触时,修习受、想、思”等。巴利
Kāmañca vipassanāpi paññāvaseneva kiccakārī, maggopi viññāṇasahitova, na kevalo, yathā pana lokiyadhammesu cittaṃ padhānaṃ tatthassa dhorayhabhāvena pavattisabbhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘chadvārādhipati rājā’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.181) vuccati, evaṃ lokuttaradhammesu paññā padhānā paṭipakkhavidhamanassa visesato tadadhīnattā. Tathā hi maggadhamme sammādiṭṭhi eva paṭhamaṃ gahitā. Ayañca nesaṃ visayavasena pavattibhedo, tathā ca paññāpanavidhi na kevalaṃ thereheva dassito, apica kho bhagavatāpi dassitoti vibhāvento ‘‘sammāsambuddhopī’’tiādimāha. Yattha paññā na labbhati, tattha cittavasena pucchane vattabbameva natthi yathā ‘‘kiṃcitto tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādīsu (pārā. 132-135). Yattha pana paññā labbhati, tatthāpi cittavasena jotanā hoti yathā – ‘‘ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapeti sannisādeti ekodiṃ karoti samādahati (saṃ. ni. 4.332), yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1). Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana lokiyadhammesu cittavasena, lokuttaradhammesu paññāvasena codanaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘katamā te bhikkhu paññā adhigatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yebhuyyavasena cetaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi katthaci lokiyadhammā paññāsīsenapi niddisīyanti – ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhino kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācaranti hānabhāginī paññā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.1). Saññāsīsenapi – ‘‘uddhumātakasaññāti vā sesarūpārūpasaññāti vā ime dhammā ekatthā, udāhu nānatthā’’tiādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 45.padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā). Tathā lokuttaradhammāpi katthaci cittasīsena niddisīyanti – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ cittaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (dha. sa. 277), tathā phassādisīsenapi – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ phassaṃ bhāveti, vedanaṃ saññaṃ cetanaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 277).
在四种入流支中:也就是亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行这四种入流道的因。虽然在这些支里,念等法也同样是需要的——因为离开它们,这些支就无法成立——但在这里应当知道,信的作用特别突出。正是因为具信者才去亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、随顺圣道而修行,所以说“在这里应当看到信根”。按照这个道理,其余诸根的含义也应当这样理解。在四正勤中:也就是修习四种正勤时。在四念处等中,也是同样的道理。在这里,就像在入流支中信的作用那样,在修习正勤时精进的作用那样,在修习念处时——“具念者,能调伏世间的贪忧”——在前行阶段,从作用上说,念应当被视为更主要。同样地,对于以定为修行核心的人,定更主要;按照“修习圣谛就是修习慧”的说法,在那里,慧在前行阶段更主要——这个道理很明显。但在证得的刹那,就像定与慧一样,信等一切根都应当达到平衡均等的状态。正因为如此,才在种种地方用“在这里,信根”这样的说法来指出。所谓“如是”,就是指诸根平衡等状态。所谓“唯在各自的境中”,就是各自在自己的所缘中。所谓“世间、出世间法已被解说”,就是世间法和出世间法都按照各自生起的差别而得到了说明。这段话的意思是:当信等五根共同运作时,在各自的境中,因为信等各自在作用上的优越性,所以说应当看到那一个特定的根,而不是全部。同样地,其他世间法和出世间法,也应当按照各自在境中生起的差别来理解。巴利
Catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesūti sappurisasevanā, saddhammassavanaṃ, yonisomanasikāro, dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti imesu catūsu sotāpattimaggassa kāraṇesu. Kāmaṃ cetesu satiādayopi dhammā icchitabbāva tehi vinā tesaṃ asambhavato, tathāpi cettha saddhā visesato kiccakārīti veditabbā. Saddo eva hi sappurise payirupāsati, saddhammaṃ suṇāti, yoniso ca manasi karoti, ariyamaggassa ca anudhammaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi attho daṭṭhabbo. Catūsu sammappadhānesūti catubbidhasammappadhānabhāvanāya. Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesūtiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sotāpattiyaṅgesu saddhā viya sammappadhānabhāvanāya vīriyaṃ viya ca satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya – ‘‘satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.106; saṃ. ni. 5.384, 407) vacanato pubbabhāge kiccato sati adhikā icchitabbā. Evaṃ samādhikammikassa samādhi, ‘‘ariyasaccabhāvanā paññābhāvanā’’ti katvā tattha paññā pubbabhāge adhikā icchitabbāti pākaṭoyamattho, adhigamakkhaṇe pana samādhipaññānaṃ viya sabbesampi indriyānaṃ saddhādīnaṃ samarasatāva icchitabbā. Tathā hi ‘‘ettha saddhindriya’’ntiādinā tattha tattha etthaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Evanti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ, taṃ indriyasamattādiṃ paccāmasati. Savisayasmiṃyevāti attano attano visaye eva. Lokiyalokuttarā dhammā kathitāti lokiyadhammā lokuttaradhammā ca tena tena pavattivisesena kathitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – saddhāpañcamesu indriyesu saha pavattamānesu tattha tattha visaye saddhādīnaṃ kiccādhikatāya tassa tasseva daṭṭhabbatā vuttā, na sabbesaṃ. Evaṃ aññepi lokiyalokuttarā dhammā yathāsakaṃ visaye pavattivisesavasena bodhitāti.
现在,为了用譬喻说明信等诸根在各自场合有更突出的作用,所以说了“犹如有”等话。这里譬喻和法义的对应是这样的:五根就像以国王为首的五个同伴,是使解脱成熟的因素。就像他们为了玩耍而一起走上街道,诸根也是一起进入观的道路。就像同伴中第一个等人只在自己家里活动,信等诸根在达到入流支等之后,成为先行者。就像其余同伴在各处保持沉默,其余诸根也在各处随顺那个先行者。这就是随顺那个作为先行者的根的作用。因为那时候,它们的作用不像在具备各种条件的地大等中水大等的作用那样明显,反而是只有信等根的作用清清楚楚地显现出来,因为此前心相续已经被那样的因缘所塑造。在这里,为了显示修观者的修行特别以慧为最上,就以国王为例子来说明慧根。“如是”等话,是对所证得意义的总结。巴利
Idāni saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ tattha tattha atirekakiccataṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ rājapañcamā sahāyā viya vimuttiparipācakāni pañcindriyāni. Nesaṃ kīḷanatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ vīthiotaraṇaṃ viya indriyānaṃ ekajjhaṃ vipassanāvīthiotaraṇaṃ. Sahāyesu paṭhamādīnaṃ yathāsakageheva vicāraṇā viya saddhādīnaṃ sotāpattiaṅgādīni patvā pubbaṅgamatā. Sahāyesu itaresaṃ tattha tattha tuṇhībhāvo viya sesindriyānaṃ tattha tattha tadanvayatā. Tassa pubbaṅgamabhūtassa indriyassa kiccānugatatā. Na hi tadā tesaṃ sasambhārapathavīādīsu āpādīnaṃ viya kiccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, saddhādīnaṃyeva pana kiccaṃ vibhūtaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati puretaraṃ tathāpaccayehi cittasantānassa abhisaṅkhatattā. Ettha ca vipassanākammikassa bhāvanā visesato paññuttarāti dassanatthaṃ rājānaṃ nidassanaṃ katvā paññindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. Itītiādi yathādhigatassa atthassa nigamanaṃ.
“道识也一样”:这是指与圣道相应、以及趣向舍离的识。它也同样地了知它,也就是以“这是苦”等方式来了知谛法,因为它是同一心识刹那所含摄的,而且随顺于道。在“它所了知”这一句中,这里指的是了知与遍知,它们是观的心识刹那所含摄的,而不像“它所遍知”那一句那样,是道的心识刹那所含摄的。因此注释说“凡是行所摄”等等。“也一样”:就是以“无常”等方式。由于是同一心识刹那所含摄,又因为处于观的状态,它们与相同的缘一起生起,这就是同生;正因为如此,它们一起在同一处同时灭去,这就是同灭;依止同一个依处而生起,这就是同依处;缘取同一个所缘而生起,这就是同所缘。这里的“以”是表示原因的工具格。借此以同生等状态,来证明它们相结合的状态。而且这是一种无余的涵盖,除此之外,其余三种相应的特征也自然完全具备。巴利
Maggaviññāṇampīti ariyamaggasahagataṃ apacayagāmiviññāṇampi. Tatheva taṃ vijānātīti saccadhammaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayeneva vijānāti ekacittuppādapariyāpannattā maggānukūlattā ca. Yaṃ vijānātīti ettha vijānanapajānanāni vipassanācittuppādapariyāpannāni adhippetāni, na ‘‘yaṃ pajānātī’’ti ettha viya maggacittuppādapariyāpannāti āha ‘‘yaṃ saṅkhāragata’’ntiādi. Tathevāti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā nayena. Ekacittuppādapariyāpannattā vipassanābhāvato ca samānapaccayehi saha pavattikatā ekuppādatā, tato eva ekajjhaṃ saheva nirujjhanaṃ ekanirodhatā, ekaṃyeva vatthuṃ nissāya pavatti ekavatthukatā, ekaṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ ārabbha pavatti ekārammaṇatā. Hetumhi cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tena ekuppādāditāya saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ sādheti. Anavasesapariyādānañcetaṃ, ito tīhipi sampayuttalakkhaṇaṃ hotiyeva.
这是针对道慧说的。道慧确实应当修习,不应当对它作遍知;不过,因为慧是应当修习的,与它相应的法也就同样归向于修习,所以说“然而与彼相应”等。虽然观慧以修习之力生起时,与它相应的识也同样生起,但那个识并没有超出应被遍知的范围,所以仍然说它是应被遍知的。因此说:“凡是那法住智,它也是灭法、坏灭法、离染法、灭尽法。”巴利
Maggapaññaṃsandhāya vuttaṃ, sā hi ekantato bhāvetabbā, na pariññeyyā, paññāya pana bhāvetabbatāya taṃsampayuttadhammāpi taggatikāva hontīti āha ‘‘taṃsampayuttaṃ panā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi vipassanāpaññāya bhāvanāvasena pavattanato taṃsampayuttaviññāṇampi tatheva pavattati, tassa pana pariññeyyabhāvānativattanato pariññeyyatā vuttā. Tenevāha – ‘‘yampi taṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, tampi khayadhammaṃ vayadhammaṃ virāgadhammaṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti.
450 虽然如此,这里说的“受”,是在以“受”这个通称来统摄的时候说的。所谓“三地遍审察行的受”,是指属于三地的受,正因为如此,它才是遍审察智的所缘境。这里特指受,是因为为了利益同梵行者而开示的教法能带来帮助。所以经中说“为欲度脱四瀑流者”等等。对慧也是同样的道理。这里“乐”等词是以彼所缘为对象的,为了用经文证明这个意思,所以说“而色”等。“纯苦”是指纯粹不可意的,正因为它具有苦的性质,所以是苦。由于被执取为所缘而随逐苦受、沉入其中,所以说“苦所随逐”、“苦所侵入”。应当理解为“若不被乐所侵入”。“此非”中的“此”只是一个虚词。“当染著”是指生起贪染。“乐”是指自性上可意的。“由染著而结缚”是说因为贪染很重,便相应地以十种结缚而被结缚。“由结缚而染污”是说由于这样被结缚,就以渴爱等染污而受染污、被逼迫、被热恼。“所缘”是指可意的、不可意的、中等的所缘,依次称为乐、苦、不苦不乐。这样不加区分地显示了五蕴作为乐等所缘之后,现在为了显示唯有受才是乐等所缘,所以说“再者”等。这是根据大多数普通人的情况而说的,所以说“以前面的乐受为所缘”。但获得殊胜境界的人,也会把未来的乐受作为所缘。这一点在《念处分别注》中已经说过。因为当受感受所缘时,具有该受的人只是在世俗言说上说他感受,仅此而已。巴利
450.Evaṃ santepīti vedanāti evaṃ sāmaññaggahaṇe satipi. Tebhūmikasammasanacāravedanāvāti bhūmittayapariyāpannā, tato eva sammasanañāṇassa gocarabhūtā vedanā eva adhippetā sabrahmacārīnaṃ upakārāvahabhāvena desanāya āraddhattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘caturoghanittharaṇatthikāna’’ntiādi . Esa nayo paññāyapi. Idha sukhādisaddā tadārammaṇavisayāti imamatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantadukkhanti ekanteneva aniṭṭhaṃ, tato eva dukkhamatāya dukkhaṃ. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena dukkhavedanāya anupatitaṃ, otiṇṇañcāti dukkhānupatitaṃ, dukkhāvakkantaṃ. Sukhena anavakkantaṃ abhavissāti yojanā. Nayidanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Sārajjeyyunti sārāgaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Sukhanti sabhāvato ca iṭṭhaṃ. Sārāgā saṃyujjantīti bahalarāgahetu yathārahaṃ dasahipi saṃyojanehi saṃyujjanti. Saṃyogā saṃkilissantīti tathā saṃyuttatāya taṇhāsaṃkilesādivasena saṃkilissanti, vibādhīyanti upatāpīyanti cāti attho. Ārammaṇanti iṭṭhaṃ, aniṭṭhaṃ, majjhattañca ārammaṇaṃ yathākkamaṃ sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhanti kathitaṃ. Evaṃ avisesena pañcapi khandhe sukhādiārammaṇabhāvena dassetvā idāni vedanā eva sukhādiārammaṇabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pākatikapacurajanavasenāyaṃ kathitāti katvā ‘‘purimaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Visesalābhī pana anāgatampi sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karoteva. Vuttametaṃ satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.380; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.79). Vedanāya hi ārammaṇaṃ vediyantiyā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo vedetīti vohāramattaṃ hoti.
“一切想”是指所有四地的想。“一切处想”是指在一切心生起时活动的想。“或于衣”中的“或”字,是用来包含颜色元素的。“令到达”是指引导向修习、近行或安止。“将生起的想”也是指“青色是色,色是青之所缘”这样生起的想。巴利
Sabbasaññāyāti sabbāyapi catubhūmikasaññāya. Sabbatthakasaññāyāti sabbasmiṃ cittuppāde pavattanakasaññāya. Vatthe vāti vā-saddena vaṇṇadhātuṃ saṅgaṇhāti . Pāpentoti bhāvanaṃ upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā upanento. Uppajjanakasaññāpīti ‘‘nīlaṃ rūpaṃ, rūpārammaṇaṃ nīla’’nti uppajjanakasaññāpi.
因为不摄于一切,所以说不包含一切,也就是不被一切受、想、识所摄。随转,是指在纺线或绕线的纺锤上,以缠绕的方式而住。轮转等随转,是指在线缠绕的轮转等中随转。由于放开,所以没有被执取;就慧与识获得相应的程度而言,受和想也就获得了相应。正因为与它们相应结合,所以才了知同一个所缘。巴利
Asabbasaṅgāhikattāti sabbesaṃ vedanāsaññāviññāṇānaṃ asaṅgahitattā. Takkagatanti suttakantanakatakkamhi, suttavattanakatakkamhi vā veṭhanavasena ṭhitaṃ. Parivaṭṭakādigatanti suttaveṭhanaparivaṭṭakādigataṃ. Vissaṭṭhattāva na gahitā, yadaggena paññā viññāṇena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ labhāpitā, tadaggena vedanāsaññāhipi sampayogaṃ labhāpitā evāti. Tadeva sañjānāti saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato.
在“想知、识知”这里,应当把“慧知”这个词也引进来一起说明,因为后面就要从了知的角度说明它们的差别。“知”这个词在这里虽然已经是共通用法,但从含义上说,仍然要寻求它的差别。因为词根有多种含义,所以前缀词是以显明的方式,来界定动词和名词所表达的意义,而不是以能诠的方式。因此说“在彼知义中,也应当知道有差别”。由此指出:想、识、慧这些词,都包含在共同的知义之中,同时各自又安立在各自特有的对象上。所以又说“想只是……”等等。在“唯以了知为性”中,“唯”这个词以简别的含义,排除了识和慧了知的方式;“即”这个词则决定:想在任何时候都没有这些差别。因此说“无常、苦”等等。在那里,想连识的作用都做不到,哪里还能成办慧的作用呢?所以只说“不能达到相通达”,而没有说“不能令道现前”。巴利
Sañjānāti vijānātīti ettha ‘‘pajānātī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā vattabbaṃ pajānanavasenapi visesassa vakkhamānattā. Jānātīti ayaṃ saddo ca laddatoyevettha aviseso, atthato pana visesato icchitabbo. Anekatthattā hi dhātūnaṃ tena ākhyātapadena nāmapadena ca vuttamatthaṃ upasaggapadaṃ jotakabhāvena viseseti, na vācakabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘tassapi jānanatthe viseso veditabbo’’ti . Etena saññāviññāṇapaññāpadāni antogadhajānanatthe yathāsakaṃ visiṭṭhavisaye ca niṭṭhānīti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘saññā hī’’tiādi. Sañjānanamattamevāti ettha matta-saddena visesanivattiatthena vijānanapajānanākāre nivatteti, eva-saddena kadācipi imissā te visesā natthevāti avadhāreti. Tenevāha ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi. Tattha viññāṇakiccampi kātuṃ asakkontī saññā kuto paññākiccaṃ kareyyāti ‘‘lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti’’cceva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘maggapātubhāva’’nti.
识在所缘上生起时,并不像想那样,只是以了知蓝、黄等粗略样貌的方式生起,而是同时了知其中其他类似的差别,所以说“识”等等。那么,识怎样达到通达特征呢?通过慧所指示的道路。因为以特征为所缘的观,在多次通达诸特征之后,由于纯熟而变得熟悉,这时即使是以与智不相应的心,观也能生起,就像熟练背诵典籍的人,各处段落自然浮现,不必刻意去留意。这里说的“通达特征”,只是指以特征为所缘,并不是真正的通达。“奋力之后”,是指从生灭智等智的次第开始。不能达到道现前,是因为识具有不觉悟的性质。识也能了知所缘,但那是以觉知的方式,并不是像想那样仅仅了知;同样,它也能达到通达特征,但并不是仅仅识别,而是靠着自己与其他法共同的力量奋力之后,也能达到道现前。巴利
Ārammaṇe pavattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ na saññā viya nīlapītādimattasañjānanavasena pavattati, atha kho tattha aññampi tādisaṃ visesaṃ jānantameva pavattatīti āha ‘‘viññāṇa’’ntiādi. Kathaṃ pana viññāṇaṃ lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetīti? Paññāya dassitamaggena. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya hi anekavāraṃ lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā pavattamānāya paguṇabhāvato paricayavasena ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi vipassanā sambhavati, yathā taṃ paguṇassa ganthassa ajjhayane tattha tattha gatāpi vārā na upadhārīyanti. ‘‘Lakkhaṇapaṭivedha’’nti ca lakkhaṇānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paṭivijjhanaṃ. Ussakkitvāti udayabbayañāṇādiñāṇapaṭipāṭiyā ārabhitvā. Maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti asambodhasabhāvattā. Ārammaṇampi sañjānāti avabujjhanavaseneva, na sañjānanamattena. Tathā lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, na vijānanamattena, attano pana aññāsādhāraṇena ānubhāvena ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti.
现在,为了用譬喻把上面所说的义理讲清楚,所以说了“犹如……”等这些话。其中,“未生慧者”是指还没有生起世俗言说智慧的人。“受用与资具”是指值得受用和作为资具的东西,意思是能够获得受用物和资具。“伪币”是指仿造迦哈帕那的铜币、青铜币等。“精明者”是指大商人。“贸易者”是指中等商人。“柔和者”是指质地柔软、纯正均匀的那一类。“以”这个字是等取的意思,由此包括了四分之一商人、更小的商人、中等商人等。当他鉴别时,即使看到形状……中略……也知道是某位师父做的,这是因为他熟练掌握金匠的学问。就像这样等等,是对应譬喻的关联。正因为如此,它被称为以如现之境为近因。因为不区分想,只是以整体的方式执取对象,所以说它像小孩看迦哈帕那。识能够执取对象中的某些差别,所以说它像乡下人看迦哈帕那。慧则能对对象毫无遗漏地完全了知,所以说它像金匠看迦哈帕那。“这些”是指想、识、慧。“差别”是指自性上的差别。“难以通达”是指以普通智慧难以通达。由此显示出它们极其微细。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ajātabuddhīti asañjātabyavahārabuddhi. Upabhogaparibhoganti upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ, upabhogaparibhogavatthūnaṃ paṭilābhayogganti attho. Kūṭoti kahāpaṇapatirūpako tambakaṃsādimayo. Chekoti mahāsāro. Karatoti aḍḍhasāro. Saṇhoti mudujātiko samasāro. Iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena pādasāraparopādasāraaḍḍhasārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Jānanto ca pana naṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi…pe… asukācariyena katotipi jānāti tathā heraññikaganthassa suggahitattā. Evamevantiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Saññāvibhāgaṃ akatvā piṇḍavaseneva ārammaṇassa gahaṇato dārakassa kahāpaṇadassanasadisā vuttā. Tathā hi sā yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā vuccati. Viññāṇaṃ ārammaṇe ekaccavisesaggahaṇasamatthabhāvato gāmikapurisakahāpaṇadassanasadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññā pana ārammaṇe anavasesāvabodhato heraññikakahāpaṇadassanasadisā vuttā. Nesanti saññāviññāṇapaññānaṃ . Visesoti sabhāvaviseso. Duppaṭivijjho pakatipaññāya. Imināva nesaṃ accantasukhumataṃ dasseti.
对于“在同一所缘上生起”这句话,意思是:它们在同一个所缘上生起。通过指出它们并非不同境、不同时等,来说明它们的作用不可分割,从而标示出它们极难通达。“安立”是指不混杂地加以确定。“这是触……这是心”只是一个示例。或者,“iti”这个词是等取的意思,因此应当知道它也统摄了其余诸法。“此”是对无色法的安立。“从彼”是指从所说的榨取芝麻油等做法。如果还有更难的,那又怎样呢?于是回答说“然而,世尊……”等等。巴利
Ekārammaṇe pavattamānānanti ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ. Tena abhinnavisayābhinnakālatādassanena avinibbhogavuttitaṃ vibhāvento duppaṭivijjhataṃyeva ulliṅgeti. Vavatthānanti asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ. Ayaṃ phasso…pe… idaṃ cittanti nidassanamattametaṃ. Iti-saddo vā ādiattho. Tena sesadhammānampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Idanti arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthānakaraṇaṃ. Tatoti yaṃ vuttaṃ tilatelādiuddharaṇaṃ, tato. Yadi dukkarataraṃ, kathaṃ tanti āha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi.
451 已脱离:指已经出去,不再有牵连。已弃舍:指像已经舍弃一样,不再成为缘,因为由缘所生的关联已不存在。从格的说法是为了显示“从……脱离”,具格的说法是为了显示“作者”的意思。欲界意门心识不能确定地说“这个就是属于五门关联的”,但色界心识不是这样,所以说它已经从五种根门脱离,因此说“以色界第四禅心”。举出第四禅,是因为它正是无色界的近因。清净:指特别没有杂染。因为那心已经远离随烦恼,所以特别清净。因此说“无随烦恼”。应了知就是应知,意思是在自他相续中,这种殊胜应当被了知、应当被觉悟,或者应当令他人觉悟。或者,应知是指在自身相续中应当引导它、令它生起。因此说“能够令它生起。因为安住于此者,那成就便能圆满”。各别:指一一分开,是就逐一法来说。由于没有执取:指观修时不可能有执取。以聚行观:指称为聚思惟的观智。比丘:指声闻。因为在那里,逐一法观不可能出现在声闻身上,但能出现在佛陀身上。因此说“所以”等。舍弃:指通过舍断与彼相关的欲贪而舍弃。巴利
451.Nissaṭenāti nikkhantena ataṃsambandhena. Pariccattenāti pariccattasadisena paccayabhāvānupagamanena paccayuppannasambandhābhāvato. Nissakkavacanaṃ apādānadīpanato. Karaṇavacanaṃ kattuatthadīpanato. Kāmāvacaramanoviññāṇaṃ na niyamato ‘‘idaṃ nāma pañcadvārikāsambandhā’’ti sakkā vattuṃ, rūpāvacaraviññāṇaṃ pana na tathāti, tasseva pañcahi indriyehi nissaṭatā vuttāti āha ‘‘rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittenā’’ti. Catutthajjhānaggahaṇaṃ tasseva arūpāvacarassa padaṭṭhānabhāvato. Parisuddhenāti visesato asaṃkilesikattāva. Tañhi vigatūpakkilesatāya visesato parisuddhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nirupakkilesenā’’ti. Jānitabbaṃ neyyaṃ, saparasantānesu idaṃ atisayaṃ jānitabbato bujjhitabbaṃ bodhetabbaṃ vāti attho. Neyyanti vā attano santāne netabbaṃ pavattetabbanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘nibbattetuṃ sakkā hoti. Ettha ṭhitassa hi sā ijjhatī’’ti. Pāṭiyekkanti visuṃ visuṃ, anupadadhammavasenāti attho. Abhinivesābhāvatoti vipassanābhinivesassa asambhavato. Kalāpato nayatoti kalāpasammasanasaṅkhātato nayavipassanato. Bhikkhunoti sāvakassa. Sāvakasseva hi tatra anupadadhammavipassanā na sambhavati, na satthu. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Vissajjesīti tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahati.
“在手中”是指像拿在手里一样,意思是极其接近。当世尊坐在菩提树下的不坏金刚座上,依缘起门径深入观照,心中生起“这个世间确实陷入了困境”等念头,为了证得应当证得的一切知智,他转起了名为大金刚智的大菩萨遍观察,以三千六百亿种方式展开。当他这样广泛地观察各种等至法时,也逐一地、不断地观察非想非非想处的法。因此说“然而世尊……”等。“另五十二”就是五十二。这里虽然有些法——比如受等——已经在前面“触第五支”等处说过了,也包含在禅支等分类里,但因为它们各自作为缘的状态有特别的殊胜意义,所以像不同的法一样,再在这里说一次。就像在说出世间心生起时,也说“九根”那样。“以支分拣出”是指从中拣出可得的禅支、觉支、道支。或者“支”这个词也有“部分”的意思,所以“以支分拣出”就是指把触第五支等部分拣出来。“凡是与想相应的等至”是指所有与想俱行的禅定等至,从这些等至出起后,因为应当证得的已经证得,所以对相应的所化众生来说,证悟和证得阿拉汉果就是如此。巴利
Hatthagatattāti hatthagatasadisattā, āsannattāti attho. Yadā hi lokanātho bodhimūle aparājitapallaṅke nisinno – ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā adhigantabbasabbaññutaññāṇānurūpaṃ chattiṃsakoṭisahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇaṃ nāma mahābodhisattasammasanaṃ pavattento anekākārasamāpattidhammasammasane anupadameva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanadhammepi aparāparaṃ sammasi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi. Paropaññāsāti dvepaññāsaṃ. Kāmañcettha keci dhammā vedanādayo phassapañcamakādīsu vuttāpi jhānakoṭṭhāsādīsupi saṅgahitā, taṃtaṃpaccayabhāvavisiṭṭhena pana atthavisesena dhammantarāni viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi lokuttaracittuppādesu navindriyatā vuccati. Aṅguddhārenāti tattha labbhamānajhānaṅgabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgānaṃ uddharaṇena. Aṅga-saddo vā koṭṭhāsapariyāyo, tasmā aṅguddhārenāti phassapañcamakādikoṭṭhāsānaṃ samuddharaṇena. Yāvatā saññāsamāpattiyoti yattakā saññāsahagatā jhānasamāpattiyo, tāhi vuṭṭhāya adhigandhabbattā tāvatikā veneyyānaṃ aññāpaṭivedho arahattasamadhigamo.
以“见为引导”这一含义来说,就像有人抓住盲人的杖端,为他指路一样,以“如实见诸法自性”这种引导作用来引导。或者,就像那个人成了他的眼睛,智慧对众生也是如此,所以说“以作为眼睛的智慧”。与定相应的慧就是定慧。这里有人说“定”是指无色定,但认为思惟加行伴随某种禅定才合理。作为观的慧就是观慧。定慧在入等至的状态中,从作用上了知;而依据“入定者能如实了知”这句话,则是从不痴了知。其中,“从作用”是指在所行境中执行取所缘的作用;“从不痴”是指于相应法中摧破痴暗,如同在感受喜等时那样。这里“有什么意义”就是“有何用途”,因此说“这个有什么用呢?”在应证知的法上,即以如实觉知自性之相而面向应知、应了知的蕴处等法。以证知,即从自相与共相两方面,以面向不迷乱的方式了知。以此说明已知遍知的作用。在应遍知的法上,即应限定而了知的无常、苦、无我。以遍知,即依“任何色……以坏灭之义为无常”等,限定而了知。以此说明审察遍知的作用。在应断的法上,即从常想等直至阿拉汉道所断的一切恶法。以断,即从殊胜义上断,镇伏并根除,这是意思。以此说明断遍知的作用。而此慧,无论世间或出世间,各有三种,其差别他自己已说。从作用,即从证知方面取所缘的作用;从不痴,即依能力于应证知等法中摧破痴暗。以涅槃为所缘而转起故,于应证知等法中唯是不痴,因此说“出世间从不痴”。巴利
Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti andhassa yaṭṭhikoṭiṃ gahetvā maggadesako viya dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanasaṅkhātena pariṇāyakabhāvena. Yathā vā so tassa cakkhubhūto, evaṃ sattānaṃ paññā. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhubhūtāya paññāyā’’ti. Samādhisampayuttā paññā samādhipaññā. Samādhi cettha āruppasamādhīti vadanti, sammasanapayogo pana koci jhānasamādhīti yuttaṃ. Vipassanābhūtā paññā vipassanāpaññā. Samādhipaññāya antosamāpattiyaṃ kiccato pajānāti, ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti pana vacanato (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99-100; 3.5.1071-1072; netti. 40; mi. pa. 2.1.14) asammohato pajānāti. Tattha kiccatoti gocarajjhatte ārammaṇakaraṇakiccato. Asammohatoti sampayuttadhammesu sammohavidhamanato yathā pītipaṭisaṃvedanādīsu. Kimatthiyāti kiṃpayojanāti āha ‘‘ko etissā attho’’ti. Abhiññeyye dhammeti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena abhimukhaṃ ñeyye jānitabbe khandhāyatanādidhamme. Abhijānātīti salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca abhimukhaṃ avirajjhanavasena jānāti. Etena ñātapariññābyāpāramāha. Pariññeyyeti aniccātipi dukkhātipi anattātipi paricchijja jānitabbe. Parijānātīti ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ…pe… aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.48) paricchinditvā jānāti. Iminā tīraṇapariññābyāpāramāha. Pahātabbe dhammeti niccasaññādike yāva arahattamaggavajjhā sabbe pāpadhamme. Pajahati pakaṭṭhato jahati, vikkhambheti ceva samucchindati cāti attho. Iminā pahānapariññābyāpāramāha. Sā panesā paññā lokiyāpi tippakārā lokuttarāpi, tāsaṃ visesaṃ sayamevāha. Kiccatoti abhijānanavasena ārammaṇakiccato. Asammohatoti yathābalaṃ abhiññeyyādīsu sammohavidhamanato. Nibbānamārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanato abhiññeyyādīsu vigatasammohato evāti āha ‘‘lokuttarā asammohato’’ti.
452 452. “业自所作的正见”和“依赖轮回的正见”在这里都不是要说的,因为这里讲的是还灭的道理,所以说“观正见和道正见”。“从他人而来的声音”,是指从他人——从导师或从弟子那里——得到的法音。因此说“适宜的听法”。只有这种听法才能成为正见的缘,并不是随便什么从他人而来的声音都可以。“如理作意”,是指能成就对名色把握等的最初作意。这种如理作意也是正见的缘,但它只属于决定性的一类,并不是包摄一切的缘;为了说明这一点,所以说“然而对于独觉佛……”等。“只有在如理作意中”这个限定,只是为了排除“从他人而来的声音”这一条件,并不是要排除其他特定的近因差别;因为这个限定词的作用,就在于排除相对立的对象。巴利
452. Kammassakatā sammādiṭṭhi ca vaṭṭanissitattā idha nādhippetā, vivaṭṭakathā hesāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā ca maggasammādiṭṭhiyā cā’’ti. Parato ghosoti parato satthuto, sāvakato vā labbhamāno dhammaghoso. Tenāha ‘‘sappāyadhammassavana’’nti. Tañhi sammādiṭṭhiyā paccayo bhavituṃ sakkoti, na yo koci paratoghoso. Upāyamanasikāroti yena nāmarūpapariggahādi sijjhati, tādiso pathamanasikāro. Ayañca sammādiṭṭhiyā paccayoti niyamapakkhiko, na sabbasaṃgāhakoti dassento ‘‘paccekabuddhānaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Yonisomanasikārasmiṃyevāti avadhāraṇena paratoghosameva nivatteti, na padaṭṭhānavisesaṃ paṭiyogīnivattanatthattā eva-saddassa.
已得帮助者:就是按各自情况,通过依止等条件而获得资助的人。因为观正见没有被道正见所摄持,所以这里说的是道正见中的阿拉汉道正见;这是就无间缘的规则或遮止来说的。在最胜果定以及它的资具法中,心的随转完全固定于正见,所以正见就是指阿拉汉道正见。在果的刹那里,是指无间与有间两种果的刹那。心解脱就是:依靠它——除了最胜果慧以外的其余果法——通过一切杂染的止息,心得以解脱。因此说“心解脱就是它具有此果,所谓心解脱的果就是其利益”,意思是:以止息一切杂染而使心解脱的称为断,这就是果,也就是利益——应当这样来连接文意。而且在这里,心解脱一词只是就断这一面来说的,因为前面已经说明了能断的诸法;否则,如果在说明利益时只取果法,那就成了重复而无意义的话。巴利
Laddhupakārāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.25) yathārahaṃ nissayādivasena laddhapaccayā. Vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā anuggahitabhāvena gahitattā maggasammādiṭṭhīsu ca arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi, anantarassa hi vidhi, paṭisedho vā. Aggaphalasamādhimhi tapparikkhāradhammesuyeva ca kevalo cetopariyāyo niruḷhoti sammādiṭṭhīti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Phalakkhaṇeti anantare kālantare cāti duvidhe phalakkhaṇe. Paṭippassaddhivasena sabbasaṃkilesehi ceto vimuccati etāyāti cetovimutti, aggaphalapaññaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā phaladhammā. Tenāha ‘‘cetovimutti phalaṃ assāti. Cetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso’’ti, sabbasaṃkilesehi cetaso vimuccanasaṅkhātaṃ paṭippassambhanasaññitaṃ pahānaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso cāti yojanā. Idha ca cetovimutti-saddena pahānamattaṃ gahitaṃ, pubbe pahāyakadhammā, aññathā phaladhammā eva ānisaṃsoti gayhamāne punavacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā.
关于“慧解脱的果与利益”这一说法,这里的含义也应当同样理解。正语、正业、正命因为本质上属于戒,所以对定有特别的帮助;同样,正思惟因为本质上属于禅那,所以对定也有帮助。正因如此,它被说明为“安止”。而正念和正精进本身就是属于定的组成部分,所以说“其余的诸法应当理解为心解脱”。所谓“四遍净戒”,是指作为证得圣道之基础的四种遍净戒。对于“听闻”等,道理也是一样。以表明自己心念活动的方式一起交谈,叫做“共语”;共语就是“讨论”。但在这里,它是指与业处相关的谈论,所以说“在业处上的……谈论”。其中,对业处一次未能进入其运行过程,叫做“蹶”;多次如此,叫做“屡蹶”;能够断除这两者的谈论,就是“断蹶断屡蹶之论”。所谓“使……圆满的人”,是指以还灭为依托而守护、令其增长的人。所谓“正在聆听的人”,是指这样听着——“按照所把握的业处,它将增长”——的人。正因如此,才说“听闻合宜之法”。所谓“正在作务的人”,是指从事修习加行工作的人。巴利
Paññāvimuttiphalānisaṃsāti etthāpi evameva attho veditabbo. Sammāvācākammantājīvā sīlasabhāvattā visesato samādhissa upakārā, tathā sammāsaṅkappo jhānasabhāvattā. Tathā hi so ‘‘appanā’’ti niddiṭṭho. Sammāsatisammāvāyāmā pana samādhipakkhiyā evāti āha ‘‘avasesā dhammā cetovimuttīti veditabbā’’ti. Catupārisuddhisīlanti ariyamaggādhigamassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sutādīsupi eseva nayo. Attano cittappavattiārocanavasena saha kathanaṃ saṃkathā, saṃkathāva sākacchā. Idha pana kammaṭṭhānapaṭibaddhāti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhāne…pe… kathā’’ti. Tattha kammaṭṭhānassa ekavāraṃ vīthiyā appaṭipajjanaṃ khalanaṃ, anekavāraṃ pakkhalanaṃ, tadubhayassa vicchedanīkathā khalanapakkhalanachedanakathā. Pūrentassāti vivaṭṭanissitaṃ katvā pālentassa brūhentassa ca. Suṇantassāti ‘‘yathāuggahitakammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti evaṃ suṇantassa. Teneva hi ‘‘sappāyadhammassavana’’nti vuttaṃ. Kammaṃ karontassāti bhāvanānuyogakammaṃ karontassa.
在这五个地方,应当把“anta”这个词理解为表示原因。只有这样,接下来以“正如……”等说法所讲的芒果喻才能对应得上。“水槽”就是围堰。“牢固地绑紧”,就是把它围得不松散、坚固,既不太大也不太小。“把它弄坚固”,是指在浇水的时候,为了不让水从各处流失渗漏,而把围堰做得更坚固。“干枝”,就是那棵小芒果树枯干的枝梢。“蚁巢”,是赤蚁的巢。“锄头”就是锄。修筑围堰就像戒,因为它是使正见增长的方法的根本。浇水就像听法,因为它能滋养修习。把边界弄坚固就像止,因为它能让如前所说作为修习所依的戒界变得坚固;心得安住的人,他的戒确实会更加稳固。清除附近的藤蔓等,就像在业处上断除蹶与滑跌,因为它能排除障碍应成就之修习的事物。挖掘树根,就像修习七种随观,因为它能彻底刨掉障碍的根本,也就是贪、慢、见。在这里还应当知道:一位戒行极为清净的人专心修习业处时,应当希望听闻适合自己的法;听过之后,要就所听到的义理与人讨论交流;然后通过清理业处而成就止;接着,心得安住、已经启动观的人,观就得以圆满。观圆满的人,会使道正见增长。应当这样理解:这些环节依次相互促成,也当下相互助成,所以这里说的就是这样的次第。巴利
Pañcasupi ṭhānesu anta-saddo hetuatthajotano daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā vuccamānā ambupamā ca yujjeyya. Udakakoṭṭhakanti ālavālaṃ. Thiraṃ katvā bandhatīti asithilaṃ daḷhaṃ nātimahantaṃ nātikhuddakaṃ katvā yojeti. Thiraṃ karotīti udakasiñcanakāle tato tato vissaritvā udakassa anikkhamanatthaṃ ālavālaṃ thirataraṃ karoti. Sukkhadaṇḍakoti tasseva ambagacchakassa sukkho sākhāsīsako. Kipillikapuṭoti tambakipillikakuṭajaṃ. Khaṇittinti kudālaṃ. Koṭṭhakabandhanaṃ viya sīlaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyā vaḍḍhanupāyassa mūlabhāvato. Udakasiñcanaṃ viya dhammassavanaṃ bhāvanāya paribrūhanato. Mariyādāya thirabhāvakaraṇaṃ viya samatho yathāvuttabhāvanādhiṭṭhānāya sīlamariyādāya daḷhabhāvāpādanato. Samāhitassa hi sīlaṃ thirataraṃ hoti. Samīpe valliādīnaṃ haraṇaṃ viya kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanaṃ ijjhitabbabhāvanāya vibandhāpanayanato. Mūlakhaṇanaṃ viya sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ bhāvanā tassā vibandhassa mūlakānaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīnaṃ palikhaṇanato. Ettha ca yasmā suparisuddhasīlassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjantassa sappāyadhammassavanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, tato yathāsute atthe sākacchāsamāpajjanaṃ, tato kammaṭṭhānavisodhanena samathanipphatti, tato samāhitassa āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāpāripūri. Paripuṇṇavipassano maggasammādiṭṭhiṃ paribrūhetīti evametesaṃ aṅgānaṃ paramparāya sammukhā ca anuggaṇhanato ayamānupubbī kathitāti veditabbaṃ.
453 这里,他到底在问什么?在这段已经引导人证得阿拉汉果的教说中,当有人问“朋友,有多少种有?”时,这个问“有”的人是依靠怎样的连结来发问的呢?这就是这句话的意思。正因为如此,先说了“这个连结已经回到根本”,接着为了说明他的意图,才说了“劣慧者”等话。因为这里所说的“劣慧者”,指的是还没有彻见圣谛的人,并不是单纯指愚钝得像傻子一样的人。在讲“欲有”等的时候,为了显示这里指的是按业与结生两种分类来区分的“有”,所以说了“往趣欲有的业”等。其中应当了解的内容,可以按照《清净道论》及其复注里已经解释过的方式来理解。所谓“后有”,是因为一次又一次、接连不断地有和出生,所以被称为“后有”,也就是那持续不断的轮回系列。因此说“在这里我要问轮回”。“再生”是指以有、生、趣等方式而出生。说“处处”,就是指在各种“有”等境界中。“欢喜”是指以渴爱而欢喜。通过“来去”等说法,显示众生在各种“有”等境界中一次又一次地死去和投生。通过“灭尽与止息”,是指以彻底灭尽为特征的“不再生起之灭”。这两者都不宜说,因为舍断与现证、修习与现证的时间太接近了。但可以按照因与果之法的方式来方便说。就像灯火点燃是因,黑暗消失是果;同样,明生起是因,无明灭尽是果。因与果之法虽然同时存在,却被说成有前后,比如“缘眼与色而生起眼识”这样的说法,就是关于缘与缘所生之作用的表达。在欲有中,通过般涅槃,去被截断。在色有和无色有中,通过般涅槃,来被截断。来去被截断,是因为彻底不再有一次又一次的生起。巴利
453.Idha kiṃ pucchatīti idha evaṃ arahattaphalaṃ pāpitāya desanāya ‘‘kati panāvuso, bhavā’’ti bhavaṃ pucchanto kīdisaṃ anusandhiṃ upādāya pucchatīti attho. Teneva hi ‘‘mūlameva gato anusandhī’’ti vatvā adhippāyaṃ pakāsento ‘‘duppañño’’tiādimāha. Duppaññoti hi idha appaṭividdhasacco adhippeto, na jaḷo eva. Kāmabhavotiādīsu kammopapattibhedato duvidhopi bhavo adhippetoti dassento ‘‘kāmabhavūpagaṃ kamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggetaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.647; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.646-647) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Punabbhavassāti punappunaṃ aparāparaṃ bhavanato jāyanato punabbhavoti laddhanāmassa vaṭṭapabandhassa. Tenāha ‘‘idha vaṭṭaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti. Abhinibbattīti bhavayonigatiādivasena nibbatti. Tahiṃ tahiṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavādike. Abhinandanāti taṇhāabhinandanahetu. Gamanāgamanaṃ hotītiādinā bhavādīsu sattānaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo dasseti. Khayanirodhenāti accantakhayasaṅkhātena anuppādanirodhena. Ubhayametaṃ na vattabbaṃ pahānābhisamayabhāvanābhisamayānaṃ accāsannakālattā. Vattabbaṃ taṃ hetuphaladhammūpacāravasena. Yathā hi padīpujjalanahetuko andhakāravigamo, evaṃ vijjuppādahetuko avijjānirodho, hetuphaladhammā ca samānakālāpi pubbāparakālā viya voharīyanti yathā – ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; ma. ni. 3.420, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 2.4.60; kathā. 465, 467) paccayapaccayuppannakiriyā. Gamanaṃ upacchijjati idha kāmabhave parinibbānena. Āgamanaṃ upacchijjati tattha rūpārūpesu parinibbānena. Gamanāgamanaṃ upacchijjati sabbaso aparāparuppattiyā abhāvato.
454 454. 在“还灭论”之后所阐明的初禅,对于已到达还灭而安住的人,以最胜开示来说明俱分解脱者的灭尽成就,是恰当的,因此说“贤友,那么什么是……?”等。也就是说,紧接着,将入灭尽定的比丘所应知的初禅的相应舍断支被提问了。“支的确定”:即禅支的确定。“部分的区分”:在此应了知其中可获得的触为第五的诸法的部分区分。在此禅中,有若干法存在,若干法已灭尽,应当了知。“有帮助和无帮助的支”:对灭尽定有帮助的支和无帮助的支。因为灭尽定要由十六种智行和九种定行证得,所以依各自的智与定行应当被超越的法是无帮助支,超越它们的是有帮助支。依这些支渐次寂灭、愈加微细,达到有顶定之后,残余的极微细心与心所,在限定的时间内灭尽,不再转起。“它的”:指灭尽定的。“无间缘”:意指类似无间缘。实际上,灭尽定并没有任何法可称为无间缘。那时心与心所的如此灭尽,是由如前所说的先前造作之因所成的非想非非想处定而发生的,因此它就像它的无间缘一样,所以这样说。“六种等至”:这是依经藏的说法而作的经藏注释。然而应当说“七种等至”,否则这里就不能称为“四支”。或者“示以方法”等,即是以显示开端等的方式示以方法。巴利
454. Vivaṭṭakathāya parato jotitaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ patvā ṭhitassa ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ubhatobhāgavimuttassa nirodhasādhakaṃ vibhāvituṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘katamaṃ panāvusoti idha kiṃ pucchatī’’tiādi. Tathā hi anantaraṃ nirodhasamāpajjanakena bhikkhunā jānitabbāni paṭhamassa jhānassa sampayogapahānaṅgāni pucchitāni. Aṅgavavatthānanti jhānaṅgavavatthānaṃ. Koṭṭhāsaparicchedoti tattha labbhamānaphassapañcamakādidhammakoṭṭhāsaparicchedo jānitabbo. Imasmiṃ jhāne ettakā dhammā saṃvijjanti, ettakā nirodhitāti jānitabbaṃ. Upakārānupakārāni aṅgānīti nirodhasamāpattiyā upakārāni ca anupakārāni ca aṅgāni. Nirodhasamāpattiyā hi soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi ca pattabbattā taṃtaṃñāṇassa samādhicariyāhi samatikkamitabbā dhammā anupakārakaṅgāni, samatikkamakā upakārakaṅgāni. Tesañhi vasena yathānupubbaṃ upasantupasantaoḷārikabhāvāya bhavaggasamāpattiyā saṅkhārāvasesasukhumataṃ pattā cittacetasikā yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ nirujjhanti, appavattiṃ gacchanti. Tassāti nirodhassa. Anantarapaccayanti anantarapaccayasadisaṃ. Na hi nirodhassa koci dhammo anantarapaccayo nāma atthi. Yañhi tadā cittacetasikānaṃ tathā nirujjhanaṃ, taṃ yathāvuttapubbābhisaṅkhārahetukāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ahosīti sā tassa anantarapaccayo viya hotīti taṃ vuttaṃ. Cha samāpattiyoti suttantanayena vuttasuttantapiṭakasaṃvaṇṇanāti katvā. ‘‘Satta samāpattiyo’’ti pana vattabbaṃ, aññathā idaṃ ‘‘caturaṅgika’’nti na vattabbaṃ siyā. Nayaṃ vā dassetvāti ādiantadassanavasena nayadassanaṃ katvā.
455 455. 这样阐明了灭尽定的基础之后,现在为了说明在灭尽定内部,五种净色作为持续不断的缘而被提问,首先依它们各自的自性、各自独有的特性、各自独有的境界以及各自的皈依处来提问,巴利文就是这样展开的,因此说“问依于识的五种净色”。关于“行境与境界”:虽然一般来说,“行境”的取用侧重于经常在其中活动的意思,“境界”的取用侧重于不涉及其他对象的意思,行境和境界这两种含义确实有区别,但如果加以分辨,两者都是所缘的本质,所以说“作为行境的境界”。“各别的”:意思是一个属于一个,另一个属于另一个。这里的“一”这个词,就像“此处某些人称叹”等中的用法一样,有不同于通常的含义。“如果……”等,这是假设的话。其中,“收摄”:就是集在一起。“无口而说”等,是显示以义相通的比喻。正如眼识必须依托眼净色才能见色,而不是单凭眼净色就能见,同样,眼识也必须依托眼净色才能见色,而不是依其他,所以说“在眼净色上呈现”。以此显示它们之间的共同作用。“或是青,或是黄”:这是仅就认知青黄等自性而说的。对“这是青、这是黄”的认知,眼识并不具有,因为它是无分别的。“这些的”:指这些眼识等的。这是以所依为头来问能依者,因为这样才能成立对境界体验的敦促。因此说“因为眼识……”等。眼识等不能以自己的境界以染着等方式去体验,而且它们也没有那种能力,它们就像毫无意义地在归投什么一样,所以问“这些归投什么呢”。“速行心为皈依”:这是共通地讲了五门和意门的速行之后,再特别说明在这里,染着等转起的皈依,所以说“或者意门速行心”。也就是说,在这个门,于眼门速行中,或者染着、或者嗔恚、或者愚痴,由此而有无智等的不防护。巴利
455. Evaṃ nirodhassa pādakaṃ vibhāvetvā idāni antonirodhe anupabandhabhāvato pañcannaṃ pasādānaṃ paccayapucchane paṭhamaṃ tāva te sarūpato āveṇikato āveṇikavisayato paṭissaraṇato ca pucchanavasena pāḷi pavattāti dassento ‘‘viññāṇanissaye pañca pasāde pucchanto’’ti āha. Gocaravisayanti ettha kāmaṃ tabbahulacāritāpekkhaṃ gocaraggahaṇaṃ, anaññatthabhāvāpekkhaṃ visayaggahaṇanti attheva gocaravisayabhāvānaṃ viseso, vivariyamānaṃ pana ubhayampi ārammaṇasabhāvamevāti āha ‘‘gocarabhūtaṃ visaya’’nti. Ekekassāti eko ekassa, añño aññassāti attho. Aññattho hi ayaṃ eka-saddo ‘‘ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) viya. Sace hītiādi abhūtaparikappanavacanametaṃ. Tattha samodhānetvāti ekajjhaṃ katvā. Vināpi mukhenātiādinā atthasallāpikanidassanaṃ nāma dasseti. Yathā viññāṇādhiṭṭhitameva cakkhu rūpaṃ passati, na kevalaṃ, evaṃ cakkhunissayameva viññāṇaṃ taṃ passati, na itaranti āha ‘‘cakkhupasāde upanehī’’ti. Tena tesaṃ tattha saṃhaccakāritaṃ dasseti. Yadi vā nīlaṃ yadi vā pītakanti idaṃ nīlapītādisabhāvajānanamattaṃ sandhāyāha. Nīlaṃ pītakanti pajānanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa nattheva avikappakabhāvato. Etesaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ. Nissayasīsena nissitapucchā hesā, evañhi visayānubhavanacodanā samatthitā hoti. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ hī’’tiādi. Yathāsakaṃ visayaṃ rajjanādivasena anubhavituṃ asamatthāni cakkhuviññāṇādīni, tattha samatthatāyeva ca natthi, na kiñci atthato paṭisarantāni viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kiṃ etāni paṭisarantī’’ti. Javanamano paṭisaraṇanti pañcadvārikaṃ itarañca sādhāraṇato vatvā puna yāya’ssa rajjanādipavattiyā paṭisaraṇatā, sā savisesā yattha labbhati, taṃ dassento ‘‘manodvārikajavanamano vā’’ti āha. Etasmiṃ pana dvāreti cakkhudvāre javanaṃ rajjati vā dussati vā muyhati vā, yato tattha aññāṇādiasaṃvaro pavattati.
在那里,就是指在那速行心本身作为皈依处的情况下。低劣受用者,是指能力低下的国王侍从。日薪,是按侍从人数在发放日所能得到的钱币。释放薪,是为被枷锁捆绑的人解开束缚而得到的钱币。非打薪,是当有人打他们时,为了阻止而说“别打他们”所应支付的罚款。这一切,在那些小村庄的人们那里,同样所能得到的也就这么多,所以说“八钱或……”等。百基地,就是百犁地的基地。其余两句也是同样的道理。“在那里”等,是对譬喻的合论,这很容易理解。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ javanamanasseva paṭisaraṇabhāve. Dubbalabhojakāti hīnasāmatthiyā rājabhoggā. Sevakānaṃ gaṇanāya yojitadivase labbhamānakahāpaṇo yuttikahāpaṇo. Andubandhanena baddhassa vissajjanena labbhamānakahāpaṇo bandhakahāpaṇo. Kiñci paharante mā paharantūti paṭikkhipato dātabbadaṇḍo māpahārakahāpaṇo. So sabbopi parittakesu gāmikamanussesu tathā labbhamāno ettako hotīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakahāpaṇo vā’’tiādi. Satavatthukanti satakarīsavatthukaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadadvayepi. Tatthātiādi upamāsaṃsandhanaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
456 456. 在灭尽定中,五种净色,也就是入灭尽定者正在现起的五种净色。在“唯作现起”中,指在速行等唯作所生法的现起中。它们以强力缘的方式存在,即以后生缘、不相应缘、有缘、不离去缘为缘,以支持的方式成为强力缘。依于命根,即以根缘、有缘、不离去缘的方式成为缘的命根,五种净色都依它而住立。没有命根就不能住立,因为离开命根的业生色聚根本不存在。因此,因为只有被具有守护特性的命所守护的温热才能现起,不被它守护的就不能,所以温热依于寿而住立。如光依火焰而显现,即依于那个名为火焰、一起现起的色聚,被称为“光”的色法才以“照耀、破除黑暗、令色法显现”等方式被认知。依于那光,即获得上述那种光作为缘。火焰被认知,即以“小、大、直、弯”等方式变得明显。巴利
456.Antonirodhasmiṃ pañca pasādeti nirodhasamāpannassa pavattamāne pañca pasāde. Kiriyamayapavattasminti javanādikiriyānibbattakadhammappavattiyaṃ. Balavapaccayā hontīti pacchājātavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayā honti, upatthambhakabhāvena balavapaccayā honti. Jīvitindriyaṃ paṭiccāti indriyaatthiavigatapaccayavasena paccayabhūtaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ paṭicca pañcavidhopi pasādo tiṭṭhati. Jīvitindriyena vinā na tiṭṭhati jīvitindriyarahitassa kammasamuṭṭhānarūpakalāpassa abhāvato. Tasmāti yasmā anupālanalakkhaṇena jīvitena anupālitā eva usmā pavattati, na tena ananupālitā, tasmā usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Jālasikhaṃ paṭicca ābhā paññāyatīti jālasikhāsaṅkhātabhūtasaṅghātaṃ saheva pavattamānaṃ nissāya ‘‘ābhā’’ti laddhanāmā vaṇṇadhātu ‘‘ujjalati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, rūpagatāni ca vidaṃsetī’’tiādīhi pakārehi ñāyati. Taṃ ālokaṃ paṭiccāti taṃ vuttappakāraṃ ālokaṃ paccayaṃ labhitvā. Jālasikhā paññāyatīti ‘‘appikā, mahatī, uju, kuṭilā’’tiādinā pākaṭā hoti.
业生的火界就像火焰的尖端,因为它是所依。命根就像光,因为它依那个而住。现在,为了说明譬喻和所譬喻之间的关联,说了“因为火焰尖端……”等话。“把握着光而生起”,用这句话说明:就像光与火焰尖端一起生起,同样,命根也与业生的温热一起生起。光只在火焰尖端存在时才存在,就像是火焰尖端所生出来的,所以说“以自身所生的光”。这里,“温热”指的是业生的火界,以及依它而住、守护它的命根。所以说“以业生大种所生的命根守护温热”。不只是让它在那一刹那安住,还能让相续不断,命根也是它的因,所以说“即使一百年,也守护着业生之火的现起”。温热作为寿命的缘时,是连同其余大种一起的,所以说“大种”。同样,寿命也是守护俱生色的,而成为温热的缘,所以说“守护大种”。巴利
Jālasikhāviya kammajatejo nissayabhāvato. Āloko viya jīvitindriyaṃ tannissitabhāvato. Idāni upamopamitabbānaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘jālasikhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ālokaṃ gahetvāva uppajjatīti iminā yathā jālasikhāya saheva āloko uppajjati, evaṃ kammajusmanā saheva jīvitindriyaṃ uppajjatīti dasseti. Jālasikhāsannissayo tassā satiyeva honto āloko tāya uppādito viya hotīti āha ‘‘attanā janitaālokenevā’’ti. Usmā nāmettha kammasamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu tannissitañca jīvitindriyaṃ tadanupālakañcāti āha ‘‘kammajamahābhūtasambhavena jīvitindriyena usmāya anupālana’’nti. Na kevalaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyā eva, atha kho pabandhānupacchedassapi jīvitindriyaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vassasatampi kammajatejapavattaṃ pāletī’’ti. Usmā āyuno paccayo honto sesabhūtasahito eva hotīti āha ‘‘mahābhūtānī’’ti. Tathā āyupi sahajātarūpaṃ pālentameva usmāya paccayo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahābhūtāni pāletī’’ti.
457 寿行:命本身以根缘等方式,守护俱生诸法,所以称为行,因此叫寿行。用复数来说,是因为它在成千上万种色聚中生起,所以有多种类别。受法:能领纳所缘之味,就像说“能导出”的那样。因此说“受或法”。因为苦、乐等种类不同,所以用复数。对于这些寿行和受,入灭尽定的人应该会死,因为受已经灭尽。但寿行并没有同样灭尽,所以灭尽定根本不可能入,更不用说出定了。因此经中说“然而,贤友”等。出定是因为想、受等生起而显现。现在,为了详细阐明这个道理,用譬喻来说明,所以说“犹如有人”等。厌倦:因为种种所缘的冲击而生起厌离。如预定时间:当预定的时间到来时。以色命根为缘:即作为根缘的色命根。如火焰持续:无色法因为火界极盛,所以能照亮所缘。如水冲击:如同入灭尽定前的先行造作。如覆盖的火炭:色命根只剩温热,不能放光。预定时间到来:即预定时间的来临。只按随顺适合的方式执取色的生起。舍弃此色身:即从此色身、此尸体离去,不再生起。巴利
457. Āyu eva indriyapaccayādivasena sahajātadhammānaṃ anupālanavasena saṅkharaṇato āyusaṅkhāro. Bahuvacananiddeso pana anekasatasahassabhedesu rūpakalāpesu pavattiyā anekabhedanti katvā. Ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantīti vedaniyā yathā ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vedanā dhammāvā’’ti. Sukhādibhedabhinnattā bahuvacananiddeso. Imesaṃ āyusaṅkhāravedanānaṃ ekantanirodhaṃ samāpannassa maraṇena bhavitabbaṃ vedanāya niruddhattā. Āyusaṅkhārānaṃ tathā aniruddhattā nirodhassa samāpajjanameva na siyā, kuto vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘te ca hāvuso’’tiādi. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati saññāvedanādīnaṃ uppattiyā. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṇṭhitvāti nānārammaṇāpātato nibbinditvā. Yathāparicchinnakālavasenāti yathāparicchinne kāle sampatte. Rūpajīvitindriyapaccayāti indriyapaccayabhūtā . Jālāpavattaṃ viya arūpadhammā tejussadabhāvato visayobhāsanato ca. Udakappahāro viya nirodhasamāpattiyā pubbābhisaṅkhāro. Pihitaaṅgārā viya rūpajīvitindriyaṃ usmāmattatāya anobhāsanato . Yathāparicchinnakālāgamananti yathāparicchinnakālassa upagamanaṃ. Anurūpapattivaseneva rūpapavattiggahaṇaṃ. Imaṃ rūpakāyaṃ jahantīti imasmā rūpakāyā kaḷevarā vigacchanti nappavattanti.
以身造作,所以叫“身行”,因为它依附于身体而活动。造作语言,所以叫“语行”——因为正是先有寻和伺,然后才开口说话、把话说出来。以心造作,所以叫“心行”,因为它依附于心而活动。在讨论心行灭时,就像色的灭一样,心的灭并没有被直接提到,因为心和心行是不同的;所以并不是与心相应的心也一定跟着灭,因为当寻等心行彻底灭去时,心并不因此就不存在。至于有人说“语言并没有灭”,这也不对。因为造作语言的才叫“语行”,当这些语行灭去时,语言怎么可能不灭?然而,即使心行灭去了,心仍然可以继续活动,因为心并不是由这些心行所造作的,就像寻等灭去之后,心照样生起一样——这就是对方在这里的意思。他们想说的是:如果心没有灭,众生就依靠未灭的心,以及依附于心的色法还没有离开,因此他们其实还活着。不要执著于文字表面——也就是说,虽然经文说“心行已灭”,但应当理解为只是那些心行灭了,而不是心灭了。像这样,这是需要引申理解的经典,不应执著地认为它是“直显真实义的经典”。站在诸位阿阇梨的方法上,就是站在传承而来的阿阇梨们的意趣上。应当审察,就是应当依据其他经典来考察这段经文,确认它的意思没有颠倒。比如,依“无想有情”这种说法,不能就认为“那里只有想不存在,其余的心和心所还存在”;又比如,依“非想非非想处”这种说法,也不能就认为“那里只有那样的想,而没有触等”,因为这是以想为代表来说的。同样,这里说“心行已灭”以及“想受灭”,也只是以它们为代表来说的。然而,应当知道,一切心和心所在那里都确实灭尽了,这才是这里不颠倒的意思,因为由于先前的造作力,一切心和心所都在那里灭尽。由此就说明了,前面所说的“有别故、彼无有故”这种推理说法是不恰当的,因为没有理解对方的意趣。所以他说:“义是所依,不是文字。”巴利
Kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Vitakketvā vicāretvā hi vācaṃ bhindati katheti. Cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā tappaṭibaddhavuttito. Cittasaṅkhāranirodhacodanāya rūpanirodho viya cittanirodho acodito tesaṃ tato aññattāti na cittasampayuttanirodho ekantiko vitakkādinirodhe tadabhāvato. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘vācā aniruddhā hotī’’ti, tampi na. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti hi vacīsaṅkhārā, tesu niruddhesu kathaṃ vācāya anirodho. Cittaṃ pana niruddhesupi cittasaṅkhāresu tehi anabhisaṅkhatattā vitakkādinirodho viya pavattatiyevāti ayamettha parassa adhippāyo. Ānantariyakammaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya, cittassa aniruddhattā taṃ nissāya ca rūpadhammānaṃ anapagatattā te jīvanti eva nāmāti. Byañjane abhinivesaṃ akatvāti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti vacanato teva niruddhā, na cittanti evaṃ neyyatthaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘nītattha’’nti abhinivesaṃ akatvā. Ācariyānaṃ naye ṭhatvāti paramparāgatānaṃ ācariyānaṃ adhippāye ṭhatvāti attho. Upaparikkhitabboti suttantarāgamato suttantarapadassa aviparīto attho vīmaṃsitabbo. Yathā hi ‘‘asaññabhavo’’ti vacanato ‘‘saññāva tattha natthi, itare pana cittacetasikā santī’’ti ayamettha attho na gayhati. Yathā ca ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti vacanato ‘‘saññāva tattha tādisī, na phassādayo’’ti ayamettha attho na gayhati saññāsīsena desanāti katvā, evamidhāpi ‘‘cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti, ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodho’’ti ca desanāsīsameva. Sabbepi pana cittacetasikā tattha nirujjhantevāti ayamettha aviparīto attho veditabbo, tathāpubbābhisaṅkhārena sabbesaṃyeva cittacetasikānaṃ tattha nirujjhanato. Etena yaṃ pubbe ‘‘aññattā, tadabhāvato’’ti ca yuttivacanaṃ, tadayuttaṃ adhippāyānavabodhatoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘attho hi paṭisaraṇaṃ, na byañjana’’nti.
“受损”是指被逼迫、被伤害。“被染污”是指被破坏、被摧毁。诸根因为所缘境的撞击而产生的疲劳,可以通过眼睛看见明亮色境中细微尘埃这件事来说明。就像在炎热的时候,前方烈火燃烧,同时又有刺耳的鼓被敲响,眼睛就像要裂开一样无法承受,耳朵则有人说“像被矛尖猛刺一样”。巴利
Upahatānīti bādhitāni. Makkhitānīti dhaṃsitāni. Ārammaṇaghaṭṭanāya indriyānaṃ kilamatho cakkhunā bhāsurarūpasukhumarajadassanena vibhāvetabbo. Tathā hi uṇhakāle purato aggimhi jalante kharassare ca paṇave ākoṭite akkhīni bhedāni viya na sahanti sotāni ‘‘sikharena viya abhihaññantī’’ti vattāro honti.
458 458. 法将(舍利弗)在解说非想非非想处时,说色界第四禅那本身就是依离色欲的修习而转起的无色禅那,于是用“由乐的舍断……”等语来解说。所谓“由离去、由消逝”,是说以离去为缘、以消逝为缘而有乐等的舍断。而以证得为缘的,则是遍处中的色界第四禅那以及下面三种无色定。因为不证得这些,就不可能证得非想非非想处。“从灭尽出起的果等至”,是指从灭尽定出起之后、由无常随观所成就的果等至。它被称为“无相心解脱”。就像止的等流果是神通,慈、悲、喜梵住的等流果是舍梵住,遍处的等流果是无色定,止观的等流果是灭尽定;同样地,观的等流果是沙门果,所以说“观的果等至”。所谓“所缘”,对于有所缘的法来说,特别是指它生起的因相,因此说“一切相”就是“色等一切所缘”。这里没有任何行相,所以叫“无相”,也就是无为界。因此说“离去一切相的涅槃界”。这里指的是与果等至同时生起的作意,而不是转向作意。因为转向作意在这里不可能生起,它是在随顺智之后紧接着生起的。巴利
458. Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānameva rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ arūpajjhānanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vissajjento dhammasenāpati ‘‘sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādinā vissajjesi. Apagamanena vigamena paccayā apagamanapaccayā sukhādippahānāni. Adhigamapaccayā pana kasiṇesu rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ heṭṭhimā tayo ca āruppā. Na hi sakkā tāni anadhigantvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanamadhigantuṃ. Nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattinti nirodhato vuṭṭhānabhūtaṃ aniccānupassanāsamudāgataphalasamāpattiṃ. Sā hi ‘‘animittā cetovimuttī’’ti vuccati. Yathā samathanissando abhiññā, mettākaruṇāmuditābrahmavihāranissando upekkhābrahmavihāro, kasiṇanissando āruppā, samathavipassanānissando nirodhasamāpatti, evaṃ vipassanāya nissandaphalabhūtaṃ sāmaññaphalanti āha ‘‘vipassanānissandāya phalasamāpattiyā’’ti. Ārammaṇā nāma sārammaṇadhammānaṃ visesato uppattinimittanti āha ‘‘sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ sabbārammaṇāna’’nti. Natthi ettha kiñci saṅkhāranimittanti animittā, asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sabbanimittāpagatāya nibbānadhātuyā’’ti. Phalasamāpattisahajātaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāyāha, na āvajjanamanasikāraṃ. Na hettha tassa sambhavo anulomānantaraṃ uppajjanato.
这里说的“在这个阶段”,是指在前面所说的灭尽定中,针对已提到的初、中、后三个阶段,这里特指执取最后阶段的那个位置。以两种力,是指以止和观这两种力。以及三种行,是指身行等三种行。以十六种智行,是指无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离贪随观、灭随观、弃舍随观、还灭随观、入流道……乃至阿拉汉果等至,以这十六种智行。以九种定行,是指初禅定等九种定行。如果一个人在以上所说的这些行中获得了自在,这就是自在智。这就是对它的解说。抉择说,是以抉择方式展开的注疏解说。因此应当按照《清净道论》及其注释中所说的方法来理解。巴利
Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti idha vuttanirodhassa ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ gahitānaṃ imasmiṃ pariyosānassa gahitaṭṭhāne. Dvīhi balehīti samathavipassanābalehi. Tayo ca saṅkhārānanti kāyasaṅkhārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ. Soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhīti aniccānupassanā, dukkhā, anattā, nibbidā, virāgā, nirodhā, paṭinissaggā, vivaṭṭānupassanā, sotāpattimaggo…pe… arahattaphalasamāpattīti imāhi soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi. Navahi samādhicariyāhīti paṭhamajjhānasamādhiādīhi navahi samādhicariyāhi. Yo yathāvuttāsu cariyāsu puggalassa vasībhāvo, sā vasībhāvatāpaññā. Assā sā kathitāti yojanā. Vinicchayakathāti vinicchayavasena pavattā aṭṭhakathā kathitā. Tasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.868-869) taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.868) vuttanayena veditabbā.
“转起等至”是指以圣者的安住方式而安住的等至。这里的“住”是指相续住,而不是刹那住。为什么呢?因为已经进入等至的缘故。因此说:“住,就是长久安住的意思。”“时限分别”是指预先限定时间:我将以这些等至度过这么长的时间。“以色等相故”是指依业、业相、趣相中随其所应而可得之色等相。其中,因为业相中可以缘取六种所缘,所以总说为“一切相”,但这并不是指一切所缘同时被作意,也不是指它们必定被作意。这只是一种性状上的说法,就像说:“如果我生病了,便应当服用此药。”巴利
Valañjanasamāpatti ariyavihāravasena viharaṇasamāpatti. Ṭhitiyāti ettha pabandhaṭṭhiti adhippetā, na khaṇaṭṭhiti. Kasmā? Samāpajjanattā. Tenāha ‘‘ṭhitiyāti ciraṭṭhitattha’’nti. Addhānaparicchedoti ettakaṃ kālaṃ samāpattiyā vītināmessāmīti pageva kālaparicchedo. Rūpādinimittavasenāti kammakammanimittagatinimittesu yathārahaṃ labbhamānarūpādinimittavasena. Tattha yasmā kammanimitte chabbidhampi ārammaṇaṃ labbhati, tasmā ‘‘sabbanimittāna’’nti vuttaṃ, na sabbesaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ ekajjhaṃ, ekantato vā manasikātabbato. Lakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ yathā ‘‘dātabbametaṃ bhesajjaṃ, yadi me byādhitā siyu’’nti.
459 “他也认知青色”等这段话,是借由认知青色等为门径,说明:对具有那种颜色的众生的认知,即是作意于无怨等状态;所以论中说“在这里所说的其实是无量心解脱”。在这里所讲的是无所有处,这样连接上下文。“在这里是空”“在这里是无相”,在这里也是同样的道理。“nti”是“这里没有别的、新的东西”等所说的意义表述。“这些”指无量心解脱等。它们各有名称,即各自有不同的名称,而所指的则是同一回事。“一法”指阿拉汉果等至。“四名”指用无量心解脱、无所有处心解脱、空心解脱、无相心解脱这四种名称来称呼它。“此”指这个道理。“无量”意为不限定范围,或者虽有限定,也不是“仅此而已”的有限范围。“无遗余”指不像不净等至那样只执取单一对象。巴利
459.Nīlampi sañjānātītiādinā nīlādiggahaṇamukhena taṃvaṇṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sañjānanaṃ averādibhāvamanasikaraṇaṃ jotitanti āha ‘‘etasmiñhi ṭhāne appamāṇā cetovimutti kathitā’’ti. Ettha ākiñcaññaṃ kathitanti sambandho. ‘‘Ettha suññatā’’ti, ‘‘ettha animittā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Nti ‘‘idha aññaṃ abhinavaṃ nāma natthī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Etāti appamāṇacetovimuttiādayo. Ekanāmakāti ekekanāmakā, ye nānābyañjanāti adhippetā. Eko dhammoti arahattaphalasamāpatti. Catunāmakoti appamāṇacetovimuttiādināmako. Etanti etamatthaṃ. Appamāṇāti anodhiso, odhisopi vā ‘‘ettakā’’ti aparimitā. Asesetvāti asubhasamāpatti viya ekasseva aggahaṇato.
即使以不净相为所缘也是一种“有”,但从所缘接触这一层面的“有”来说,不净等至的似相所缘就像具体形象一样,作为一种有、一种形体而显现,而这里并不是这样。那么,梵住和初无色定的似相所缘难道不存在吗?确实不存在。不过,这里之所以这样说,是因为它不像初无色定的心识那样以似相为所缘。“我”,就是由自己。因为有了它,才有“我”这个名称和智慧,这就成了“有”的状态。“有”这个词也是“我”的同义词,所以说“是指所谓的有、养育、补特伽罗等”。在这些当中,即无量定等四种。为了显示它们在地和所缘上的差别,所以说“然而义理上……”等等。它的所缘不能用有限等、过去等、内等来表述,所以称为“不可说所缘”,因为它是以般涅槃为所缘的果等至。巴利
Kiñcāpi asubhanimittārammaṇampi kiñcanaṃ hoti, ārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanassa kiñcanassa asubhasamāpattīnampi paṭibhāganimittasaṅkhātaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sabimbaṃ viya viggahaṃ kiñcanaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti, na tathā imassāti. Nanu brahmavihārapaṭhamāruppānampi paṭibhāganimittabhūtaṃ kiñci ārammaṇaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, ayaṃ pana paṭhamāruppaviññāṇaṃ viya na paṭibhāganimittabhūtaārammaṇatāya evaṃ vuttā. Attenāti attanā. Bhavati etena attāti abhidhānaṃ buddhi cāti bhāvo, attā. Bhāva-saddopi attapariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhāvaposapuggalādisaṅkhātenā’’ti. Nesaṃ appamāṇasamādhiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ. ‘‘Nānatā pākaṭāvā’’ti vuttaṃ nānattaṃ bhūmito ārammaṇato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘attho panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parittādibhāvena atītādibhāvena ajjhattādibhāvena ca na vattabbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ etissāti navattabbārammaṇā nibbānārammaṇaphalasamāpattibhāvato.
“只有这么点大”:因为被贪等烦恼染污,所以只有这么小的量,意思是肤浅、狭小的心。涅槃也是无量的,因为没有什么能用来衡量它——这样连接起来理解。“不动”:指阿拉汉果的心解脱,因为它不会被对立之法所动摇。“kiñcati”是压碎、粉碎的意思,所以注释说“kiñcati 压碎、粉碎”。为了说明它的用法,才说了“据说人们……”等话。巴利
Ettakoti rāgādīhi saṃkiliṭṭhatāya ettakappamāṇo, uttāno parittacetasoti attho. Nibbānampi appamāṇameva pamāṇakaraṇānaṃ abhāvenāti ānetvā sambandho. Akuppāti arahattaphalacetovimutti paṭipakkhehi akopanīyatāya. Kiñcatīti kattari paṭhito dhātu maddanatthoti āha ‘‘kiñcati maddatī’’ti. Tassa payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘manussā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
诸行因为聚集等密集状态,以及各自作用的限定,显现得好像有实体一样,成为执取常、乐等的基础,所以被称为“常相”“乐相等相”。而观在这一点上分解密集,摧毁对常等的执取,因此说“拔除相”,因为作为所缘的密集相不存在了。在同义语解释中,巴利文里为什么说“未被执取”?那(sā)就是空心解脱。“于一切处”是在无量心解脱等的解释中说的。“以所缘”是说依所缘也是同义的,并不只是从自性味来说。“依此理趣”是指依无量等从所缘得到的理趣。“然而在他处”是指除了“无所有”等词生起的因缘之外,当“无量”等词以其他因缘生起时,这种心解脱也有;这个法则也适用于其他情况。“依此理趣”是指依各自名称而应当被称呼的理趣。以见谛为入口、依轮回转起而宣说的教导,以阿拉汉果为顶峰,顺着前后的关联圆满开示。至于这里在义理上没有加以分别的内容,都是很容易了知的。巴利
Samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saviggahā viya upaṭṭhitā saṅkhārā niccādiggāhassa vatthutāya ‘‘niccanimittaṃ sukhādinimitta’’nti ca vuccati. Vipassanā pana tattha ghanavinibbhogaṃ karontī niccādiggāhaṃ vidhamentī ‘‘nimittaṃ samugghātetī’’ti vuttā ghananimittassa ārammaṇabhūtassa abhāvā. Na gahitāti ekatthapadaniddese pāḷiyaṃ kasmā na gahitā? Sāti suññatā cetovimutti. Sabbatthāti appamāṇācetovimuttiādiniddesesu. Ārammaṇavasenāti ārammaṇavasenapi ekatthā, na kevalaṃ sabhāvasarasatova. Iminā pariyāyenāti appamāṇatotiādinā ārammaṇato laddhapariyāyena. Aññasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ākiñcaññādisaddapavattihetuto aññena hetunā appamāṇātisaddappavattiyaṃ etassa cetovimuttiyā honti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Iminā pariyāyenāti iminā tāya tāya samaññāya voharitabbatāpariyāyena. Saccānaṃ dassanamukhena vaṭṭavasena uṭṭhitadesanaṃ arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
4. 《小方广经》的注释巴利
4. Cūḷavedallasuttavaṇṇanā
460 这段开示是以问答的方式展开的,所以为了从整体上说明提问者、回答者以及提问的因由,才说了“这又是谁……”等话。“近事男身份”:指还没有证得圣道的近事男身份。“他们”:指那十一万人。由于证道所带来的寂止,他诸根寂静,内心寂静。巴利
460. Ayaṃ desanā yasmā pucchāvissajjanavasena pavattā, tasmā pucchakavissajjake pucchānimittañca samudāyato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ko panāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Upāsakattanti amaggāgataṃ upāsakattaṃ. Tesanti ekādasanahutānaṃ. Maggāgatena upasamena santindriyo santamānaso.
“今天我的圣子会怎样呢?”她望着街道张望。为了扶持,她按照以往的习惯伸出手去扶他的手。外在的,是指与自己不相合的、不属于同一类的他物。离间者,是指说离间语的人。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ nu kho ajja bhavissati ayyaputto’’ti vīthiṃ olokayamānā. Olambanatthanti tassa hatthāvalambanatthaṃ pubbāciṇṇavasena attano hatthaṃ pasāresi. Bahiddhāti attanā aññaṃ visabhāgavatthuṃ sandhāya vadati. Paribhedakenāti pesuññavādinā.
因为对证得怀有少欲之心,他想到:“不该公开宣说。”随后又出于悲悯,想到“如果我确实……”等话。这就是法,也就是出世间法。为了趋向还灭而积累的、属于决择分的善,是亲依止缘。他想:“如果我有这个亲依止缘,就能得到这个法;即使没有,将来也会成为亲依止缘。”就像长时间熏修的油灯,火焰在瓶中燃烧闪耀,他被内在因缘的圆满所催促,说道:“既然如此,请允许我出家。”巴利
Adhigamappicchatāya ‘‘na pakāsetabbo’’ti cintesi. Puna taṃ anukampanto ‘‘sace kho panāha’’ntiādiṃ cintesi. Eso dhammoti eso lokuttaradhammo. Vivaṭṭaṃ uddissa upacitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ upanissayo. ‘‘Yadi me upanissayo atthi, sakkā etaṃ paṭiladdhuṃ. Sacepi natthi, āyatiṃ upanissayo bhavissatī’’ti cirakālaparibhāvitāya ghaṭe padīpajālā viya abbhantare dippamānāya hetusampattiyā codiyamānā āha ‘‘evaṃ sante mayhaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāthā’’ti.
利养和恭敬之所以出现,是因为他长久以来积集了福德。由于愿力圆满成就——苏阇多长老曾向莲华上佛的上首弟子行恭敬承事,做了以通达为目的的布施,并发愿说“愿我能分享你们所见之法”,由此具备了被称为愿力圆满的成就。并未长久地辛劳:他在修习业处时,因为观智已经成熟,所以没有长久地辛苦用功。为了阐明前面已说的义理,才说了“从此以后”等话。以第二次出行:是指为了出家而作的第二次出行。巴利
Lābhasakkāro uppajji sucirakālaṃ katūpacitapuññatāya. Abhinīhārasampannattāti sujātattherassa padumuttarassa bhagavato aggasāvakassa nipaccakāraṃ katvā – ‘‘tumhehi diṭṭhadhammassa bhāgī assa’’nti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ dānaṃ datvā katapatthanāsaṅkhātasampannābhinīhārattā. Nāticiraṃ kilamitthāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāventī vipassanāya paripākavasena ciraṃ na kilamittha. Vuttamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ito paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyagamanenāti pabbājanatthaṃ gamanato dutiyagamanena.
把问题按它的实质内容引到面前,这叫“引近”。“自有身”就是自己的身体。就像接受随便放在那里的东西一样,是在领受它。只有一个结,所以叫“单结”,也就是一个疙瘩。因为一个结容易解开,多个结就难解,这里举出一个结,是为了说明解答起来容易。站在无碍解的领域里,这句话是在显示这位长老尼已经通达无碍解。“成为缘”,是指以所缘等方式成为缘。巴利
Upanetvāti pañhassa atthabhāvena upanetvā. Sakkāyanti sakāyaṃ. Upanikkhittaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ sampaṭicchamānā, viya sampaṭicchantī viya. Eko eva pāso etissāti ekapāsakā, gaṇṭhi. Sā hi sumociyā, anekapāsā pana dummociyā, ekapāsaggahaṇaṃ vissajjanassa sukarabhāvadassanatthaṃ . Paṭisambhidāvisaye ṭhatvāti etena theriyā pabhinnapaṭisambhidataṃ dasseti. Paccayabhūtāti ārammaṇādivasena paccayabhūtā.
长老尼所证得的殊胜成就,不是毗舍佉自己能理解的境界,所以他才在心里想“这不可能”等等,应当这样理解。所谓“以分别谛的问题来解答”,是通过揭示属于谛范围内的法,来回答那被称为“分别”——即分辨此与彼、确定其差别——的问题。“两个谛”就是苦谛和集谛。“转回来”就是翻转过来。“结的问题”:因为极难解开、像绳结一样,所以叫结的问题。巴利
Theriyā visesādhigamassa attano avisayatāya visākho ‘‘na sakkā’’tiādinā cintesīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saccavinibbhogapañhabyākaraṇenāti saccapariyāpannassa dhammassa dassanato aññānaññatthaniddhāraṇabhedanāsaṅkhātassa vinibbhogapañhassa vissajjanena. Dve saccānīti dukkhasamudayasaccāni. Paṭinivattetvāti parivattetvā. Gaṇṭhipañhanti dubbinibbedhatāya gaṇṭhibhūtaṃ pañhaṃ.
那个取并不是就是那些五取蕴,因为部分不可能等同于整体,整体也不可能等同于部分。取也不是在五取蕴之外另有别物,因为取就是五取蕴的一部分。毕竟,部分不可能脱离整体而存在。如果说“取就是它”等等,那就显示出两种立场都有过失。“具有色等自性”:取可能具有色、受、想、识的自性,也可能具有触、思等心所的自性。“如果在别处”:如果取彻底离开五取蕴而单独存在的话。“在他宗”:指在其他部派的学说中。“与心不相应的随眠”:这只是一个举例,因为那些部派主张心没有色法等状态,识等也可以是跟心不相应的。“如是解答”:他以“贤友,不是这样的”等话语,指出取就是对于诸蕴的欲贪,以此来解答。因为能成立真实的法与义,所以不相离。对任何地方都不会迷惑,不会停滞。在提问的范围内,它驱散了愚痴的黑暗,就像点燃了千盏明灯一样。取的具体情形,因为并不浅显易懂,对大多数人来说是深隐的。对于还没掌握其中关窍的人,就好像被遮盖住了一样。因为是以被三相所击破的法为对象,所以是“被三相所击的”。因为是甚深智慧的行境,所以是“甚深的”。因为已经获得立足之处,能通达圣谛,所以是这样。因为现见法等的状态,所以达到了无所畏。因为完全住于梵行,所以在三种有的尽头,住于涅槃。巴利
Na taṃyeva upādānaṃ te pañcupādānakkhandhā ekadesassa samudāyatābhāvato, samudāyassa ca ekadesatābhāvato. Nāpi aññatra pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi upādānaṃ tassa tadekadesabhāvato. Na hi ekadeso samudāyavinimutto hoti. Yadi hi taññevātiādinā ubhayapakkhepi dosaṃ dasseti. Rūpādisabhāvampīti rūpavedanāsaññāviññāṇasabhāvampi, phassacetanādisabhāvampi upādānaṃ siyā. Aññatra siyāti pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi visuṃyeva upādānaṃ yadi siyā. Parasamayeti nikāyavāde. Cittavippayutto anusayoti nidassanamattametaṃ nikāyavāde cittasabhāvābhāvaviññāṇādīnampi cittavippayuttabhāvapaṭijānanato. Evaṃ byākāsīti ‘‘na kho, āvuso’’tiādinā khandhagatachandarāgabhāvena byākāsi. Atthadhammanicchayasambhavato asambandhena. Tesu katthacipi asammuyhanato avitthāyantena. Pucchāvisaye mohandhakāravigamanena padīpasahassaṃ jālentena viya. Saupādānupādānaṭṭhānaṃ anuttānatāya pacurajanassa gūḷho. Aggahitasaṅketānaṃ kesañci paṭicchāditasadisattā paṭicchanno. Tilakkhaṇabbhāhatadhammavisayatāya tilakkhaṇāhato. Gambhīrañāṇagocaratāya gambhīro. Laddhapatiṭṭhā ariyasaccasampaṭivedhanato. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammādibhāvato vesārajjappattā. Sabbaso nivutthabrahmacariyatāya tiṇṇaṃ bhavānampi aparabhāge nibbāne nivutthavatīti bhavamatthake ṭhitā.
461 先把“色是我”这个短语提出来,然后引用《无碍解道》里“在这里,有一类人……”这段经文,来解释它的含义。其中,“见为是我”就是把某样东西看成“我”,也就是把它看成自我。“我”这个词,是用来指称自我的。一个执持“我”论的人,是依靠“我”这个想法来安立一个自我的。所以,他把那个色执取为“我”,说“这是我的色”。当他所称呼的那个“我”——也就是所谓的“我的自我”——被认为就是这个色时,他就把色和我看成没有差别的同一个东西,认为两者不是两回事。这样看的人,色就像我一样,或者我就像色一样,于是我就必然成了无常的。“焰”是指火焰。如果火焰是颜色,那它就应该只是眼识所能认识的对象,而不是身识所能认识的对象;或者,如果颜色也能被身识等认识,那就和火焰没有区别了。所以,这个譬喻和它所譬喻的东西一样,对一个持邪见的人来说,都是不成立的。他是以邪见这种“看”在看,而不是以渴爱、慢、慧的随观在看。把没有物质形态的受等执取为“我”,就像因为影子依赖于树,所以把有影子的树看成有影子一样;又因为色是依属于我的,所以把有我之色的我看成有色。就像花香依属于花一样,因为色是依属于我的,所以把色看成在我之中。就像盒子是宝石的容器一样,色也是我的容器,因此把我看成在色之中。用同样的方法,还可以推知:我和受等不是两回事,受等是我的容器,也是依属于我的。巴利
461.‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti paduddhāraṃ katvā ‘‘idhekacco’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.130) paṭisambhidāpāṭhena tadatthaṃ vivarati. Tattha attato samanupassatīti attāti samanupassati, attabhāvena samanupassati. Ahanti attānaṃ niddisati. Ahaṃbuddhinibandhanañhi attānaṃ attavādī paññapeti, tasmā yaṃ rūpaṃ so ahanti yadetaṃ mama rūpaṃ nāma, so ahanti vuccamāno mama attā taṃ mama rūpanti rūpañca attañca advayaṃ anaññaṃ samanupassati. Tathā passato ca attā viya rūpaṃ, rūpaṃ viya vā attā aniccoti āpannameva . Accīti jālasikhā. Sā ce vaṇṇo, cakkhuviññeyyāva siyā, na kāyaviññeyyā, vaṇṇopi vā kāyādiviññeyyo acciyā anaññattāti upameyyaṃ viya upamāpi diṭṭhigatikassa ayuttāva. Diṭṭhipassanāyāti micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātāya passanāya passati, na taṇhāmānapaññānupassanāya. Arūpaṃ vedanādiṃ attāti gahetvā chāyāya rukkhādhīnatāya chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya, rūpassa santakabhāvena attādhīnatāya rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati. Pupphādhīnatāya pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya ādheyyabhāvena attādhīnatāya rūpassa attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Yathā karaṇḍo maṇino ādhāro, evaṃ rūpampi attano ādhāroti katvā attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Eseva nayoti iminā attano vedanādīhi anaññattaṃ tesañcādhāraṇataṃ nissitatañca yathāvuttaṃ atidisati.
说“无色是我”,就像前面“有受者”等说法一样,因为这时并没有和色混杂在一起。说“色与无色混合的我”,是因为把色和其余那些无色法一起执取为我的缘故。说“断灭见”,是因为看到色等法会坏灭。所以经文才说:“如果有人宣称‘色是我’,那是不成立的;我的这个我,是生起又灭去的,他就这样落入了这种见解。”所谓其余,即十五处。说“常见”,是因为从“有色”等角度执取时,并没有把色的性质辨析清楚。巴利
Arūpaṃ attāti kathitaṃ ‘‘vedanāvanta’’ntiādīsu viya rūpena vomissakatāya abhāvato. Rūpārūpamissako attā kathito rūpena saddhiṃ sesārūpadhammānaṃ attāti gahitattā. Ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā rūpādīnaṃ vināsadassanato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpaṃ attāti yo vadeyya, taṃ na upapajjati, attā me uppajjati ca veti cāti iccassa evamāgataṃ hotī’’tiādi. Avasesesūti pannarasasu ṭhānesu. Sassatadiṭṭhi kathitā rūpavantādibhāvena gahitassa aniddhāritarūpattā.
持邪见的人,对于他所认定为“我”的那个对象,大多数情况下也会把它认定为恒常、快乐的。但圣弟子因为以否定这种执取而彻底看清了一切法无我,所以不会把色看作我;他这样存在时,会照见色是无常、苦、无我的,对受等也是如此。为了说明这一点,经中说“不以色为我”等。这样一来,有见也和无明、有渴爱一样,正是轮回生起的原因。所以在讨论邪见的部分说“由这些就有流转”等,而在讨论断除邪见的部分则说“由这些就没有流转”等。巴利
Diṭṭhigatiko yaṃ vatthuṃ attāti samanupassati, yebhuyyena taṃ niccaṃ sukhanti ca samanupassateva. Sāvako pana tappaṭikkhepena sabbe dhammā anattāti sudiṭṭhattā rūpaṃ attāti na samanupassati, tathābhūto ca aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti samanupassati, tathā vedanādayoti dassento ‘‘na rūpaṃ attato’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ bhavadiṭṭhipi avijjābhavataṇhā viya vaṭṭassa samudayoyevāti diṭṭhikathāyaṃ ‘‘ettakena gamanaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Diṭṭhippahānakathāyañca ‘‘ettakena gamanaṃ na hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
462 462. 因为所问的正是前面已经说过的义理,所以注释里说“长老尼反问之后才应当回答”,为了展示反问的方式,就说了“近事男”等这段话。“以行道”是指以导向有身灭的道这种状态。“以有为无为的方式,以世间出世间的方面,以被包含未被包含的方面”——这里的“以……方式”这个词要分别搭配每一组来理解。在这当中,固然没有一种叫“无为”的道,但之所以问“道是有为还是无为”,只是顺着提问的方式才那样说的。单凭“圣”这个说法,就已经确立了道是出世间的;不过,那些归属于能包含的蕴里的道法,也可能有世间性,所以这里采用了“世间”这个限定。虽然经典原文里只出现了“被包含”而没有“未被包含”,但那些以能包含者身份被提到的法,本身并不属于被包含,所以注释书才加了“未被包含”来理解,这一点应当看到。关于“有为”等词:由种种因缘条件和合、共同造作而成,所以叫“有为”。既然是这样,对于具足此道的人来说,他在加行阶段的思,就是以“愿我的道是八支或七支”这样发愿的方式而被发愿的。与道同时生起的思也算被发愿,因为它充当了道的辅助因;正因如此,才被构想、被策励。由于是诸缘所成办,所以叫“所作”“已生”。由正在入定的人在自己相续中正确地进入、令它生起。这样,通过这七个词,就显示出圣道确实是由缘所生的。巴利
462. Heṭṭhā vuttamatthameva pucchitattā ‘‘theriyā paṭipucchitvā vissajjetabbo’’ti vatvā paṭipucchanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upāsakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipattivasenāti sakkāyanirodhagāminipaṭipadābhāvena. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena lokiyalokuttaravasena saṅgahitāsaṅgahitavasenāti ‘‘vasenā’’ti padaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha kāmaṃ asaṅkhato nāma maggo natthi, kiṃ saṅkhato, udāhu asaṅkhatoti pana pucchāvasena tathā vuttaṃ? ‘‘Ariyo’’ti vacaneneva maggassa lokuttarato siddhā, saṅgāhakakhandhapariyāpannānaṃ pana maggadhammānampi siyā lokiyatāti idha lokiyaggahaṇaṃ. Kiñcāpi saṅgahitapadameva pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ, na asaṅgahitapadaṃ, ye pana saṅgāhakabhāvena vuttā, te saṅgahitā na hontīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ asaṅgahitaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṅkhatotiādīsu samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katoti saṅkhato. Tathābhūto ca taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa pubbabhāgacetanāti mayhaṃ maggo aṭṭhaṅgiko hotu sattaṅgiko vāti cetitabhāvena cetito. Sahajātacetanāyapi cetitova tassā sahakārīkāraṇabhāvato, tato eva pakappito āyūhito. Paccayehi nipphāditattā kato nibbattito ca. Samāpajjantena attano santāne sammadeva āpajjantena uppādentena. Iti sattahipi padehi paccayanibbattitaṃyeva ariyamaggassa dasseti.
圣道拥有诸蕴的一部分,所以圣道是“有分”的。诸蕴没有这样的部分,所以诸蕴是“无分”的。所谓“分”,就是借它显现出整体的那个部分、组成单元。“道”就是圣道。因为它是某个整体的一部分,所以是“有分”的。诸蕴则是以无遗无余的全部组成部分而成为整体,所以是“无分”的。就像一座城市是王国的一部分,因为城市包含在王国之中,所以被王国所包含;同样,圣道是戒、定、慧三蕴的一部分,因为圣道包含在三蕴之中,所以说圣道被这三蕴所包含。这就是用“如城被国所包含”这个比喻来说明。“同类”是指性质相同、本质一致。这里,戒蕴如果按“九亿千种戒”等分类,或者按已受持的戒、远离戒等方式来理解,那是无分的;但道心中的戒,只是活命第八戒,只是彻底断除烦恼的那种远离,所以是有分的。定蕴如果按小、大等分类,以及近行定、安止定等来分,种类很多,那是无分的;但道心中的定,只是出世间的,只是安止定,所以是有分的。慧蕴同样,如果按小、大等分类,以及闻所成智等来分,种类很多,那是无分的;但道心中的慧,只是出世间的,只是修所成的,所以是有分的。“依自性”是说,不依靠助缘,仅凭自性、仅凭自力,无法进入所缘——如果没有精进的支持,没有正念的现前,就做不到。“策励的作用”是说,不让心陷入懈怠那一侧,这就是策励的作用。“不漂浮的作用”是说,不让心在所缘上漂浮起来,这就是不漂浮的作用。巴利
Asaṅgahito khandhānaṃ padeso etassa atthīti maggo sappadeso. Natthi etesaṃ padesāti khandhā nippadesā. Padissati etena samudāyoti hi padeso, avayavo. Ayanti maggo. Sappadesattā ekadesattā. Nippadesehi samudāyabhāvato niravasesapadesehi. Yathā nagaraṃ rajjekadesabhūtaṃ tadantogadhattā rajjena saṅgahitaṃ, evaṃ ariyamaggo khandhattayekadesabhūto tadantogadhattā tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitoti dasseti ‘‘nagaraṃ viya rajjenā’’ti iminā. Sajātitoti samānajātitāya, samānasabhāvattā evāti attho. Ettha ca sīlakkhandho ‘‘nava koṭisahassānī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.20; apa. aṭṭha. 2.55.55; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) vuttapabhedavasena ceva sampattasamādānaviratiādivasena ca gayhamāno nippadeso, maggasīlaṃ pana ājīvaṭṭhamakameva samucchedaviratimattamevāti sappadesaṃ. Samādhikkhandho parittamahaggatādivasena ceva upacārappanāsamādhivasena ca anekabhedatāya nippadeso, maggasamādhi pana lokuttarova , appanāsamādhi evāti sappadeso. Tathā paññākkhandho parittamahaggatādivasena ceva sutamayañāṇādivasena ca anekabhedatāya nippadeso, maggapaññā pana lokuttarāva, bhāvanāmayā evāti sappadesā. Attano dhammatāyāti sahakārīkāraṇaṃ anapekkhitvā attano sabhāvena attano balena appetuṃ na sakkoti vīriyena anupatthambhitaṃ, satiyā ca anupaṭṭhitaṃ. Paggahakiccanti yathā kosajjapakkhe na patitā cittaṭṭhiti, tathā paggaṇhanakiccaṃ. Apilāpanakiccanti yathā ārammaṇe na pilavati, evaṃ apilāpanakiccaṃ.
“一同生起”就是俱生。精进对定来说,是让心在所缘上安止的殊胜助缘,就像一位朋友弯下腰用背托住你,帮你站稳。正念对定来说,是让心在所缘上稳固持续的重要助缘,就像一位朋友用肩膀顶住你,让你牢牢站住。“由所作”则是从它们实际起到帮助作用的角度来说的。巴利
Ekato jātāti sahajātā. Piṭṭhiṃ datvā onatasahāyo viya vāyāmo samādhissa ārammaṇe appanāya visesapaccayabhāvato. Aṃsakūṭaṃ datvā ṭhitasahāyo viya sati samādhissa ārammaṇe daḷhapavattiyā paccayabhāvato. Kiriyatoti upakārakiriyato.
撞击之后,就是撞击所缘之后。寻确实被称为“有撞击的作用”,而瑜伽行者则说“令业处成为以推论撞击、以寻撞击的”。这里的“于此亦”,就是在正见和正思惟当中。“由所作”,是指如前所说的资助作用。巴利
Ākoṭetvāti ārammaṇaṃ āhanitvā. Tathā hi vitakko ‘‘āhananaraso’’ti, yogāvacaro ca ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ takkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotī’’ti vuccati. Idhāpīti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappesu. Kiriyatoti vuttappakāraupakārakiriyato.
清除对净相、乐相等所缘的执取,就是四种作用的成就。以缘性来说,是指俱生缘等缘的性质。若单从四种作用的成就来说,这是显示道精进本身已被摄持。因为那道精进作为单一法而存在时,以先前所说的饶益自性,并依眷属之义而成为资具,于是成就四种作用。与道相应诸法这句话,也含摄了道本身之法,而不只是与它相应的触等法。一刹那心,是从道心生起的角度说,唯有一刹那心。巴利
Subhasukhādinimittaggāhavidhamanaṃ catukiccasādhanaṃ. Paccayattenāti sahajātādipaccayabhāvena. Catukiccasādhanavasenevāti idaṃ maggavīriyasseva gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tañhi ekaṃyeva hutvā catukiccaṃ yathāvuttaupakārakasabhāvena ca parivāraṭṭhena parikkhāro hoti. Maggasampayuttadhammānanti iminā maggadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ, na taṃsampayuttaphassādīnaṃyeva. Ekacittakkhaṇikāti maggacittuppādavasena ekacittakkhaṇikā.
“以七种智”:是指与达到最高殊胜的七种速行相应的智,或者是指七种随观智。从最初开始反复亲近修习就是习行,此后不断增长就是修习,一再地去做就是多修习。基于这个意趣,才说“以不同的心”等等。按照意趣提取出应取之义,这样的经是不了义经。按照字面直接取义,这样的经是了义经。如果是这样的话,假如这部经是了义经,而习行等确实是分别在不同的心中发生的,那就应当如此。然而,习行等是指心多次生起,而不是只生起一次,所以说“一个心”等等。这里的大意是:以习行的方式生起的心,即使持续很长时间,也只是以习行的方式在生起;同样,以修习、多修习的方式生起的心也是如此。但在这里并不能得出一个固定的规则:只有某些心以习行的方式生起,另一些心以修习的方式生起,还有一些以多修习的方式生起。因此,对于那些主张出世间道是多刹那心的人来说,这个过失确实很难避免。然而,就像在预备阶段,遍知等功能虽然在种种不同的心中生起,属于正见等的法在通达时,按各自应有的方式完成四种作用,并成为一刹那心的生起;同样,依修观所产生的行力,习行、修习、多修习在通达时也只是一刹那心,这样主张的论师们没有任何过失,因为习行等所应完成的作用,在那个时刻确实只在一刹那心中就完成了。因此说“或一刹那心”等等。“如果他觉知”:就是如果他达到知悉。“喝粥”:应当把他打发走,因为他没有能力讨论法义,这就是意趣所在。巴利
Sattahi ñāṇehīti paramukkaṃsagatehi sattahi javanehi sampayuttañāṇehi, sattahi vā anupassanāñāṇehi. Ādito sevanā āsevanā, tato paraṃ vaḍḍhanā bhāvanā, punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ bahulīkammanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘aññena cittenā’’tiādi. Adhippāyavasena niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ. Yathārutavasena gahetabbatthaṃ nītatthaṃ. Evaṃ santeti yadi idaṃ suttaṃ nītatthaṃ, āsevanādi ca visuṃ visuṃ cittehi hoti, evaṃ sante. Āsevanādi nāma cittassa anekavāraṃ uppattiyā hoti , na ekavāramevāti āha ‘‘ekaṃ citta’’ntiādi. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – āsevanāvasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ sucirampi kālaṃ āsevanāvaseneva pavatteyya, tathā bhāvanābahulīkammavasena pavattamānānipi, na cettha ettakāneva cittāni āsevanāvasena pavattanti, ettakāni bhāvanāvasena, bahulīkammavasenāti niyamo labbhati. Iti anekacittakkhaṇikaariyamaggaṃ vadantassa dunnivāriyovāyaṃ doso. Yathā pana pubbabhāgepi nānācittesu pavattapariññādikiccānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ paṭivedhakāle yathārahaṃ catukiccasādhanaṃ, ekacittakkhaṇikā ca pavatti, evaṃ vipassanāya pavattābhisaṅkhāravasena āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammāni paṭivedhakāle ekacittakkhaṇikāneva hontīti vadantānaṃ ācariyānaṃ na koci doso āsevanādīhi kātabbakiccassa tadā ekacittakkhaṇeyeva sijjhanato. Tenāha ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇikāvā’’tiādi. Sace sañjānātīti sace saññattiṃ gacchati. Yāguṃ pivāhīti uyyojetabbo dhammasākacchāya abhabbabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
463 在“福行等”当中,用“等”这个字,也把以身体思、语言思等为特征的身行等收摄进来了,并不只是指福行、非福行、不动行。因为系属于身体,所以是由身体造作的,而不是因为从身体生起的;那些法确实是从心生起的。说“被生成”,这是就“有身体时它才存在,没有身体时它就不存在”这一点来说的。“语言”就是指语声。“造作”就是产生。因此说“生成”。因为离开了寻和伺的心,不可能产生语声。“以心所系故”:用这句话显示心是依止等缘的性质,以及“心行”就是造作的意思。“相互混杂”:虽然在意义上有差别,但因为以身行等名称所能称谓的状态而相互混杂,好像没有差别一样,因此就变得混乱、掺杂、不明显、不清晰、难以说明、难以了知。“执取、握持、释放、移动”:对任何应当用身体执取的东西,引生并成就了名为执取的握持、名为释放的舍离、名为随意移动的活动,这些行就这样产生。从身体转起的行,以及由身体所造作的行,就称为“身行”。“颚骨移动”:就是颚骨的活动。“语破”:就是发出语言。这样造作语言,在这里就称为“语行”。巴利
463.Puññābhisaṅkhārādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasañcetanādi lakkhaṇe kāyasaṅkhārādikepi saṅgaṇhāti, na apuññāneñjābhisaṅkhāre eva. Kāyapaṭibaddhattā kāyena saṅkharīyati, na kāyasamuṭṭhānattā. Cittasamuṭṭhānā hi te dhammāti. Nibbattīyatīti ca idaṃ kāye sati sabbhāvaṃ , asati ca abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vācanti vacīghosaṃ. Saṅkharotīti janeti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbattetī’’ti. Na hi taṃ vitakkavicārarahitacittaṃ vacīghosaṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkoti. Cittapaṭibaddhattāti etena cittassa nissayādipaccayabhāvo cittasaṅkhārasaṅkharaṇanti dasseti. Aññamaññamissāti atthato bhinnāpi kāyasaṅkhārādivacanavacanīyabhāvena aññamaññamissitā abhinnā viya, tato eva āluḷitā saṃkiṇṇā avibhūtā apākaṭā duddīpanā duviññāpayā. Ādānaggahaṇamuñcanacopanānīti yassa kassaci kāyena ādātabbassa ādānasaṅkhātaṃ gahaṇaṃ, vissajjanasaṅkhātaṃ muñcanaṃ, yathātathācalanasaṅkhātaṃ copananti imāni pāpetvā sādhetvā uppannā. Kāyato pavattā saṅkhārā, kāyena saṅkharīyantīti ca kāyasaṅkhārātveva vuccanti. Hanusaṃcopananti hanusañcalanaṃ. Vacībhedanti vācānicchāraṇaṃ. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti katvā idha vacīsaṅkhārātveva vuccanti.
464 关于“将入”这个词:它指以临近、即将到来的状态为所缘,即临近灭尽;舍弃临近的,而取远的则无有用处。从取作为灭尽基础的非想非非想处心开始,才叫入灭尽。基于这个意思,所以说“用两个词说明了非想非非想处等至的时候”。“其心已如此修习”:这里说的是以一段时间为限的心,因为其他心并不是无间的。确实,如果没有让二力、智、定行得以自在运转的心,以一段时间为限的心就不能成就无心状态。巴利
464.Samāpajjissanti padaṃ nirodhassa āsannānāgatabhāvavisayaṃ āsannaṃ vajjetvā dūrassa gahaṇe payojanābhāvato. Nirodhapādakassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanacittassa ca gahaṇato paṭṭhāya nirodhaṃ samāpajjati nāmāti adhippāyena ‘‘padadvayena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattikālo kathito’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti ettha addhānaparicchedacittaggahaṇaṃ itaresaṃ nānantariyabhāvato. Na hi baladvayañāṇasamādhicariyānaṃ vasībhāvāpādanacittehi vinā addhānaparicchedacittaṃ acittakabhāvāya hoti.
“以其余诸行”指的是身行和心行。只在第二禅那中灭尽,因为是以未到达而灭。在其他情况下也是同样的道理。“将出”这个词,所缘的是接近出定、即将到来的状态,舍弃近的而去取远的没有意义。又因为从灭尽定出定是由心生起所限定的,所以说“以两个句子,说明了在灭尽定内的时间”。“其心已如此修习”:也就是按照所限定的时间,成为无心状态,此后成为有心状态,如此,灭尽定的遍作心就被生起了。巴利
Sesasaṅkhārehīti kāyasaṅkhāracittasaṅkhārehi. Dutiyajjhāneyeva nirujjhati anuppattinirodhena. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Vuṭṭhahissanti padaṃ vuṭṭhahanassa āsannānāgatabhāvavisayaṃ āsannaṃ vajjetvā dūrassa gahaṇe payojanābhāvato. Nirodhato vuṭṭhānassa ca cittuppādena paricchinnattā tato oramevāti āha ‘‘padadvayena antonirodhakālo kathito’’ti. Tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti yathā yathāparicchinnakālameva acittakabhāvo, tato paraṃ sacittakabhāvo hoti, tathā nirodhassa parikammacittaṃ uppāditaṃ hoti.
“审察”是指:经过审察,知道“只有这件事该做”,仅仅是停止运作。“进入”是指:进入无心状态。那么,为什么只进入七天呢?因为要按时间划定界限,而且这多半是因为:对依靠食物维持生命的有情来说,其已执取的相续,靠一天吃下的食物只能维持七天。巴利
Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya idameva kātabbaṃ jānitvā appavattimattaṃ. Samāpajjantīti acittakabhāvaṃ sampadeva āpajjanti. Atha kasmā sattāhameva samāpajjantīti? Yathākālaparicchedakaraṇato, tañca yebhuyyena āhārūpajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ upādinnakapavattassa ekadivasaṃ bhuttāhārassa sattāhameva yāpanato.
并不存在“一切果等至都不让出入息生起”这回事,所以说“让生起”。为了指出那种不让生起的果等至,就说“然而此……中略……不让生起”。这里说的“此”,是指这段经文里所说的入灭尽定的比丘。至于“他的果等至一定是第四禅那的”,并没有这个定准,所以说“这又有什么用呢”等等。“不可称呼”:因为达到了极其微细的状态,无法称之为“有”,有些人这样认为。然而,依靠作为灭尽定基础的第四禅那等定行之力,即使是非第四禅那的果等至,在紧接灭尽定之后的果等至中,也不让出入息生起。正因为出入息不生起,才说它们“不可称呼”。这样处理之后,《骞赡活命者长老事》中所引的等至与果的例子也能很好地吻合。因此说“这是在有分时所说的”。在“于唯作转起呈现之时”中,这里的“唯作转起”是指身表和语表的动作;在其呈现之时,也就是在转起的时刻。“不能造作语言”:因为在那种等至中,那些寻与伺不会产生表知。巴利
Sabbā phalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti idaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Yā pana na samuṭṭhāpeti, taṃ dassento ‘‘imassa pana…pe… na samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti āha. Tattha imassāti idha pāḷiyaṃ vuttanirodhasamāpajjanabhikkhuno. Tassa pana phalasamāpatti catutthajjhānikāvāti niyamo natthīti āha ‘‘kiṃ vā etenā’’tiādi. Abbohārikāti sukhumattabhāvappattiyā ‘‘atthī’’ti voharituṃ asakkuṇeyyāti keci. Nirodhassa pana pādakabhūtāya catutthajjhānādisamādhicariyāya vasena acatutthajjhānikāpi nirodhānantaraphalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti abhāvato eva te abbohārikā vuttā. Evañca katvā sañjīvattheravatthumhi ānītasamāpattiphalanidassanampi suṭṭhu upapajjati. Tenāha ‘‘bhavaṅgasamayenevetaṃ kathita’’nti. Kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakāleti ettha kiriyamayapavattaṃ kāyavacīviññattivipphāro, tassa vaḷañjanakāle pavattanasamaye. Vācaṃ abhisaṅkhātuṃ na sakkonti aviññattijanakattā tesaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ.
“有功德”是指有自性,也就是有本性。所谓“空”,是指果等至,因为它远离了贪等而成为空。同样,因为贪等的相不存在,所以是“无相”;因为贪等的愿求不存在,所以是“无愿”。因此说:“在无相和无愿中,也是同样的道理。”以无相和无愿的涅槃为所缘而生起的果等至中,触就称为无相触、无愿触——这个意思就用“同样的道理”来指代。巴利
Saguṇenāti sarasena, sabhāvenāti attho. Suññatā nāma phalasamāpatti rāgādīhi suññattā. Tathā rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāvā animittā, rāgapaṇidhiādīnaṃ abhāvā appaṇihitāti āha ‘‘animittaappaṇihitesupi eseva nayo’’ti. Animittaṃ appaṇihitañca nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannaphalasamāpattiyaṃ phasso animitto phasso appaṇihito phasso nāmāti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati.
因为见到了自我空性,所以无我随观就是“空”;因为破除了常相,所以无常随观就是“无相”;因为遮止了对乐的愿求,所以苦随观就是“无愿”——因此说:“空……中略……也被称为观。” “从无常出起”:是指执取诸行无常相、导向出起的观,通过一侧出起、两侧出起以及相转起的方式,从无常而出起。“从无常把握后”等语,是为了说明并非只有这一种方式。同样的道理也适用于其余的情况。关于无愿观的道等,以及空观的道等,其间的连结,他说:“同样的道理。”因为对于来趣之确定的不存在,所以成为不确定,因此会有不同的解释。事实上,三种触正在接触:像这样以功德和所缘而获得空等名称的三种触在接触,这并不是一种决定性的说法。这是成立的,因为一个触可以获得三种名称。巴利
Attasuññatādassanato anattānupassanā suññatā, niccanimittugghāṭanato aniccānupassanā animittā, sukhappaṇidhipaṭikkhepato dukkhānupassanā appaṇihitāti āha – ‘‘suññatā…pe… vipassanāpi vuccatī’’ti. Aniccato vuṭṭhātīti saṅkhārānaṃ aniccākāraggāhiniyā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā parato ekatovuṭṭhānaubhatovuṭṭhānehi nimittapavattato vuṭṭhāti. Aniccato pariggahetvāti ca idaṃ ‘‘na ekantikaṃ evampi hotī’’ti katvā vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Appaṇihitavipassanāya maggotiādinā, suññatavipassanāya maggotiādinā ca yojanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. Vikappo āpajjeyya āgamanassa vavatthānassa abhāvena avavatthānakarattā. Evañhi tayo phassā phusantīti evaṃ saguṇato ārammaṇato ca nāmalābhe suññatādināmakā tayo phassā phusantīti aniyamavacanaṃ. Sameti yujjati ekasseva phassassa nāmattayayogato.
因为远离一切有为法,涅槃就叫作“远离”,也就是依止的远离。倾向,是指背离它的对立面而朝向它。下倾,就是向下弯;倾注,就是从那里彻底放下。巴利
Sabbasaṅkhatavivittatāya nibbānaṃ viveko nāma upadhivivekoti katvā. Ninnatā tappaṭipakkhavimukhassa tadabhimukhatā. Poṇatā onamanaṃ, pabbhāratā tato vissaṭṭhabhāvo.
465 从眼等感官对色等对象所生起的色身活动来看,五门所生的乐叫做身乐;从意门生起的,由意识接触所生的,叫做心所乐。说“它带来乐”,这是对自性的描述。“说明甘甜的状态”,就是说明可意的状态。“说明感受的状态”,就是说明觉受的状态。因为从究竟义来说,只有受在感受所缘,所缘则是被感受的。说“苦”等是对自性的描述,也是同样的道理。“住立乐”:因为住立、持续而乐,不是仅凭住立的那一刹那,所以说“存在是乐”。“变坏苦”:因为变化、消失而苦,不是仅凭坏灭的那一刹那,所以说“不存在是苦”。对于还没有遍知所依的人来说,乐受的止息会显现为苦,这个道理可以用与可爱者分离来说明。“住立苦”和“变坏乐”在这里也是同样的道理,所以说“存在是苦,不存在是乐”。苦受的止息在众生看来是乐,他们这样说:“疾病平息了,啊,乐生起了。”“了知的状态”,就是如实了知自相。了知不苦不乐受为乐,是因为它的状态微细,就像对其余诸法从自相和共相正确了知,那是最上的乐。因此他说:巴利
465. Cakkhādito rūpādīsu pavattarūpakāyato uppajjanato pañcadvārikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ nāma, manodvārikaṃ cetophassajātāya cetasikaṃnāma. Sabhāvaniddeso sukhayatīti katvā. Madhurabhāvadīpakanti iṭṭhabhāvajotanaṃ. Vedayitabhāvadīpakanti vedakabhāvavibhāvakaṃ. Vedanā eva hi paramatthato ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, ārammaṇaṃ pana veditabbanti. Dukkhanti sabhāvaniddesotievamādiatthavacanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. Ṭhitisukhāti ṭhitiyā dharamānatāya sukhā, na ṭhitikkhaṇamattena. Tenāha ‘‘atthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Vipariṇāmadukkhāti vipariṇamanena vigamanena dukkhā, na nirodhakkhaṇena. Tenāha ‘‘natthibhāvo dukkha’’nti. Apariññātavatthukānañhi sukhavedanuparamo dukkhato upaṭṭhāti. Svāyamattho piyavippayogena dīpetabbo. Ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Dukkhavedanuparamo hi sattānaṃ sukhato upaṭṭhāti. Evañhi vadanti – ‘‘tassa rogassa vūpasamena aho sukhaṃ jāta’’nti. Jānanabhāvoti yāthāvasabhāvato avabujjhanaṃ. Adukkhamasukhañhi vedanaṃ jānantassa sukhaṃ hoti tassa sukhumabhāvato, yathā tadaññe dhamme salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca sammadeva avabodho paramaṃ sukhaṃ. Tenevāha –
“ 无论何时如实观察诸蕴的生起与坏灭,
有智慧的人获得喜悦和欢欣,那对知者而言即是不死。”巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
“不知的状态”这个说法,要按前面所说的反过来理解它的含义。因为住在迷乱之中,就是苦。另一种解释是:“知的状态”就是有知、有智慧的状态。因为与智慧相应、以智慧为依托的不苦不乐受,是乐,是可意的形态。正如所说:“既是可意的,也有可意的果。”而“不知的状态是苦”,这里的含义也要按前面所说的反过来理解。巴利
Ajānanabhāvoti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Dukkhañhi sammohavihāroti. Aparo nayo jānanabhāvoti jānanassa ñāṇassa sabbhāvo. Ñāṇasampayuttā hi ñāṇopanissayā ca adukkhamasukhā vedanā sukhā iṭṭhākārā. Yathāha ‘‘iṭṭhā ceva iṭṭhaphalā cā’’ti. Ajānanabhāvo dukkhanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
哪一种随眠在随眠呢?在欲贪随眠等七种随眠当中,是哪一种随眠以随眠的方式在活动?因为烦恼以未被断除的状态潜藏在心相续中,所以叫随眠;也就是说,一旦遇到合适的条件就会生起。这就说明了,当条件具备时,它们就有生起的可能。因为未被断除的烦恼,在条件具备时就会生起。因此说“以未被断除的意义来说,就像睡着了”。这些应当从直接的角度理解为未来的烦恼;过去和现在的烦恼,因为本质相同,也被这样称呼。因为诸法并不会因为时间不同而有本质上的差别。如果未被断除的意义就是随眠的意义,那岂不是一切未被断除的烦恼都成了随眠吗?我们并不是仅以“未被断除”这一点来说明随眠的意义,而是说:以未被断除的状态而变得强盛的烦恼,才是随眠。这种强盛应当理解为贪等烦恼各自特有的本性,因为在阿毗达摩中说:“他舍断强盛的随眠。”这里的“它”指的就是贪随眠。“未被断除的”:是通过未被断除的状态来说明随眠的意义。它以色蕴等未被遍知的五蕴为依托,而在已遍知时便找不到立足之处。因此说“并非对于所有的乐受,它都是未被断除的”。而且,这里随眠的意义是就所缘对象来说的。因此说“并非针对一切乐受它都会生起”,这就是其含义。巴利
Katamo anusayo anusetīti kāmarāgānusayādīsu sattasu anusayesu katamo anusayo anusayavasena pavattati? Appahīnabhāvena hi santāne anusayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanārahatā nesaṃ dassitā. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Tenāha ‘‘appahīnaṭṭhena sayito viya hotī’’ti. Te ca nippariyāyato anāgatā kilesā daṭṭhabbā, atītā paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi. Yadi appahīnaṭṭho anusayaṭṭho, nanu sabbepi kilesā appahīnā anusayā bhaveyyunti? Na mayaṃ appahīnatāmattena anusayaṭṭhaṃ vadāma, atha kho pana appahīnaṭṭhena thāmagatā kilesā anusayā. Idaṃ thāmagamanañca rāgādīnameva āveṇiko sabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, yato abhidhamme – ‘‘thāmagataṃ anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Soti rāgānusayo. Appahīnoti appahīnabhāvamukhena anusayanaṭṭhamāha. So ca apariññātakkhandhavatthuto, pariññātesu patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati. Tenāha ‘‘na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya so appahīno’’ti. Ārammaṇavasena cāyaṃ anusayaṭṭho adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘na sabbaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatīti attho’’ti.
不过,随眠的意义也可以依“事”来理解,这就是所说的“得地”。因此,在义注《清净道论》(2.834)中说:巴利
Vatthuvasenapi pana anusayaṭṭho veditabbo, yo ‘‘bhūmiladdha’’nti vuccati. Tena hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.834) vuttaṃ –
所谓“地”,就是作为观照所缘的三界五蕴。“得地”则是指在那些蕴当中能够生起的烦恼类。因为它得了这个地,所以就叫“得地”,也就是获得地的意思。不过,这并不是从所缘的角度来说的。如果从所缘的角度来说,那么即使是已经遍知、漏尽的圣者,缘着他们过去、未来的蕴,烦恼也仍然会生起,比如缘着玛哈咖佳亚那、莲华色等尊者的蕴,或者缘着修罗财主、难陀玛纳瓦等人的蕴而生起的烦恼。如果那也算“得地”,那么因为它无法被断除,就没有人能断除轮回的根本了。但应当从“事”的角度来理解“得地”。无论在哪里,只要还没有被观慧遍知的蕴生起,从它们生起的那一刻起,作为轮回根本的烦恼类就在那里随眠。这应当以“未被断除”的意义来理解为“得地”。巴利
‘‘Bhūmīti vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā. Bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma tesu khandhesu uppattirahaṃ kilesajātaṃ. Tena hi sā bhūmiladdhā nāma hoti, tasmā bhūmiladdhanti vuccati, sā ca kho na ārammaṇavasena. Ārammaṇavasena hi sabbepi atītānāgate pariññātepi ca khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhe ārabbha kilesā uppajjanti mahākaccānauppalavaṇṇādīnaṃ khandhe ārabbha soreyyaseṭṭhinandamāṇavakādīnaṃ viya. Yadi ca taṃ bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma siyā, tassa appaheyyato na koci bhavamūlaṃ pajaheyya, vatthuvasena pana bhūmiladdhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yattha yattha hi vipassanāya apariññātā khandhā uppajjanti, tattha tattha uppādato pabhuti tesu vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ anuseti. Taṃ appahīnaṭṭhena bhūmiladdhanti veditabba’’ntiādi.
这个道理适用于一切处,由此引申出“并不是对一切苦受,那个随眠都还没断,也不是缘于一切苦受而生起”等等。这里应当说的内容,按照前面所说的方式就能理解。“某个随眠在哪里随眠,当它被断除时,在那里就叫做已断”,这就是各处所提出的断除之问,因此针对它而说“应断除什么?这就叫做断除之问”。巴利
Esa nayo sabbatthāti iminā ‘‘na sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya so appahīno, na sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatī’’tiādiṃ atidisati. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo anusayo yattha anuseti , so pahīyamāno tattha pahīno nāma hotī’’ti tattha tattha pahānapucchā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiṃ pahātabbanti ayaṃ pahānapucchā nāmā’’ti.
只用同一个解答,也就是像“贤友毗舍佉,在这里,比丘远离诸欲……”(《中部》1.374)这样的一个回答。两个问题,就是随眠之问和断除之问,这两个问题他都用一个回答答复了。“他以彼舍断贪”是一个回答,“在那里贪随眠不再潜在”是另一个回答。这里没有按照提问的先后顺序,而是按断除的次第来回答。“他解答了两个问题”是简略的说法,为了展开说明这个意思,才接着说了“在这里”等话。其中,“将彼如此镇伏后”这一句,说明的是:一个人镇伏了贪之后,不再给它重新生起的机会,这样镇伏之后,再用圣道将它彻底根除。就着他这种情况,可以说“他以彼舍断贪,在那里贪随眠不再潜在”。被欲瀑流等四种瀑流,或者说被轮回生存的瀑流迅猛冲走的有情,应当超越这些瀑流而到达彼岸,而那涅槃是依处,是立足之地。因此世尊说:“已度脱、到彼岸、立于高地的婆罗门。”(《相应部》4.238;《如是语》69;《无碍解道》187)巴利
Ekeneva byākaraṇenāti ‘‘idhāvuso, visākha, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.374) ekeneva vissajjanena. Dve pucchāti anusayapucchā pahānapucchāti dvepi pucchā vissajjesi. ‘‘Rāgaṃ tena pajahatī’’ti idamekaṃ vissajjanaṃ, ‘‘na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti idamekaṃ vissajjanaṃ, pucchānukkamañcettha anādiyitvā pahānakkamena vissajjanā pavattā . ‘‘Dve pucchā vissajjesī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tathāvikkhambhitameva katvāti iminā yo rāgaṃ vikkhambhetvā puna uppajjituṃ appadānato tathāvikkhambhitameva katvā maggena samugghāteti, tassa vasena ‘‘rāgaṃ tena pajahati, na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti vattabbanti dasseti. Kāmoghādīhi catūhi oghehi saṃsārabhavogheneva vā vegasā vuyhamānesu sattesu taṃ uttaritvā pattabbaṃ, tassa pana gādhabhāvato patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.238; itivu. 69; pu. pa. 187).
因为空性等分类而有多种差别,所以在巴利圣典中用复数说“无上”,也就是先说了“无上解脱”,然后又因为这一切都共同具有阿拉汉性而说“于阿拉汉果”。这里的“于”是处格,表示领域。“令生起愿望”是指这样激发愿望、希求:“啊,但愿我能证得阿拉汉果!”这里的“令生起”一词,词尾表示原因。那么,以阿拉汉果为对象的愿望怎么会生起呢?其实,并没有任何愿望是真正以阿拉汉果为所缘而生起的,因为还没有证得它,它不在经验范围内。然而,针对假想出来的影像,愿望还是会生起。所说的“由欲求缘而生起”,是就间接缘而言;而直接的缘性并不存在,所以说“不是以愿望的令生起为根本而生起”。然而,这种忧应被亲近,因为它是舍断不善法和增长善法的因相。因此世尊说:“天帝,我说忧有两种:应亲近的和不应亲近的。”三个月圆满的,称为三月住者。剩下的两个词也是这样。在这个章节中,即在这个自恣章节中。清净自恣,是指“我是清净的”这样进行的清净自恣。因为这是阿拉汉们才有的自恣。巴利
Suññatādibhedena anekabhedattā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anuttaresū’’ti bahuvacananiddesoti ‘‘anuttarā vimokkhā’’ti vatvā puna tesaṃ sabbesampi arahattabhāvasāmaññena ‘‘arahatte’’ti vuttaṃ. Visaye cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassāti ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ arahattaṃ labheyya’’nti patthanaṃ upaṭṭhapentassa, patthentassāti attho. Paṭṭhapentassāti cettha hetumhi antasaddo. Kathaṃ pana arahattavisayā patthanā uppajjatīti? Na kāci arahattaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā patthanā uppajjati anadhigatattā avisayabhāvato. Parikappitarūpaṃ pana taṃ uddissa patthanā uppajjati. ‘‘Uppajjati pihāpaccayā’’ti vuttaṃ paramparapaccayataṃ sandhāya, ujukaṃ pana paccayabhāvo natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ uppajjatī’’ti. Idaṃ pana sevitabbaṃ domanassaṃ akusalappahānassa kusalābhivuḍḍhiyā ca nimittabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘domanassampāhaṃ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.359-362). Tīhi māsehi sampajjanakā temāsikā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Imasmiṃ vāreti imasmiṃ pavāraṇavāre. Visuddhipavāraṇanti ‘‘parisuddho aha’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ visuddhipavāraṇaṃ. Arahantānameva hesa pavāraṇā.
并不是任何时候都存在“应断除的法已被断除”这回事。为了说明这一点,先说了“并非以忧……”等话,这是间接的说法;接着为了阐明这个意思,又说了“然而这个……”等话。至于这里真正应当说明的内容,后面会详细讲到。取道、起愿、立愿之后。所谓“省察”,就是以教诫的方式自我激励而说。所谓“因戒而处于低劣地位”,意思是:比起其他为证阿拉汉果而修行的人,你有没有在戒方面处于低劣地位?“极清净”,是因为没有残缺等状况,犹如善洗净的天然宝珠,极为清净。所谓“善策励”,就是精进善加策励,毫无退缩。所谓“慧”,就是观慧,由于不被对立品所制伏,故不迟钝、锐利明净,在审察诸行时勇健运转。所谓“间接地”,是以那忧为阿拉汉道近依的间接方式。这里所指的是以所缘方式而随眠,因此说“不缘那者而生起”。在这里,不生起就名为断,所以说“在那里,瞋随眠已断,这就是意思”。以第三禅应镇伏的无明,那无明正是由圣道所断,因此说“镇伏无明随眠”等话,或者是因为与随眠相似的缘故。在“镇伏贪随眠”这里,也是同样的道理。在第四禅中,名为不随眠,因为在那里不实行应作之事。巴利
Na kadāci pahātabbassa pahāyakatā atthīti dassento ‘‘na domanassena vā’’tiādiṃ vatvā pariyāyenetaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato vitthārena āgamissati. Paṭipadaṃ gahetvā patthanaṃ katvā patthanaṃ ṭhapetvā. Paṭisañcikkhatīti ovādavasena attānaṃ samuttejento katheti. Sīlena hīnaṭṭhānanti aññehi arahattāya paṭipajjantehi sīlena hīnaṭṭhānaṃ kiṃ tuyhaṃ atthīti adhippāyo. Suparisuddhanti akhaṇḍādibhāvato sudhotajātimaṇi viya suṭṭhu parisuddhaṃ. Supaggahitanti kadācipi saṅkocābhāvato vīriyaṃ suṭṭhu paggahitaṃ. Paññāti vipassanāpaññā paṭipakkhehi anadhibhūtatāya akuṇṭhā tikkhavisadā saṅkhārānaṃ sammasane sūrā hutvā vahati pavattati. Pariyāyenāti tassa domanassassa arahattupanissayatāpariyāyena. Ārammaṇavasena anusayanaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘na taṃ ārabbha uppajjatī’’ti. Anuppajjanamettha pahānaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pahīnova tattha paṭighānusayoti attho’’ti. Tatiyajjhānena vikkhambhetabbā avijjā, sā eva ariyamaggena samucchindīyatīti ‘‘avijjānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, anusayasadisatāya vā. ‘‘Rāgānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Catutthajjhāne nānuseti nāma tattha kātabbakiccākaraṇato.
466 因此,意思是说:由于彼此相反,所以从自性、作用、缘等各方面来看都是对立的。这里说的是“相反的譬喻”,就像“黑法与白法相反”等说法那样。“如同黑暗”:就像黑暗一样,从自性上说就是微弱的。“不明显”:因为不是粗显的,所以不显著、不清楚。正因如此,才难以显示、难以让人了解。“像那样的”:就是像舍受一样。正如舍受不像乐受、苦受那样粗显,无明也不像贪、嗔那样粗显。所以它的意思是:它是黑暗的、不明显的、难以显示、难以让人了解的。这里说的是“同类的譬喻”,就像“愿求与回声”等说法那样。“在多少处所”:在苦等多少处所,或者在所知处所。“异类譬喻”:就像光明是黑暗的对治譬喻一样。“明”指道智,“解脱”指果,因此说“这两种法是无漏的”。在“以无漏之义”等中,也应当说“以殊胜之义”。因为那也是解脱与涅槃所共通的,而由于以无为之义,涅槃的异类性也是可以成立的。你越过问题而去了,问不该问的,这就是意思。为了把握问题的界限和分量,应当站在合适的位置上,却从那里之后发问,因此不能把握问题的边际。“无譬喻法”:从究竟义上说,是以同类譬喻不可比拟的法。以未来等的方式,说了涅槃的同类譬喻,而在异类义中确实存在有为法,因此从究竟义上说,是就某种同类譬喻而发问,所以说“过去了”等。因为无为、无住、一向常住的涅槃,从究竟义上说,哪里会有同类的可能呢?因此说“所谓涅槃”等。巴利
466.Tasmāti paccanīkattā sabhāvato kiccato paccayato cāti adhippāyo. Visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito ‘‘kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya. Andhakārāti andhakārasadisā appakā sabhāvato. Avibhūtā apākaṭā anoḷārikabhāvato. Tato eva duddīpanā duviññāpanā. Tādisāvāti upekkhāsadisāva. Yathā upekkhā sukhadukkhāni viya na oḷārikā, evaṃ avijjā rāgadosā viya na oḷārikā. Atha kho andhakārā avibhūtā duddīpanā duviññāpanāti attho. Sabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito ‘‘paṇidhi paṭighoso’’tiādīsu viya. Yattakesu ṭhānesūti dukkhādīsu yattakesu ṭhānesu, yattha vā ñeyyaṭṭhānesu. Visabhāgapaṭibhāgoti andhakārassa viya āloko vighātakapaṭibhāgo. Vijjāti maggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, vimuttīti phalanti āha ‘‘ubhopete dhammā anāsavā’’ti. Anāsavaṭṭhenātiādīsu paṇītaṭṭhenātipi vattabbaṃ. Sopi hi vimuttinibbānānaṃ sādhāraṇo, vimuttiyā asaṅkhataṭṭhena nibbānassa visabhāgatāpi labbhateva. Pañhaṃ atikkamitvā gatosi, apucchitabbaṃ pucchantoti adhippāyo. Pañhānaṃ paricchedapamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne aṭṭhatvā tato paraṃ pucchanto nāsakkhi pañhānaṃ pariyantaṃ gahetuṃ. Appaṭibhāgadhammassāti nippariyāyato sabhāgapaṭibhāgena appaṭibhāgadhammassa. Anāgatādipariyāyena nibbānassa sabhāgapaṭibhāgo vutto, visabhāge ca attheva saṅkhatadhammā, tasmā nippariyāyato kiñci sabhāgapaṭibhāgaṃ sandhāya pucchatīti katvā ‘‘accayāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asaṅkhatassa hi appatiṭṭhassa ekantaniccassa sato nibbānassa kuto nippariyāyena sabhāgassa sambhavo. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ nāmeta’’ntiādi.
这里“偏离”的意思是:因缺乏“我将问同类或相对者”的确定决意,结果偏离了所问的意义才发问,并不是因为不知道才问。由此说明,前面所有的提问,都是先以所见对照之法知道了才提出的。长老尼则是如实阐明每一个所问的意义,跟随世尊开示的智慧之后才作答。“沉入涅槃”就是进入涅槃而安住,是沉入涅槃之中。因此说“在涅槃内部、已入涅槃”。“它的”指的是梵行。巴利
Viraddhoti ettha sabhāgapaṭibhāgaṃ pucchissāmīti nicchayābhāvato pucchitamatthaṃ virajjhitvāva pucchi, na ajānitvāti attho. Etena heṭṭhā sabbapucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandananayena jānitvāva pavattāti dīpitaṃ hoti. Therī pana taṃ taṃ pucchitamatthaṃ sabhāvato vibhāventī satthu desanāñāṇaṃ anugantvāva vissajjesi. Nibbānogadhanti nibbānaṃ ogāhitvā ṭhitaṃ nibbānantogadhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānabbhantaraṃ nibbānaṃ anupaviṭṭha’’nti. Assāti brahmacariyassa.
467 “具足明慧”在这里是为了说明所说的明慧,才说了“善于界”等话。因此(阿难)说:“尊者,怎样才算是有智慧的人?”(世尊答:)
“阿难,当比丘善于界、善于处、善于缘起、善于处非处,阿难,到这一步,这位比丘就算是有智慧的人。”所谓“大慧”,是指这位长老尼已经证得无学位的无碍解,圆满具足无碍解而安住;为了说明这一点,才说了“于大义”等话。“与国王役使之人”,就是被国王差遣办事的人。“以直接之言”,是指世尊触及作持等而说出的话。这里如果在义理上还有没有详细分辨的地方,依照前面已说的道理,就很容易明白了。巴利
467.Paṇḍiccenasamannāgatāti ettha vuttapaṇḍiccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhātukusalā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, paṇḍito hoti? Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca. Ettāvatā nu kho, ānanda, bhikkhu paṇḍito hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124). Paññāmahattaṃ nāma theriyā asekkhappaṭisambhidappattāya paṭisambhidāyo pūretvā ṭhitatāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rājayuttehīti rañño kamme niyuttapurisehi. Āhaccavacanenāti satthārā karaṇādīni āhanitvā pavattitavacanena. Yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
5. 《小法受持经》的注释巴利
5. Cūḷadhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
468 “执取法为法而执取”:不论它是法还是非法,只要固执地把它执取为“法”,由此产生的行为方式就是他的行径。“在造作之时”,是指在把那对象执取为“法”而正在造作的时刻。“乐”就是不费力,所以说“易作”。“苦异熟”,是指成熟为不可爱的果报。巴利
468.Dhammotigahitagahaṇānīti dhammo vā hotu itaro vā, dhammoti paggahitaggāhappavattā cariyāva. Āyūhanakkhaṇeti tassa dhammoti gahitassa pavattanakkhaṇe. Sukhanti akicchaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukara’’nti. Dukkhavipākanti aniṭṭhaphalavipaccanaṃ.
469 就像眼等五根各自取自己的境,这是由它们自身的本性决定的,意根也是这样。而且,这些境在被执取为可意的时候,并没有过失;在人的身体中,它们也不会造成过失——这就是那些沙门婆罗门的见解,所以说“在事欲和烦恼欲中都没有过失”。意思是:以贪味的方式享受境的时候,并没有过患,也不会因此产生任何障碍。“达到可受用性”就是进入能够被受用的状态。这里的“pā”这个词有“受用”的意思,而“tabya”是表示行为者的词,意思是随自己的喜好去受用。烦恼欲在被贪味的时候,本身就已经包含在事欲之中了,但因为这些人是依烦恼欲而贪味的,所以说“在事欲中以烦恼欲达到可受用性”。“以烦恼欲”是工具格。“达到可受用性”就是应当被受用,这里也应当从行为者的角度来理解。“结髻”就是通过编结头发做成发髻。“苦行者及女游行者”就是指已经出家成为苦行者和游行者的女性。“施设遍知”是“他们说断除”这句话的同义说法,所以说“施设断除、超越”。由此表明:这里的“断除”,指的是如实了知“这些名为欲的事物是无常、苦、变易法”,而不只是指分离。“ Māluvāsipāṭikā”就是马卢瓦藤的裂果,也就是马卢瓦果里的囊袋。“会惊恐”是就住在娑罗树上的天神的情况来说的。因为那时候她心里这样想。“像拘毗罗树叶那样”是指形状像大拘毗罗树叶。这是从形状上来说的,而马卢瓦藤的叶子比拘毗罗树叶更大、更厚。“由于宽大、众多、厚实、沉重”是说产生了巨大的重量。“Sā”就是马卢瓦藤。“Oghana”是指从下方垂下来的厚重状态。巴利
469. Yathā cakkhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ yathāsakaṃ visayaggahaṇaṃ sabhāvasiddhaṃ, evaṃ manasopi. Te ca visayā iṭṭhākārato gahaṇe na koci doso, purisattabhāve na ca te dosaṃ pavattentīti ayaṃ tesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ laddhīti āha ‘‘vatthukāmesupi kilesakāmesupi doso natthī’’ti, assādetvā visayaparibhoge natthi ādīnavo, tappaccayā na koci antarāyoti adhippāyo. Pātabyataṃ āpajjantīti paribhuñjanakataṃ upagacchanti. Paribhogattho hi ayaṃ pā-saddo kattusādhano ca tabya-saddo, yathāruci paribhuñjantīti attho. Kilesakāmopi assādiyamāno vatthukāmantogadhoyeva, kilesakāmavasena pana nesaṃ assādetabbatāti āha ‘‘vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena pātabyata’’nti. Kilesakāmenāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Pātabyataṃ paribhuñjitabbatanti etthāpi kattuvaseneva attho veditabbo. Moḷiṃ katvāti veṇibandhavasena moḷiṃ katvā. Tāpasaparibbājikāhīti tāpasapabbajjūpagatāhi. Pariññaṃ paññapentīti idaṃ ‘‘pahānamāhaṃsū’’ti padasseva vevacananti ‘‘pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapentī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammāti yāthāvato parijānanaṃ idha ‘‘pahāna’’nti adhippetaṃ, na vinābhāvamattanti dasseti. Māluvāsipāṭikāti māluvāvidalaṃ māluvāphale poṭṭalikā. Santāsaṃ āpajjeyyāti sāle adhivatthadevatāya pavattiṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tadā hi tassā evaṃ hoti. Koviḷārapattasadisehīti mahākoviḷārapattasaṇṭhānehi. Saṇṭhānavasena hetaṃ vuttaṃ, māluvāpattā pana koviḷārapattehi mahantatarāni ceva ghanatarāni ca honti. Vipulabahughanagarupattatāya mahantaṃ bhāraṃ janetvā. Sāti māluvālatā. Oghananti heṭṭhato olambanahetubhūtaṃ ghanabhāvaṃ.
盲林和妙林之所以被特别指出,是因为它们专门被那些人看中。在椰子等草类植物中,白蚁以啃咬为特征,为了说明它们会冒出来,所以说“会冒出来”。就像在嬉戏一样,如同在迟缓的河边嬉戏。现在我要把你整个覆盖住——它仿佛满心欢喜,左右摇摆、翻来覆去地缠绕着。触也是快乐的,因为它柔软、细嫩、柔和。看也是快乐的,因为叶子厚实、密集、层层叠叠。生起欢喜心:先前因为听说住处会被毁坏而心生恐惧,感到惊怖;现在看到它的成就,被吸引住了,就生起了欢喜。巴利
Andhavanasubhagavanaggahaṇaṃ tesaṃ abhilakkhitabhāvato. Nāḷikerādīsu tiṇajātīsu. Khādanupalakkhaṇaṃ upacikānaṃ uṭṭhahanaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘uṭṭhaheyyu’’nti. Keḷiṃ karontī viyāti vilambananadī viya keḷiṃ karontī. Idāni ahaṃ taṃ ajjhottharinti pamodamānā viya ito cito ca vipphandamānā vilambantī. Samphassopi sukho mudutaluṇakomalabhāvato. Dassanampi sukhaṃ ghanabahalapattasaṃhatatāya. Somanassajātāti pubbe anussavavasena bhavanavināsabhayā santāsaṃ āpajji, idāni tassā sampattidassanena palobhitā somanassajātā ahosi.
它要结成茂密的一团:意思是像搭棚架那样舒展开来,纠结成网。处于这种状态时,由于叶子浓密覆盖,就像一把伞盖,所以说“要以伞盖的形状站立”。整棵树:指上方所有的大小枝条,也就是整棵树。一边垂落:只是以缠绕的方式向下垂降。枝条垂到根部:摩楼瓦藤因重量而弯曲,枝条向下垂到树根,又再向上攀爬。所有枝条:下面的、中间的、上面的,所有枝条都被缠绕。一再交结,像网一样连绵不断地纠结在一起。这样反复交结,覆盖一切。把所有枝条压在下面,自己站在上面,由于重量巨大,或者风吹、或者天降雨时,就会破裂。依附于枝条的宫殿:指系附于枝条的宫殿。因为在这里,世尊以“诸比丘,譬如”等语,将过去曾发生的事本身作为譬喻引来,所以说“然而这座宫殿”等语。巴利
Viṭabhiṃ kareyyāti ātānavitānavasena jaṭentī jālaṃ kareyya. Tathābhūtā ca ghanapattasañchannatāya chattasadisī hotīti āha ‘‘chattākārena tiṭṭheyyā’’ti. Sakalaṃ rukkhanti upari sabbasākhāpasākhaṃ sabbarukkhaṃ. Bhassamānāti paliveṭhanavaseneva otaramānā. Yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhīti māluvā bhārena onamitvā rukkhassa yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhi puna abhiruhamānā. Sabbasākhāti heṭṭhā majjhe upari cāti sabbāpi sākhāyo paliveṭhentī. Saṃsibbitvā jālasantānakaniyāmena jaṭetvā. Evaṃ aparāparaṃ saṃsibbanena ajjhottharantī. Sabbasākhā heṭṭhā katvā sayaṃ upari ṭhatvā mahābhārabhāvena vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante padāleyya. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānanti sākhāpaṭibaddhaṃ vimānaṃ. Yasmā idha satthārā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā bhūtapubbameva vatthu upamābhāvena āhaṭaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idaṃ pana vimāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
471 贪欲本性厚重:因为无法通过反复观察把它去除,所以它变得很强,属于能压制人的贪欲类型。因贪而生:就是从贪的相状生起的。在所见到的每一个所缘中:就是在所见到的每一种不同的所缘中。执取相:就是执取那作为烦恼生起原因的、从随好细节而来的相;不过,由于对学处的尊重,他并不走上烦恼所依的道路,因此对于和尚与阿阇梨命令的惩罚事务,他照样去做。所以说“然而他绝不违犯”。握手等:就是“喂,你先过来,你所说的和我所说,我们到那边探讨一下”等,以拉手等方式进行,并不是出于悲悯或慈爱的动机。有痴生起:具有厚痴的本性。巴利
471.Bahalarāgasabhāvoti paccavekkhaṇāhi nīharituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya balavā hutvā abhibhavanarāgadhātuko. Rāgajanti rāganimittajātaṃ. Diṭṭhe diṭṭhe ārammaṇeti diṭṭhe diṭṭhe visabhāgārammaṇe. Nimittaṃ gaṇhātīti kilesuppattiyā kāraṇabhūtaṃ anubyañjanaso nimittaṃ gaṇhāti, sikkhāgāravena pana kilesehi nissitaṃ maggaṃ na paṭipajjati, tato eva ācariyupajjhāyehi āṇattaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ karoteva. Tenāha ‘‘na tveva vītikkamaṃ karotī’’ti. Hatthaparāmāsādīnīti – ‘‘ehi tāva tayā vuttaṃ mayā vuttañca amutra gantvā vīmaṃsissāmā’’tiādinā hatthaggahaṇādīni karonto, na karuṇāmettānidānavasena. Mohajātikoti bahalamohasabhāvo.
472 “依业律”是指过去生所成就的、由贪增上等所决定的业律。现在,为了分别说明这贪增上等的情形,开始说“若人”等。其中,“造业时”就是造业的时候。“贪强”:因为那种因缘具足之力,贪变得增盛。“无贪弱”:与贪对立的无贪是微弱的。那么,这些贪与无贪彼此直接对立,怎么能在一个心念刹那中生起呢?其实不应认为“它们在同一个心念刹那中生起”,而是把倾向的时刻和造业的时刻当作同一时机,才这样说。其余情况也同此理。“不能周遍”:是指不能压伏。凡是因“这样美好、这样广大、这样珍贵的东西不能给予他人”等想法,以未曾舍离等方式生起的、与思相应的无贪,并不能真正压伏贪。在嗔与痴没有生起的情况下,只要获得那样的缘,无嗔与无痴就是强有力的。因此,由于贪、嗔、痴强,而无贪、嗔、痴弱,这是前面已经说过的理由,这里再作回顾。“他”:指具有那种情况的人。“以此业”:即用这种有贪等亲依止的善业。“和善者”:就是性格柔和的人。这里用同义语“无嗔”来表达同一个意思。巴利
472.Kammaniyāmenāti purimajātisiddhena lobhussadatādiniyamitena kammaniyāmena. Idāni taṃ lobhussadatādiṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kammāyūhanakkhaṇeti kammakaraṇavelāya. Lobho balavāti tajjāya sāmaggiyā sāmatthiyato lobho adhiko hoti. Alobho mandoti tappaṭipakkho alobho dubbalo hoti. Kathaṃ panete lobhālobhā aññamaññaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ekakkhaṇe pavattanti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘ekakkhaṇe pavattantī’’ti, nikantikkhaṇaṃ pana āyūhanakkhaṇameva katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesu. Pariyādātunti abhibhavituṃ na sakkoti. Yo hi ‘‘evaṃsundaraṃ evaṃvipulaṃ evaṃmahagghañca na sakkā parassa dātu’’ntiādinā amuttacāgatādivasena pavattāya cetanāya sampayutto alobho sammadeva lobhaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Dosamohānaṃ anuppattiyaṃ tādisapaccayalābheneva adosāmohā balavanto. Tasmāti lobhādosāmohānaṃ balavabhāvato alobhadosamohānañca dubbalabhāvatoti vuttameva kāraṇaṃ paccāmasati. Soti taṃsamaṅgī. Tena kammenāti tena lobhādiupanissayavatā kusalakammunā. Sukhasīloti sakhilo. Tamevatthaṃ akkodhanoti pariyāyena vadati.
无贪与无嗔力量弱,无法制伏贪与嗔;但无痴力量强,能够制伏痴。因此应当根据相应情况,按照第一轮所说的方式,理解这里类推的含义。“依照前述方式”,就是遵循先前所说的方式。“凶暴者”就是容易发怒的人。“迟钝者”就是迟钝而愚笨的人。“和善者”就是性情温和的人。巴利
Mandā alobhādosā lobhadose pariyādātuṃ na sakkonti, amoho pana balavā mohaṃ pariyādātuṃ sakkotīti evaṃ yathārahaṃ paṭhamavāre vuttanayeneva atidesattho veditabbo. Purimanayenevāti pubbe vuttanayānusārena. Duṭṭhoti kodhano. Dandhoti mandamañño. Sukhasīlakoti sukhasīlo.
在这里,按贪增上的方式,以及按嗔、痴、贪嗔、贪痴、嗔痴、贪嗔痴增上的方式来说,不善这一边有单独三种、两两组合三种、三重合一种,也就是按贪等增上,不善这边一共有七轮。同样,在善这一边,按无贪等增上,就有十四轮。其中,当经文说到“无贪、嗔、痴强”“无贪、无嗔、痴强”“无贪、嗔、无痴强”时,善这一边的第三、第二、第一轮,其实就已经把以嗔增上、痴增上、嗔痴增上为主的那几轮包含进去了。同样,在不善这一边,当说到“贪、无嗔、无痴强”“贪、嗔、无痴强”“贪、无嗔、痴强”时,不善这一边的第三、第二、第一轮,也已经把以无嗔增上、无痴增上、无嗔无痴增上为主的那几轮包含进去了。这样,把不善和善两边各自三轮都含摄进来之后,实际只显示了八轮。至于那些按两者混合而有的“贪与无贪增上轮”等其他四十九轮,虽然也可以列出来,但因为根本不可能成立,所以没有列出来。因为所谓“在同一个心相续里,不经过中间的不同阶段,却同时贪强而无贪也强”这类说法,是不合理的。这些法的强弱,或者是就对立面来说的,或者是就俱生法来说的。其中,贪因为没有被它的对治法压伏,所以是强;嗔和痴也是这样,因为没有被无嗔、无痴压伏。无贪等则是因为不被贪等所压伏,所以是强。而且,一切法由于同类相制而现起,所以就俱生法来说也有强弱。因此,义注中说:“贪强,无贪弱;无嗔、无痴强,嗔、痴弱。”等等。它们这种弱和强,应当理解为:由于过去的亲依止,以及烦恼长期熏习,所以心性才变成那样。因此又说“由业决定”。其余部分因为已经按前面所说的方式讲过,所以很容易明白。巴利
Ettha ca lobhavasena, dosamoha-lobhadosa-lobhamoha-dosamoha-lobhadosamohavasenāti tayo ekakā, tayo dukā, eko tikoti lobhādiussadavasena akusalapakkhe eva satta vārā, tathā kusalapakkhe alobhādiussadavasenāti cuddasa vārā labbhanti. Tattha alobhadosamohā, alobhādosamohā, alobhadosāmohā balavantoti āgatehi kusalapakkhe tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi dosussadamohussadadosamohussadavārā gahitā eva honti. Tathā akusalapakkhe lobhādosāmohā, lobhadosāmohā, lobhādosamohā balavantoti āgatehi tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi adosussadaamohussadaadosāmohussadavārā gahitā evāti akusalakusalapakkhesu tayo tayo vāre antogadhe katvā aṭṭheva vārā dassitā. Ye pana ubhayasammissatāvasena lobhālobhussadavārādayo apare ekūnapaññāsa vārā kāmaṃ dassetabbā, tesaṃ asambhavato eva na dassitā. Na hi ‘‘ekasmiṃ santāne antarena avatthantaraṃ lobho ca balavā alobho cā’’tiādi yujjati. Paṭipakkhavasena vāpi etesaṃ balavadubbalabhāvo sahajātadhammavasena vā. Tattha lobhassa tāva paṭipakkhavasena anabhibhūtatāya balavabhāvo, tathā dosamohānaṃ adosāmohehi. Alobhādīnaṃ pana lobhādianabhibhavanato. Sabbesañca samānajātiyasamadhibhuyya pavattivasena sahajātadhammato balavabhāvo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.472) – ‘‘lobho balavā, alobho mando. Adosāmohā balavanto, dosamohā mandā’’tiādi, so ca nesaṃ mandabalavabhāvo purimūpanissayato tathā āsayassa paribhāvitatāya veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘kammaniyāmenā’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyamevāti.
《大法受持经》的注释巴利
6. Mahādhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
473 像这样,现在所说的这种状态:他们有对欲的欲求,所以叫“如是欲者”。像这样,他们有欲、乐着、意乐,所以叫“如是意乐者”。“面向”或者“执取之后”,以种种方式前往、接近,这就是意趣,也就是见解。因为见解把应得的事物面向、执为“就是这样”,以种种方式接近它,拿到手里就停住,不放掉。像这样,现在所说的这种状态是他们的意趣,所以叫“如是意趣者”。世尊是他们为了如实证得(这些法)的根本、原因,所以叫“以世尊为根本者”。因此说:“我们确实是依止世尊,才能了知、通达这些法。”
“是我们的法”,这是就他们自己应当证得而言。因为,对应修习之法如实证得的智慧,与证得者相关联,而这些智慧都以正自觉者为根本,不以其他为对象。因此说:“过去由迦叶正自觉者……”等等。世尊是他们的引导者,所以叫“以世尊为导者”。“引导者”,就是对应修习之法,能把所教化的有情心相续引导到那里的人。“调伏者”,就是能将不应修习之法从所化有情的心相续中移除的人。或者,以渐次断除等方式来调伏,所以叫“调伏者”。“随引导者”,就是为了让人达到和远离这两方面——这些法应修习、这些法不应修习——而加以施设的人。因此说:“如实地……”等等。巴利
473. Evaṃ idāni vuccamānākāro kāmo kāmanaṃ icchā etesanti evaṃkāmā. Evaṃ chando chandanaṃ rocanaṃ ajjhāsayo etesanti evaṃchandā. Abhimukhaṃ, abhinivissa vā pakārehi eti upagacchatīti adhippāyo, laddhi. Sā hi laddhabbavatthuṃ abhimukhaṃ ‘‘evameta’’nti abhinivisantī tena tena pakārena upagacchati, hatthagataṃ katvā tiṭṭhati na vissajjeti. Evaṃ vuccamānākāro adhippāyo etesanti evaṃadhippāyā. Bhagavā mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etesaṃ yāthāvato adhigamāyāti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmā’’ti. Amhākaṃdhammāti tehi attanā adhigantabbatāya vuttaṃ. Sevitabbānañhi yāthāvato adhigamañāṇāni adhigacchanakasambandhīni, tāni ca sammāsambuddhamūlakāni anaññavisayattā. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe kassapasambuddhenā’’tiādi. Bhagavā netā tesanti bhagavaṃnettikā. Netāti sevitabbadhamme vineyyasantānaṃ pāpetā. Vinetāti asevitabbadhamme vineyyasantānato apanetā. Tadaṅgavinayādivasena vā vinetā. Anunetāti ime dhammā sevitabbā, ime na sevitabbāti ubhayasampāpanāpanayanatthaṃ paññapetā. Tenāha ‘‘yathāsabhāvato’’tiādi.
“皈依处”的意思是:他们在这里皈投依靠,所以叫皈依处。世尊是这些人的皈依处,所以他们就叫“以世尊为皈依处者”。或者说,“皈依处”是指以通达自性的方式各自趋入;世尊是这些人的皈依处,所以叫“以世尊为皈依处者”。“以通达的方式”,就是依照所应通达的方式来通达。即使嘴上没说,在意义上也就像是在说:“触来了,我世尊叫什么名字?”对于“愿显现”这个词,因为顾及前面的“paṭi”这个音,所以用了宾格形式“bhagavantaṃ”,但它的意义应当按属格来理解。因此注释者说“愿属于世尊的”,也就是“愿成为世尊的一份”。他的意思是:这份属于世尊,也就是开示法;而听闻则是我们的一份。不过有些人把“愿显现”解释为“愿被看见”,也就是被智慧看见,或者被宣说出来。而“愿现起”则是指在智慧面前现起。巴利
Paṭisaranti etthāti paṭisaraṇaṃ, bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarati sabhāvasampaṭivedhavasena paccekamupagacchatīti vā paṭisaraṇaṃ, bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭivedhavasenāti paṭivijjhitabbatāvasena. Asatipi mukhe atthato evaṃ vadanto viya hotīti āha ‘‘phasso āgacchati, ahaṃ bhagavā kiṃ nāmo’’ti. Paṭibhātūti ettha paṭi-saddāpekkhāya ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti upayogavacanaṃ, attho pana sāmivacanavaseneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti paṭibhātūti ca bhagavato bhāgo hotu. Bhagavato hi esa bhāgo, yadidaṃ dhammassa desanā, amhākaṃ pana bhāgo savananti adhippāyo. Keci pana paṭibhātūti padissatūti atthaṃ vadanti, ñāṇena dissatu, desīyatūti vā attho. Upaṭṭhātūti ca ñāṇassa paccupaṭṭhātu.
474 应依止是指:应当以在自己心相续中生起的方式去依靠。因为依靠第三和第四种法的受持,众生的现世和来世成就都会增长。应亲近是同一个意思的另一种说法。或者说,应修习是针对亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意而说的;应亲近则是针对以这些为条件的布施等福德法。巴利
474.Nissayitabbeti attano santāne uppādanavasena apassayitabbe. Tatiyacatutthadhammasamādānāni hi apassāya sattānaṃ etarahi āyatiñca sampattiyo abhivaḍḍhanti. Bhajitabbeti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sevitabbeti vā sappurisupassayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikāre sandhāyāha. Bhajitabbeti tappaccaye dānādipuññadhamme.
475 “以逆序的方式”:先显示杂染法,之后再显示清净法,这是导师说法的次第,就像“松开左手,抓住右手”那样,是以逆序的方式。在前两种法的受持中确实如此,但在后两种中,纲目则是按顺序安立的。“依如法之味”:是指应断的法与能断的法,都依它们各自的如实自性。自性之所以被称为“味”,是因为它应当被如实品尝、如实了知。先显示应断的法,紧接着显示“这些法由这些法所断除”,这就是开示的次第。“受持”就是执取,是在自身相续中生起。巴利
475.Uppaṭipāṭiākārenāti paṭhamaṃ saṃkilesadhamme dassetvā pacchā vodānadhammadassanaṃ satthu desanāpaṭipāṭi, yathā – ‘‘vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14), tathā uppaṭipāṭipakārena, sā ca kho purimesu dvīsu dhammasamādānesu , pacchimesu pana paṭipāṭiyāva mātikā paṭṭhapitā. Yathādhammarasenevāti pahātabbapahāyakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāveneva. Sabhāvo hi yāthāvato rasitabbato jānitabbato ‘‘raso’’ti vuccati. Paṭhamaṃ pahātabbadhamme dassetvā tadanantaraṃ ‘‘ime dhammā etehi pahīyantī’’ti pahāyakadhammadassanaṃ desanānupubbī. Gahaṇaṃ ādiyanaṃ attano santāne uppādanaṃ.
478 478. 当因杖罚等而恐惧的人靠近时,以及行邪行后如此离开时,以前后思的力量,邪行成为苦受;同样,对被嫉妒、轻蔑等所逼迫的人,以后思的力量,也是如此。对贪欲和邪见等,也应随其相应而了知。所谓“三思”,是指前思、后思和决志思。不与取、妄语、离间语、杂秽语这四种的决志思,或与乐相应,或与舍相应——这个道理在这里因为不是重点,所以没有举出。这里说“只有忧才是苦”,是考虑到前分和后分的思在这里也都是与忧俱起的。至于不亲近的情况,则是针对“若作遍求”等语而说的。正是由此表明:邪行、贪欲、邪见的前分和后分的思是亲近的,与决志思同类,应当这样理解。“遍求”,是指在邪行等中,对将要违犯的对象——如花鬘、香料等——的寻求;在杀生等中,对将要杀害的对象——如武器等——的寻求。即使不费力,他们寻求也能成功,所以说“也可以”,这是带着疑惑的语气说的。巴利
478. Vadhadaṇḍādīhi bhītassa upasaṅkamane, micchā caritvā tathā apagamane ca pubbāparacetanānaṃ vasena micchācāro dukkhavedano hoti, tathā issānindādīhi upaddutassa aparacetanāvasena, evaṃ abhijjhāmicchādiṭṭhīsupi yathārahaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tissannampi cetanānanti pubbāparasanniṭṭhāpakacetanānaṃ. Adinnādānaṃ musāvādo pisuṇavācā samphappalāpoti imesaṃ catunnaṃ sanniṭṭhāpakacetanānaṃ sukhasampayuttā vā upekkhāsampayuttā vāti ayaṃ nayo idha adhikatattā na uddhaṭo. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti idaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanāpi cettha āsannā domanassasahagatā eva hontīti katvā vuttaṃ. Anāsannā pana sandhāya ‘‘pariyeṭṭhiṃ vā āpajjantassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Teneva micchācārābhijjhāmicchādiṭṭhīnaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanā āsannā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāgatikāvāti dassitaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariyeṭṭhinti micchācārādīsu vītikkamitabbavatthumālāgandhādipariyesanaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsu māretabbavatthuāvudhādipariyesanaṃ āpajjantassa. Akicchenapi tesaṃ pariyesanaṃ sambhavatīti ‘‘vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati.
479 说“成为乐受”,意思是也会成为乐受。那些思也可能不是乐受,所以说“也会成为乐受”,这是带有保留意味的说法。这里说“唯有喜才是乐”,是就前分和后分的思也都只与喜相应这一点来说的。而这是就除邪行之外的六种情况而言。至于邪行的前分和后分,则说“身体的乐也可以”,这也是带有保留意味的说法。巴利
479.Sukhavedanā hontīti sukhavedanāpi hontīti adhippāyo. Tāsaṃ cetanānaṃ asukhavedanatāpi labbhatīti ‘‘sukhavedanāpi hontiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkavacanaṃ. Somanassameva cettha sukhanti idaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanāpi somanassasahagatā eva hontīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tañca kho micchācāravajjānaṃ channaṃ vasena. Micchācārassa pana pubbāparabhāgassa vasena ‘‘kāyikaṃ sukhampi vaṭṭatiyevāti sāsaṅkavacanaṃ.
480 由于嗔怒所生的热恼,也可能有身体的苦,基于这个意思,所以说“他即使执取时也是苦的”。或者这是只就心的苦来说的,为了显示它一再地生起,所以说“苦、忧”。巴利
480. Dosajapariḷāhavasenassa siyā kāyikampi dukkhanti adhippāyena ‘‘so gaṇhantopi dukkhito’’ti vuttaṃ. Cetodukkhameva vā sandhāya tassa aparāparuppattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘dukkhito domanassito’’ti vuttaṃ.
481 “在十句之中”,是指在十个部分里,或者在十个句子里。与舍相应也是可能存在的,所以这里说“必然与乐相应”是一种有所保留的说法。对于远离杀生的人,由于以远离杀生等为缘,他的身体也可能没有疲惫和热恼,因此也可能生起身体的感受;所以在说“连同乐一起……”这里,身乐也是可以的。巴利
481.Dasasupipadesūti dasasupi koṭṭhāsesu, vākyesu vā. Upekkhāsampayuttatāpi sambhavatīti ‘‘sukhasampayuttā hontiyevā’’ti idha sāsaṅkavacanaṃ. Pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassa kāyopi siyā vigatadarathapariḷāhoti pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādipaccayā kāyikapaṭisaṃvedanāpi sambhavatīti sahāpi sukhenāti ettha kāyiyasukhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
482 苦味葫芦:是指吃过之后会让人发疯等,所以味道低劣苦涩的葫芦。因为味道不可意,果实也不可意,所以不会让人喜欢。巴利
482.Tittakālābūti upabhuttassa ummādādipāpanena kucchitatittakaraso alābu. Na ruccissati aniṭṭharasatāya aniṭṭhaphalatāya ca.
483 显示味道,就是在呈现味道、说明味道。巴利
483.Rasaṃ detīti rasaṃ dasseti vibhāveti.
484 腐臭尿:就是有腐败臭味的尿。新鲜尿:指像水流一样喷泻下来时是热的,因此说它是上面的尿。因为尿从尿道排出时,依靠身体的温热而变热。巴利
484.Pūtimuttanti pūtisabhāvamuttaṃ. Taruṇanti dhārāvasena nipatantaṃ hutvā uṇhaṃ. Tenassa uparimuttatamāha. Muttañhi passāvamaggato muccamānaṃ kāyusmāvasena uṇhaṃ hoti.
485 混杂着肛瘘的血流出来,意思是:由于伴随肛瘘病的出血,血在渗流。接着把“混杂着胆汁的血流出来”这一句连起来理解。巴利
485.Yaṃ bhagandarasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandatīti bhagandarabyādhisahitāya lohitapakkhandatāya vasena yaṃ lohitaṃ vissavati. Pittasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandatīti ānetvā sambandho.
486 Ubbiddheti意思是远处。因为云、雾等污浊去除后,虚空看起来就像高耸、像遥远一样。因此说成了远处。陷入黑暗本身就是到达黑暗,就像在粪中、在尿中那样。而照耀、炽然、光辉,这是第四种法受持,是通过分别善业道而分别显示出来的。巴利
486.Ubbiddheti dūre. Abbhamahikādiupakkilesavigamena hi ākāsaṃ uttuṅgaṃ viya dūraṃ viya ca khāyati. Tenāha ‘‘dūrībhūte’’ti. Tamaṃyeva tamagataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’nti (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) yathā. Bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate ca idaṃ catutthaṃ dhammasamādānaṃ vibhajantena kusalakammapathassa vibhajitvā dassitattā.
甜根树就是那棵Saṅgara树。所谓“以sarabhañña的方式”,是指不分析含义,只按词句逐词念诵。“Osārentassa”就是发声念出的人。“Sadda”就是念诵的声音。那位不想透露自己所证殊胜境界的天神,就在那里消失了。“那一天”是指世尊说法的当天。这样一来,因为这部经是这位天神自己证得殊胜境界的因缘标志,所以这位天神喜爱这部经。剩下的内容都很容易理解。巴利
Saṅgararukkho kandamādasapova. Sarabhaññavasenāti atthaṃ avibhajitvā padaso sarabhaññavasena. Osārentassāti uccārentassa. Saddeti osāraṇasadde. Adhigatavisesaṃ anārocetukāmā devatā tattheva antaradhāyi. Taṃ divasanti satthārā desitadivase. Iti attano visesādhigamanimittatāya ayaṃ devatā imaṃ suttaṃ piyāyati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
7. 《审察者经》的注释巴利
7. Vīmaṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā
487 “审察义利者”,是指能了解自利、他利等各种利益的人。“审察诸行者”,是指能从有为法的自相、共相,或从处等分类来审察的人。“审察导师者”,是指这样考察导师的人:“所谓导师,从功德来说是这样这样的。”“审察者”,就是审查者。依有贪、无贪等类别来判定心,这叫作“心路”,所以这里说“心的辨别”。因为获得心路智的人能了知他人生起的心:“这个心是接着这个之后生起的,那个心是接着那个之后生起的”,所以说“心路,即心的转起”。“路”这个词也有“机会”的意思,比如“阿难,今天是谁教诫比丘尼的机会?”等语句中就是这样。也有写成“心行”的读法,意思是心的转起。“为了如是了知”,就是为了按照接下来所说的方式去审察。巴利
487.Atthavīmaṃsakoti attatthaparatthādiatthavijānanako. Saṅkhāravīmaṃsakoti saṅkhatadhamme salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato vā āyatanādivibhāgato ca vīmaṃsako. Satthuvīmaṃsakoti ‘‘satthā nāma guṇato ediso ediso cā’’ti satthu upaparikkhako. Vīmaṃsakoti vicārako. Yaṃ cetaso sarāgādivibhāgato paricchindanaṃ, taṃ cetopariyāyo. Tenāha ‘‘cittapariccheda’’nti. Yasmā cetopariyāyañāṇalābhī – ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ito paraṃ pavattaṃ idamito para’’nti parassa cittuppattiṃ pajānāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘cetopariyāyanti cittavāra’’nti. Vāratthepi hi pariyāya-saddo hoti – ‘‘kassa nu kho, ānanda, pariyāyo ajja bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398). Cittacārantipi pāṭho, cittapavattinti attho. Evaṃ vijānanatthāyāti idāni vuccamānākārena vīmaṃsanatthāya.
488 “善友依止”,说的是以善友为名的、对梵行生活来说强有力的依靠。
“一半靠自己的威力”,意思是:这个人所修习的梵行,其中一半的部分,是靠他自己那能让解脱成熟的法之力而成就的。
“一半靠善友的威力”,意思是:剩下那一半,则是靠他所依止而修梵行的善友之教导的威力才得以成就。这就是“成就”的意思。
这个道理是世间共许的。世间人确实这样说——巴利
488.Kalyāṇamittūpanissayanti kalyāṇamittasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyavāsassa balavasannissayaṃ. Upaḍḍhaṃ attano ānubhāvenāti iminā puggalena sampādiyamānassa brahmacariyassa upaḍḍhabhāgamattaṃ attano vimuttiparipācakadhammānubhāvena sijjhati. Upaḍḍhaṃ kalyāṇamittānubhāvenāti itaro pana upaḍḍhabhāgo yaṃ nissāya brahmacariyaṃ vussati, tassa kalyāṇamittassa upadesānubhāvena hoti, sijjhatīti attho. Lokasiddho eva ayamattho. Lokiyā hi –
“ 四分之一由老师成就,四分之一靠他自己的威力。
那门学问的侍奉算是一分,这一分也会按时节成熟。”巴利
‘‘Pādo siddho ācariyā, pādo hissānubhāvato; Taṃvijjāsevakā pādo, pādo kālena paccatī’’ti. –
他们说。所谓“以自己的法性”,是指以自己的本性;这里说的是以智慧。所谓“善友性”,是指他有良善、美好、贤善的朋友,所以叫“善友”;这种状态就是善友性,也就是具有善友的特质。与具足戒等功德的善人交往,叫做“善伴性”。对这些善人,心和身都倾向、俯向、朝向他们的状态,叫做“善倾注性”。所谓“莫如此”,意思是不要这样说,不要说“梵行的一半”。这里“以此也”是指现在所说的这个;“以此理由”是凭这个原因。在“tadaminā”这个词里,“nti”只是语气助词,“da”是连音字母,“i”音变成“a”音后加以说明。所谓“以此也”,是指现在所说的这个。所谓“理由”,是指原因。现在为了说明这个原因,说了“因为我”等语。巴利
Vadanti. Attano dhammatāyāti attano sabhāvena, ñāṇenāti attho. Kalyāṇamittatāti kalyāṇo bhadro sundaro mitto etassāti kalyāṇamitto, tassa bhāvo kalyāṇamittatā, kalyāṇamittavantatā. Sīlādiguṇasampannehi kalyāṇapuggaleheva ayanaṃ pavatti kalyāṇasahāyatā. Tesu eva cittena ceva kāyena ca ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvena pavatti kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Māhevanti evaṃ mā āha, ‘‘upaḍḍhaṃ brahmacariyassā’’ti mā kathehīti attho. Tadamināti ettha nti nipātamattaṃ da-kāro padasandhikaro i-kārassa a-kāraṃ katvā niddeso. Imināpīti idāni vuccamānenapīti attho. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,其他经里也说明亲近善友本身就是殊胜之处,所以他说“即使是在讲比丘们外在条件的圆满时”等话。其中,“能令解脱成熟之法”是指能使解脱,也就是阿拉汉果成熟的法。“缘”是指生病时用的药物资具。“大族出身”是指出身于高贵的家族。巴利
Yathā cettha, aññesupi suttesu kalyāṇamittupanissayameva visesoti dassento ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bāhiraṅgasampattiṃ kathentopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha vimuttiparipācaniyadhammeti vimuttiyā arahattassa paripācakadhamme. Paccayeti gilānapaccayabhesajje. Mahājaccoti mahākulīno.
身体的行为,是指前进、后退等由正念和正知守护的日常举动。所谓“审察者”,就是观察者、探究者。所谓“眼所识”,是因为它要通过眼门才能被认知,所以叫这个名字。“耳所识”也是同样的道理。所谓“染污”,意思是被贪等烦恼法所逼迫、所损害、所败坏、所玷污。而这些法又和那些染污法在一起,所以说它们“与烦恼相应”。如果它们不是眼和耳所识的对象,那巴利经文里为什么那样说呢?于是解释说“然而就像……”等等。其实身业和语业也叫染污,因为它们是由染污心产生的。以某物为因的事物,也可以用那个因的名称来称呼它,比如“痰是糖”。不过,出于“别让人知道我这不恰当的行为”这种想法而遮掩,并不等于就不会被发现。“尊者,我们绝不会以任何事责备世尊”,说了这话之后,为了表明确实没有可责备之处,便说道“因为世尊……”等语。对于没有修习圣道的人,才可能有可责备之处,对于已修习圣道的人则没有。这位优多罗学童心想:“我连佛陀也要责备一番再走”,于是就跟着。他是在世尊大出离那天,因为世尊没有守住自己说过的话而这样想的。魔罗找不到任何过失,便这样说道:巴利
Kāyiko samācāroti abhikkamapaṭikkamādiko satisampajaññaparikkhato pākatiko ca. Vīmaṃsakassa upaparikkhakassa. Cakkhuviññeyyo nāma cakkhudvārānusārena viññātabbattā. Sotaviññeyyoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saṃkiliṭṭhāti rāgādisaṃkilesadhammehi vibādhitā, upatāpitā vidūsitā malīnā cāti attho. Te pana tehi samannāgatā hontīti āha ‘‘kilesasampayuttā’’ti. Yadi na cakkhusotaviññeyyā, pāḷiyaṃ kathaṃ tathā vuttāti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Kāyavacīsamācārāpisaṃkiliṭṭhāyeva nāma saṃkiliṭṭhacittasamuṭṭhānato. Bhavati hi taṃhetukepi tadupacāro yathā ‘‘semho guḷo’’ti. ‘‘Mā me idaṃ asāruppaṃ paro aññāsī’’ti pana paṭicchannatāya na na upalabbhanti. ‘‘Na kho mayaṃ, bhante, bhagavato kiñci garahāmā’’ti vatvā garahitabbābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Abhāvitamaggassa hi garahitabbatā nāma siyā, na bhāvitamaggassa. Esa uttaro māṇavo ‘‘buddhampi garahitvā pakkamissāmī’’ti katvā anubandhi. Evaṃ cintesi mahābhinikkhamanadivase attano vacane aṭṭhitattā. Kiñci vajjaṃ apassanto māro evamāha –
“ 整整七年,我步步紧跟世尊,
我未能找到具足正念的正觉者的可乘之机。”巴利
‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
有时是黑,有时是白:对于已经按照所受持的正行道去实行,却没法让它保持清净地持续下去的人,有时候身行等是黑而不清净的,有时候是白而清净的,就这样隔一阵子交替混杂,处于混杂状态。无烦恼:就是没有随烦恼,不被烦恼染污。巴利
Kāle kaṇhā, kāle sukkāti yathāsamādinnaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ parisuddhaṃ katvā pavattetuṃ asakkontassa kadāci kaṇhā aparisuddhā kāyasamācārādayo, kadāci sukkā parisuddhāti evaṃ antarantarā byāmissavasena vomissakā. Nikkilesāti nirupakkilesā anupakkiliṭṭhā.
无过失,因为远离了过失。长夜,是表示极长久相续的用语。正入者,指正确地进入、成为具足。因此说具足。为了掩盖自己所做的不相应之事,而装作住在阿兰若的人。对他的尊崇,指人们以丰厚的供养和恭敬来尊崇他。极度骄慢,指因为受到人们这样的尊重,而变得极为骄傲自大。巴利
Anavajjaṃ vajjarahitattā. Dīgharattanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Samāpannoti sammā āpanno samaṅgībhūto. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Attanā katassa asāruppassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ āraññakoviya hutvā. Tassa parihāranti uḷārehi pūjāsakkārehi manussehi tassa parihariyamānataṃ. Atidappitoti evaṃ manussānaṃ sambhāvanāya ativiya datto gabbito.
他并不是短暂成就的,这一点他如实了知。为什么呢?因为戒必须经过长时间才能了知,不是短时间内就能了知的。现在,为了显示如来在多生以来的长期熏习中早已成就了这种善法,而且这对他来说极其稀有,所以说了“这并不稀奇”等话。巴利
Na ittarasamāpannoti jānāti. Kasmā? Sīlaṃ nāma dīghena addhunā jānitabbaṃ, na ittarena. Idāni anekajātisamudācāravasena tathāgato imaṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ dīgharattaṃ samāpanno, tañcassa ativiya acchariyanti dassetuṃ ‘‘anacchariyaṃ ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在“阿兰若村”这里,指的是阿兰若地区里的一个小村庄。为了说明他们每天都不间断地进村乞食,所以经文说“行乞食”。“饮”这个说法也是同样的道理。因为离海很远,所以盐很难得到。巴利
Araññagāmaketi araññapadese ekasmiṃ khuddakagāme. Tattha nesaṃ divase divase piṇḍāya caraṇassa avicchinnataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘piṇḍāya carantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pivantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dullabhaloṇo hoti samuddassa dūratāya.
据说,那时候毗提诃国有一万六千个大村庄。因此说:“舍弃了一万六千个圆满的村庄。”现在,你为何用“你如今在囤积”这话来指责我呢?他想提起此事,却不把那个意思揭示出来,只是说:“盐……等等,不要做了。”犍陀罗想说明他的用意,就说道:“毗提诃仙人,我做了什么吗?”巴利
Tadā kira videharaṭṭhe soḷasa gāmasahassāni mahantāneva. Tenāha – ‘‘hitvā gāmasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni soḷasā’’ti. Idāni kasmā ‘‘sannidhiṃ dāni kubbasī’’ti maṃ ghaṭṭethāti vatthukāmo taṃ anāvikatvā ‘‘loṇa…pe… na karothā’’ti āha. Gandhāro tassādhippāyaṃ vibhāvetukāmo ‘‘kiṃ mayā kataṃ vedehīsī’’ti āha.
另一位为了说明自己的意图,说出以“舍弃”开头的偈颂。另一位则说出以“我说法”开头的偈颂——他们之间所有的问答都是偈颂。其中,“你教训”意思是你像在逼迫一样地教导。“恶不沾染”,是因为心没有扰动。“有大义”是指带来巨大的利益。“若是他没有自己的智慧”等,是毗提诃智者如理省察的表现:“老师站在为我利益着想的位置上,只说正法。”因此说“然而,如是说已”等。巴利
Itaro attano adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘hitvā’’ti gāthamāha. Itaro ‘‘dhammaṃ bhaṇāmī’’ti gāthanti evaṃ sabbāpi nesaṃ vacanapaṭivacanagāthā. Tattha pasāsasīti ghaṭṭento viya anusāsasi. Na pāpamupalimpati cittappakopābhāvato. Mahatthiyanti mahāatthasaṃhitaṃ. No ce assa sakā buddhītiādi vedehaisino – ‘‘ācariyo mama hitesitāya ṭhatvā dhammaṃ eva bhaṇatī’’ti yoniso ummujjanākāradassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evañca pana vatvā’’tiādi.
所谓“知名”,就是在世间被人知道、出名,这就叫“知名者”;知名者的状态,就是“知名性”。所谓“已进入”,就是已经进入、已经到达。用“知名性”这个说法,是为了说明名声远播,所以说“名声和眷属的成就”。究竟是为了什么、有什么目的?“这里面有什么过失?”——这就是要表达的意思。巴利
‘‘Ñattā’’ti loke ñāyati vissutoti ñāto, ñātassa bhāvo ñattaṃ. Ajjhāpannoti upagato. Ñatta-ggahaṇena patthaṭayasatā vibhāvitāti āha ‘‘yasañca parivārasampatti’’nti. Kinti kiṃpayojanaṃ, ko ettha dosoti adhippāyo.
在那里,他到处去践踏别人:因为陶醉于名声和眷属,变得骄慢,无论在村落、寺院、僻静无人处,还是在大众当中,都去触碰、冲撞其他比丘,心里想着“我的脚踩到了别人脚踩过的地方”,因为不愿踩到,就像用脚尖点地走路一样。低伏:因为谦卑柔顺而低伏,不浮躁、不僵硬。无所执着的状态:他观察到“出家的人应当具备无所执着的智慧和平等摄持的志向”,于是安住在无所执着中。得利时也如此,不得利时也如此:就像没有得到利养的时候一样,得到利养的时候也同样如此,这就是“平等一如”。有名声、有大眷属的时候,也是如此。巴利
Tattha tattha vijjhantoti yasamadena parivāramadena ca matto hutvā gāmepi vihārepi janavivittepi saṅghamajjhepi aññe bhikkhū ghaṭṭento ‘‘mayhaṃ nāma pādā itaresaṃ pādaphusanaṭṭhānaṃ phusantī’’ti aphusitukāmatāya aggapādena bhūmiṃ phusanto viya carati. Onamatīti nivātavuttitāya avanamati anuddhato atthaddho hoti. Akiñcanabhāvanti ‘‘pabbajitena nāma akiñcanañāṇena samapariggahena bhavitabba’’nti akiñcanajjhāsayaṃ paṭiavekkhitvā. Lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādīti yathā alābhakāle lābhassa laddhakālepi tathevāti tādī ekasadiso. Yase satipi mahāparivārakālepi.
成为无畏者而止息:因为成了无畏者,由于恐惧根本不存在,所以应当止息;又因为恐惧的根源已被断除,所以是止息者。而且这不是只在一段时间里如此,而是究竟彻底地止息,所以是彻底止息。或者说,是观察了可畏惧的事物之后,由于对它的恐惧而止息。烦恼本身就是可畏惧的,所以叫烦恼怖畏。其余的词语也应当按同样的方式理解。七有学:七有学也已是因怖畏而止息者,更何况凡夫呢——这就是这里要表达的意思。巴利
Abhayo hutvā uparatoti nibbhayo hutvā bhayassa abhāveneva oramitabbato uparato bhayahetūnaṃ pahīnattā. Tañca kho na katipayakālaṃ, atha kho accantameva uparatoti accantūparato. Atha kho bhāyitabbavatthuṃ avekkhitvā tato bhayena uparato. Kilesā eva bhāyitabbato kilesabhayaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Satta sekkhāti satta sekkhāpi bhayūparatā, pageva puthujjanoti adhippāyo.
露地床板的意思是:像露地卧榻一样的板座。依止就是依靠,把它作为依靠。两人中间有一块露地床板,那位站在门口观看的常住比丘没有看见。以不自制的方式,就是并非以收敛防护的方式。他心想“他因为怕我,大概钻到床底下去了”,于是往床下看。他清了清嗓子说:“出去的时候别骂人,别造下罪过。”不能忍受:长老即使看到了那样的神通情形,也还是气得直发抖,克制不住自己的嗔怒,无法安忍。巴利
Thaṇḍilapīṭhakanti thaṇḍilamañcasadisaṃ pīṭhakanti attho. Nissāyāti apassāya taṃ apassāyaṃ katvā. Dvinnaṃ majjhe thaṇḍilapīṭhakā dvāre ṭhatvā olokentassa nevāsikabhikkhussa na paññāyi. Asaññatanīhārenāti na saññatākārena. ‘‘Maṃ bhāyanto heṭṭhāmañcaṃ paviṭṭho bhavissatī’’ti heṭṭhāmañcaṃ oloketvā. Ukkāsi ‘‘bahi gacchanto akkositvā mā apuññaṃ pasavī’’ti. Adhivāsetunti tādisaṃ iddhānabhāvaṃ disvāpi paṭapaṭāyanto attano kodhaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto.
因为贪的彻底灭尽,所以才是离贪的。不是靠反复思察的力量去压制贪的现行才成为离贪的。按照上面所说的方式,说明了身行等杂染和违犯都不存在。戒行的清净,因为长期反复串习而为人所知,即使与人共处也不被污染。为了让人了解如来具有“无所畏惧而止息”的特质,想要表达的意义通过这些相状被显示出来,所以叫“相状”,它们是令这个意义生起的根据和原因。而这些相状又因为能按照自己所认可的意义来使人了解,所以被称为能知的相状。世尊为了指出它们是那些意义的根本原因,也是比知智,问道:“那么,尊者的相状是什么?随由是什么?”为了阐明这个含义,注释师说:“相状就是原因,随由就是随觉之智。”就像在世间,通过看见的烟,便能推知、比知那没看见的火。同样,一位审察的比丘这样了知:世尊对各个住处中修行好和修行差的人,都表现出平等一如,由此推知、比知他那“无所畏惧而止息”的性质;又因为导师对修行好和修行差的人,既不称扬推崇也不呵责贬斥,宣说无颠倒的法,由此推知、比知他的正自觉性以及僧团的善修行。这样了知之后,他如实知道三件事的功德:如来因处处离贪而无所畏惧、止息,因为凡是离贪的人,就不会因那件事看到任何恐怖,就像梵天神不会对欲界的相状生起恐惧一样;正自觉的世尊宣说无颠倒的法;法是善说的,因为能导向彻底的出离;僧团是善修行的,因为具有不坏净信。巴利
Khayenevāti rāgassa accantakkhayeneva vītarāgattā. Na paṭisaṅkhāya vāretvāti na paṭisaṅkhānabalena rāgapariyuṭṭhānaṃ nivāretvā vītarāgattā. Evaṃ vuttappakārena. Kāyasamācārādīnaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhānaṃ vītikkamiyānañca abhāvaṃ ācārassa vodānaṃ cirakālasamāciṇṇatāya ñātassa sahitabhāvepi anupakkiliṭṭhatāya abhayūparatabhāvasamannesanāya ākarīyati ñāpetuṃ icchito attho pakārato ñāpīyati etehīti ākārā, upapattisādhanakāraṇāni. Tāni pana yasmā attano yathānumatassa atthassa ñāpakabhāvena vavatthīyanti, tasmā tāni tesaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtāni anumānañāṇāni ca dassento bhagavā – ‘‘ke panāyasmato ākārā ke anvayā’’ti avocāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ākārāti kāraṇāni, anvayāti anubuddhiyo’’ti āha. Yathā hi loke diṭṭhena dhūmena adiṭṭhaṃ aggiṃ anveti anumānato jānāti, evaṃ vīmaṃsako bhikkhu – ‘‘bhagavā ekekavihāresu suppaṭipannesu duppaṭipannesu ca yathā ekasadisatādassanena abhayūparatataṃ anveti anumānato jānāti, suppaṭipannaduppaṭipannapuggalesu anussādanānapasādanappattāya satthu aviparītadhammadesanatāya sammāsambuddhataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca anveti anumānato jānāti, evaṃ jānanto ca abhayūparato tathāgato sabbadhi vītarāgattā, yo yattha vītarāgo, na so tannimittaṃ kiñci bhayaṃ passati seyyathāpi brahmā kāmabhavanimittaṃ, tathā sammāsambuddho bhagavā aviparītadhammadesanattā, svākhāto dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā, suppaṭipanno saṅgho aveccappasannattā’’ti vatthuttayaṃ guṇato yāthāvato jānāti.
“以众结缚”是指:被“这是我的同住比丘、这是我的弟子”这种对徒众的牵挂——也就是所谓的“结缚”——所系缚、所驱使。“以此彼行道”是指:对被称为“善去、恶去”的善行道和恶行道。“称扬”是指:依功德而推崇抬高。“贬斥”是指:轻蔑指责。“于两方面依居家而作”这句话的意思是:像“诸比丘,玛哈咖佳亚那是贤智者”这样,为了策励他人行于正行道而依功德称扬,以及为了将来防护而对所犯过失如法呵责,这两方面世尊都没有遮止。巴利
Gaṇabandhanenāti ‘‘mama saddhivihārikā mama antevāsikā’’ti evaṃ gaṇe apekkhāsaṅkhātena bandhanena baddhā payuttā. Tāya tāya paṭipattiyāti ‘‘sugatā duggatā’’ti vuttāya suppaṭipattiyā duppaṭipattiyā ca. Ussādanāti guṇavasena ukkaṃsanā. Apasādanāti hīḷanā. Ubhayattha gehassitavasenāti iminā sammāpaṭipattiyā paresaṃ uyyojanatthaṃ – ‘‘paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.205; 3.285, 322) guṇato ukkaṃsanampi āyatiṃ saṃvarāya yathāparādhaṃ garahaṇampi na nivāreti.
489 489. 审察者的意趣也是依审察而展开的。根本审察者之所以如此,是因为他主张有因。缚结审察者因为凭传闻之故,所以经中说“仅凭他人的话就下了结论”。因此世尊说:“在不了知他人心之运作的情况下。”只有如来才应当被反问——用这句话,他把先前在共许层面上所说的比知推到了最高点来说。因为这种比知确实达到了极致:即对一切智者的话无有欺诳,从总体上比知那非凡夫行境的义理。义理有三种:有些是现量所成就的,比如色等诸法那种各人自内证知、无法用言语指陈的样貌;有些是比量所成就的,即依瓶等已被公认的缘起关系,来论证声等诸法的无常等样貌;有些是信可所成就的,即大多数人完全未曾亲见的、属于信仰领域的他世与涅槃等。在这当中,如果某位导师的话,在现量所成就的义理和比量所成就的义理上,都以其无颠倒的运作而无有欺诳,那么凭他的话,信可乐的义理便能成就;而导师的功德,由于毕竟存在,也大体上就是这种可信可乐的性质。巴利
489. Vīmaṃsakassapi adhippāyo vīmaṃsanavasena pavatto. Mūlavīmaṃsako hetuvāditāya. Gaṇṭhivīmaṃsakassa anussutibhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṅgato’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘parassa cetopariyāyaṃ ajānantenā’’ti. Tathāgatova paṭipucchitabboti iminā pubbe sādhāraṇato vuttaṃ anumānaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā vadati. Ukkaṃsagatañhetaṃ anumānaṃ, yadidaṃ sabbaññuvacanaṃ avisaṃvādaṃ sāmaññato aputhujjanagocarassa atthassa anumānato. Tividho hi attho, koci paccakkhasiddho, yo rūpādidhammānaṃ paccattavedaniyo aniddisitabbākāro. Koci anumānasiddho, yo ghaṭādīsu pasiddhena paccayāyattabhāvena sādhiyamāno saddādīnaṃ aniccatādiākāro. Koci okappanasiddho, yo pacurajanassa accantamadiṭṭho saddhāvisayo paralokanibbānādi. Tattha yassa satthuno vacanaṃ paccakkhasiddhe anumānasiddhe ca atthe na visaṃvādeti aviparītappavattiyā, tassa vacanena saddheyyatthasiddhi, saddheyyarūpā eva ca yebhuyyena satthuguṇā accantasambhavato.
这就是我的行径:也就是被称为活命第八戒的、属于我的这点微少功德,这就是那位不了知他心的审察比丘了知我的途径、了知我的道路。这就是他的行境:这就是他对我的全部行境,仅此而已,不超出这个范围。因为确实在《梵网经》中,世尊也只开示了活命第八戒。此道即仅此之道。如果有人安立于戒,却以“这是我的”或“我将以此戒成为天人、成为某位天人”这样的渴爱去执取它,那么由于他不能超越渴爱,便成为殊胜分的非因、通达分的非因,这个人就叫做“与彼同一”。因此说“不与彼同一,不伴有渴爱”等等。巴利
Esa mayhaṃ pathoti yvāyaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlasaṅkhāto mayhaṃ oramattako guṇo, esa aparacittaviduno vīmaṃsakassa bhikkhuno mama jānanapatho jānanamaggo. Esa gocaroti eso ettako eva tassa mayi gocaro, na ito paraṃ. Tathā hi brahmajālepi (dī. ni. 1.7) bhagavatā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlameva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Etāpāthoti ettakāpātho. Yo sīle patiṭṭhito ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti, ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti taṇhāya parāmasanto, tassa visesabhāgiyatāya, nibbedhabhāgiyatāya vā akāraṇena taṇhaṃ anativattanato so tammayo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘na tammayo na sataṇho’’tiādi.
世尊宣说所闻之法时,使所闻一层比一层更殊胜,而那种殊胜又依次越来越精妙,所以就把法说成越来越上、越来越妙。有对立面,是说以应断与能断的关系而具有对治。破斥黑分而说白分:这些法类叫作黑分,能断除它的叫作白分,这样就是破斥黑分而说白分。破斥白分而说黑分:这里也是同样的道理,不过在这里应当说“以此应断彼”。有功用、有勤勇:就是有所作为。对于造作性的心来说,在相续中无明、渴爱、慢等尚未断除时,它们就有功用、有勤勇,意思是它们具有异熟的法性。于彼所宣说的法中:在那位导师所宣说的世间法与出世间法中,以殊胜的道智现证其中一分,即称为道、果、涅槃的证得法之后。以证得法,即道:通过作为证得法的道。于教法中:对于教说中所安立的、属于前行部分的菩提分法,他得出结论:“确实,我依这条道路将从老死中解脱。”先前以凡夫的信心就已经净信,从此以后更加增上地对导师生起净信:“那位无颠倒说法的正自觉者,就是世尊。”由于能导出:因为法确实能从轮回之苦中导出。弯曲等:以“等”字涵盖其他一切不合正理的说法,收摄一切过失。巴利
Sutassa uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena uttaruttarañceva tassa ca visesassa anukkamena paṇītatarabhāvato paṇītatarañca katvā deseti. Savipakkhanti pahātabbapahāyakabhāvena sappaṭipakkhaṃ. Kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkanti idaṃ dhammajātaṃ kaṇhaṃ nāma, imassa pahāyakaṃ idaṃ sukkaṃ nāmāti evaṃ kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkaṃ. Sukkaṃ paṭibāhitvā kaṇhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idha pana ‘‘iminā pahātabba’’nti vattabbaṃ. Saussāhanti sabyāpāraṃ. Kiriyamayacittānañhi anupacchinnāvijjātaṇhāmānādike santāne sabyāpāratā saussāhatā, savipākadhammatāti attho. Tasmiṃ desite dhammeti tasmiṃ satthārā desite lokiyalokuttaradhamme. Ekaccaṃ ekadesabhūtaṃ maggaphalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ abhiññāya abhivisiṭṭhāya maggapaññāya jānitvā. Paṭivedhadhammena maggena. Desanādhammeti desanāruḷhe pubbabhāgiye bodhipakkhiyadhamme niṭṭhaṃ gacchati – ‘‘addhā imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmī’’ti. Pubbe pothujjanikasaddhāyapi pasanno, tato bhiyyosomattāya aviparītadhammadesano sammāsambuddho so bhagavāti satthari pasīdati. Niyyānikattāti vaṭṭadukkhato eva tato niyyānāvahattā. Vaṅkādīti ādi-saddena aññaṃ asāmīcipariyāyaṃ sabbaṃ dosaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
490 以这些观察导师的因由,也就是以清净的身行等,以及以宣说越来越上、越来越妙、不颠倒的法,通过这些如前所说的观察导师的因由。以摄集字母的语句,就是能让人通达那些因由的、以字母集合为特征的语句。以此处所说的文字,就是在这部经里所说的、能诠表前面所说义理的、被称为音声文字的文字。信可,就是进入可信的对象而净信,它的特征就是信可。所谓信的根本,就是作为不坏净信之信心的根本和因,也就是清净的身行等。坚固,是因为彻底断除了对立面而善加安住。不能夺去,就是不能被移除、无法被拿开。至于其他沙门、婆罗门、天神等,就更不必说了,所以说由息灭诸恶的沙门等。巴利
490.Imehi satthuvīmaṃsanakāraṇehīti ‘‘parisuddhakāyasamācāratādīhi ceva uttaruttaripaṇītapaṇītaaviparītadhammadesanāhi cā’’ti imehi yathāvuttehi satthuupaparikkhanakāraṇehi. Akkharasampiṇḍanapadehīti tesaṃyeva kāraṇānaṃ sambodhanehi akkharasamudāyalakkhaṇehi padehi. Idha vuttehi akkharehīti imasmiṃ sutte vuttehi yathāvuttassa atthassa abhibyañjanato byañjanasaññitehi akkharehi. Okappanāti saddheyyavatthuṃ okkantitvā pasīdanato okappanalakkhaṇā. Saddhāya mūlaṃ nāmāti aveccappasādabhūtāya saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma kāraṇanti saddahanassa kāraṇaṃ parisuddhakāyasamācārādikaṃ. Thirā paṭipakkhasamucchedena suppatiṭṭhitattā. Harituṃ na sakkāti apanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyā. Itaresu samaṇabrāhmaṇadevesu vattabbameva natthīti āha ‘‘samitapāpasamaṇena vā’’tiādi.
因为以前听说过“魔罗会为了扰乱某些佛陀和佛弟子而靠近”,他就想:“这个魔罗来了。”由于发问的是具足威神力的圣弟子,魔罗没法说谎。“这些”是指除了前面所说的已止息恶行的沙门等之外的那些。“如实审察”就是如实探究,不作颠倒的考察。“以真实状态”就是以真实状态、也就是依如实的功德本身。“善巧地、正确地”就是妥善而准确。“已被审察”就是已被仔细考察、已被探究。剩下的部分很容易理解。巴利
‘‘Buddhānaṃ kesañci sāvakānañca vibādhanatthaṃ māro upagacchatī’’ti sutapubbattā ‘‘ayaṃ māro āgato’’ti cintesi. Ānubhāvasampannena ariyasāvakena pucchitattā musāvādaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Eteti yathāvutte samitapāpasamaṇādayo ṭhapetvā. Sabhāvasamannesanāti yāthāvasamannesanā aviparītavīmaṃsā. Sabhāvenevāti sabbhāveneva yathābhūtaguṇato eva. Suṭṭhu sammadeva. Samannesitoti upaparikkhito. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
8. 《憍赏弥经》的注释巴利
8. Kosambiyasuttavaṇṇanā
491 因此,因为那里长着憍赏婆树,所以这座城就得到了憍赏弥之名。或者,憍赏弥是拘舍婆仙人的住处,因为这座城位于那附近,所以也叫憍赏弥。巴利
491.Tasmāti yasmā kosambarukkhavatī, tasmā nagaraṃ kosambītisaṅkhamagamāsi. Kusambassa vā isino nivāsabhūmi kosambī, tassāvidūre bhavattā nagaraṃ kosambī.
对于“由瞿施长者所建的僧园”这句话,有人会问:谁是瞿施长者?他又是怎样建起这座僧园的?为了回答这个隐含的疑问,从事情的开端说起,先交代瞿施长者,于是接着讲“从前有个叫安迪罗的国家”等等。“被田埂划分开的”:就是各处被田埂隔成一块块的田地。“走着”:沿着田埂走的时候。“极丰盛的乳粥”:非常多的乳粥,不过这乳粥沉重油腻,他在路上吃得少,消化力弱,所以没法消化。因此说“没法消化”等等。他生在美丽富贵的良家,名为瞿施长者。这样,这里只是简略地讲了瞿施长者的故事,详细内容应当依照《法句经》注(法句经注·沙摩婆提故事)中所述的方式来了知。巴利
Ghositaseṭṭhinākārite ārāmeti ettha ko ghositaseṭṭhi, kathañcānena ārāmo kāritoti antolīnāya codanāya vissajjane samudāgamato paṭṭhāya ghositaseṭṭhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘addilaraṭṭhaṃ nāma ahosī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Kedāraparicchinnanti tattha tattha kedārabhūmiyā paricchinnaṃ. Gacchantoti kedārapāḷiyā gacchanto. Pahūtapāyasanti pahūtataraṃ pāyasaṃ, taṃ pana garu siniddhaṃ antarāmagge appāhāratāya mandagahaṇiko samāno jīrāpetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tenāha ‘‘jīrāpetuṃ asakkonto’’tiādi. Yasavati rūpavati kulaghare nibbatti. Ghositaseṭṭhi nāma jātoti evamettha saṅkhepeneva ghositaseṭṭhivatthuṃ katheti, vitthāro pana dhammapadavatthumhi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.sāmāvatīvatthu) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“以内心决择的方式”:就是以内心决择的限定方式。“身体因食物耗尽而衰损”:身体因食物的相状耗尽而衰损,意思是说,由于食物耗尽,身体就衰损了。“空寂之处”:指远离人群、适合安住的僻静处。巴利
Upasaṃkappanavasenāti upasaṅkappananiyāmena. Āhāraparikkhīṇakāyassāti āhāranimittaparikkhīṇakāyassa, āhārakkhayena parikkhīṇakāyassāti attho. Suññāgāreti janavivitte phāsukaṭṭhāne.
争吵的前奏叫“bhaṇḍana”(口角):也就是作为争吵起因的辱骂,以及类似的不善行为,叫做“bhaṇḍana”。所谓“以抓手等的方式”,是指因为生气而互相抓住对方的手、紧紧纠缠等行为。由于主张“这是法”“这是律”等而成为对立之说、陷入争论,就是陷入争论。因此说“成为对立”等。因为言语依托于口,这里用“口”来指代言语,所以说“以口为刀,即以语为刀”。“令了解”是指让人明白,也就是“这是法,这是律”这样应当被了解的状态。“审察”是指如实洞察那个含义。不过义注中说:“这只是‘令了解’的另一种说法而已。”巴利
Kalahassa pubbabhāgo bhaṇḍanaṃ nāmāti kalahassa hetubhūtā paribhāsā taṃsadisī ca aniṭṭhakiriyā bhaṇḍanaṃ nāma. Hatthaparāmāsādivasenāti kujjhitvā aññamaññassa hatthe gahetvā parāmasanaaccantabandhanādivasena. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā viruddhavādabhūtaṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Tenāha ‘‘viruddhabhūta’’ntiādi. Mukhasannissitatāya vācā idha ‘‘mukha’’nti adhippetāti āha ‘‘mukhasattīhīti vācāsattīhī’’ti. Saññattinti saññāpanaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo’’ti saññāpetabbataṃ. Nijjhattinti yāthāvato tassa nijjhānaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘saññattivevacanameveta’’nti vuttaṃ.
如果他说“我要发露”,那是因为他容易受教、乐于学戒,所以才看到了自己的犯戒。说“你没有犯戒”,意思是这里也可能存在不算犯戒的情况。但那确实是犯戒。因此说:“他对那条犯戒生起了无犯的见解。”巴利
Sace hoti desessāmīti subbacatāya sikkhākāmatāya ca āpattiṃ passi. Natthi te āpattīti anāpattipakkhopi ettha sambhavatīti adhippāyenāha. Sā panāpatti eva. Tenāha – ‘‘tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosī’’ti.
492 以诤论和口角为因缘。由于诤论和口角是应当忆念之法的对立面,能令其止息的后续教说自然与前面的教说相应,所以后续经文的开示是随顺联结而展开的。应当忆念、值得忆念。对于同梵行者。能作令人喜爱、应被喜爱之事,所以是可爱的;能作令人尊重、应被尊重之事,所以是可尊敬的。为了摄受,因为它是摄受事中特殊的一种,所以能导向摄受同梵行者,这就是它们的关联。为了不争论,正因为是摄受事,所以不导向争论。而且,以不争论之因的摄受为性,依靠这些,同梵行者的和合、不分裂自然成就,所以说为和合等。由此而柔和、润泽,所以称为慈;友爱之状态,此有慈,所以是慈身业。然而,因为它是与慈俱行之心生起的,所以说应当以慈心作身业。这些慈身业等,是依比丘们而说的,因为在经文中说到比丘们应当现起这些。这里,仅仅举出比丘,就应当理解为也包含了其余的同梵行者。比丘的一切无可指责的身业,都完全包含在威仪行事之中,所以说以慈心……乃至……名为身业。以义务的方式进行的对塔和菩提树的礼拜等,与慈相似,因此为了这个目的而前往,就是慈身业。以“等”字,包含了在塔、菩提树、比丘等处所说的其余各种恭敬行为,以慈的方式生起的身体动作。巴利
492.Kalahabhaṇḍanavasenāti kalahabhaṇḍanassa nimittavasena. Yathānusandhināva gatanti kalahabhaṇḍanānaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapaṭipakkhattā tadupasamāvahā heṭṭhādesanāya anurūpāva uparidesanāti yathānusandhināva uparisuttadesanā pavattā. Saritabbayuttāti anussaraṇārahā. Sabrahmacārīnanti sahadhammikānaṃ. Piyaṃ piyāyitabbaṃ karontīti piyakaraṇā. Garuṃ garuṭṭhāniyaṃ karontīti garukaraṇā. Saṅgahaṇatthāyāti saṅgahavatthuvisesabhāvato sabrahmacārīnaṃ saṅgaṇhanāya saṃvattantīti sambandho. Avivādanatthāyāti saṅgahavatthubhāvato eva na vivādanāya. Sati ca avivādanahetubhūtasaṅgāhaṇatte tesaṃ vasena sabrahmacārīnaṃ samaggabhāvo bhedābhāvo siddhoyevāti āha ‘‘sāmaggiyā’’tiādi. Mijjati siniyhati etāyāti mettā, mittabhāvo, mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, kāyakammaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā mettāsahagatacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mettacittena kattabbaṃ kāyakamma’’nti. Imāni mettakāyakammādīni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni pāṭhe bhikkhūhi paccupaṭṭhapetabbatāvacanato. Bhikkhuggahaṇeneva cettha sesasahadhammikānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhikkhuno sabbampi anavajjakāyakammaṃ ābhisamācārikakammantogadhamevāti āha – ‘‘mettacittena…pe… kāyakammaṃ nāmā’’ti. Vattavasena pavattiyamānā cetiyabodhīnaṃ vandanā mettāsadisīti katvā tadatthāya gamanaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammanti vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena cetiyabodhibhikkhūsu vuttāvasesaapacāyanādiṃ mettāvasena pavattaṃ kāyikaṃ kiriyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
就连三藏佛语本身,也是在宣说的时候成为所讲说的对象。三种善行,就是身善行、语善行、意善行。用“思惟”这个词,是要显示:仅仅这样思惟,就已经算是慈的意业了,更何况按照方法实际修习呢。巴利
Tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ kathiyamānanti adhippāyo. Tīṇi sucaritāni kāyavacīmanosucaritāni. Cintananti iminā evaṃ cintanamattampi mettaṃ manokammaṃ, pageva vidhipaṭipannā bhāvanāti dasseti.
“成为同伴”是指在他们面前。因为他们正在做的时候,当面成为同伴,这就叫身业。并不是只称“天”,而是通过功德彰显其坚固性,才特别采用“天长老”这一言说。表达我所执的言语,就是执为“我所”的言说。对于完全隐秘的意业,“面对”这一性质,只是依引起表知而生起;而且为了说明,在世人共许中并不依赖挥手等动作而被称为身业,所以说“睁开双眼”。因此,由言语分别而起的情况,并不包括在内。巴利
Sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ tesaṃ purato. Tesu karontesuyeva hi sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ sammukhā kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Kevalaṃ ‘‘devo’’ti avatvā guṇehi thirabhāvajotanaṃ devattheroti vacanaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ. Mamattabodhanaṃ vacanaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ. Ekantatirokkhakassa manokammassa sammukhatā nāma viññattisamuṭṭhāpanavaseneva hoti, tañca kho loke kāyakammanti pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ hatthavikārādiṃ anāmasitvā eva dassento ‘‘nayanāni ummīletvā’’ti āha. Tathā hi vacībhedavasena pavatti na gahitā.
“利得”是指依靠因缘而得到的东西,也就是来源清净的资具。即使获取的方式不如法,也不能说就不是“法所得”,为了排除这种混淆,经典里才特别说“法所得”。把该施予的东西和该受供养的对象混在一起不加区分地受用,就是“不分别而受用”。因此说“有两种分别”等等。“以心分别”这句话是为了说明:哪怕只是在心里生起一个分别的念头,就已经算“已分别”了,更不用说实际去做了。巴利
Laddhapaccayā labbhantīti lābhā, parisuddhāgamanā paccayā. Na sammā gayhamānāpi na dhammaladdhā nāma na hontīti tappaṭisedhanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Deyyaṃ dakkhiṇeyyañca appaṭivibhattaṃ katvā bhuñjatīti appaṭivibhattabhogī. Tenāha ‘‘dve paṭivibhattāni nāmā’’tiādi. Cittena vibhajananti etena – ‘‘cittuppādamattenapi vibhajanaṃ paṭivibhattaṃ nāma, pageva payogato’’ti dasseti.
以“接受时……见”这句话,从他们到来开始,他就让这种平等心现前。这样一来,他平等地受用就很容易做到,而他所修的可忆念法也能圆满。这就是圆满可忆念法的实践。巴利
Paṭiggaṇhantova…pe… passatīti iminā āgamanato paṭṭhāya sādhāraṇabuddhiṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ hissa sādhāraṇabhogitā sukarā, sāraṇīyadhammo cassa supūro hoti. Vattanti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇavattaṃ.
“应当布施”,意思是无论如何都应当给。为了说明:一个人因为自身有牵累,就无法对同样有牵累的人完成指定性的布施,所以这种指定布施也并非在任何情况下都被禁止——因此才说了“然而,对于这个……”等话。“可不施予”中的“也”字,是在说明:即使对方戒行有亏,只要他确实有需要、条件也允许,就还是应当布施给他。因为所谓布施,对任何人都不曾禁止。巴利
Dātabbanti avassaṃ dātabbaṃ. Attano palibodhavasena sapalibodhasseva pūretuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā odissakadānampissa na sabbattha vāritanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adātumpīti pi-saddena dussīlassapi atthikassa sati sambhave dātabbanti dasseti. Dānañhi nāma kassaci na nivāritaṃ.
有个叫“大山村”的村子,在龙岛那一带。他说:“尊者,我的可忆念法已经圆满了……我钵里得到的食物不会耗尽。”他这么说,是为了消除那些长老心里的不安。长老们听了以后,就认出:“这个人就是可忆念法的圆满者。”据说他在年轻的时候就已经是可忆念法的圆满者了。为了说明他这种修行并不是白费功夫,他才说:“这些东西会到我这里来。”巴利
Mahāgirigāmo nāma nāgadīpapasse eko gāmo. Sāraṇīyadhammo me, bhante, pūrito…pe… pattagataṃ na khīyatīti āha tesaṃ kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ. Taṃ sutvā tepi therā ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrako aya’’nti abbhaññaṃsu. Daharakāle eva kiresa sāraṇīyadhammapūrako ahosi, tassā ca paṭipattiyā avañjhabhāvavibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘ete mayhaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti āha.
我是可忆念法的圆满者,凭我钵里所得之物,所有这些比丘尼也都能活下去。她说:你们不要思虑他们的离去。巴利
Ahaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā, mama pattapariyāpannenapi sabbāpimā bhikkhuniyo yāpessantīti āha ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayitthā’’ti.
在七种犯戒聚当中,无论说是在开头、在结尾,还是在中间,这都是依照诵出经文本身的顺序来说的。因为犯戒聚本来并没有别的什么固定次序。说“在边缘”,就像衣服的边角,或者像布边被割破的衣服。“破缺”,就是指有破损,或者已经损坏。“穿孔”在这里也是同样的道理。掺入了不同颜色,占一半或三分之一,因杂染而成了坏色,这叫“斑驳”;如果只是用不同颜色的斑点间杂其中,那就叫“杂色”——这就是这两者的区别。通过“从渴爱奴役中解脱”这个说法,就说明了这些戒是导向出离轮回的依止。通过“能成就自在的状态”这句话,就表示这里是省略了末尾的词,来解释“能成就自在的”和“自在的”这两个词。因为戒对没有智慧的人来说难以衡量,所以说是“智者所称赞”。所谓“不被渴爱和邪见所执取”,就是指不抱着“依靠这戒,我将成为天神或某位天人”这种被渴爱执取的想法,也不抱着“依靠这戒,我成为天神后,将在那里永恒、常住、不变”这种被邪见执取的想法。这是“可呵责执取者”。戒,以“无悔”等为次第,最终目的就是为了成就定,所以说是“能导向定的”。等同的状态就是“共相”;因为具足圆满的四清净,就像中间没有断裂的金子一样没有破裂,所以与戒的共相就是“戒共相”,已经到达、趋近这个共相的,就叫“戒共相具足者”。因此说“具足等同状态之戒者”。巴利
Sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā, vemajjheti ca idaṃ uddesāgatapāḷivasena vuttaṃ. Na hi añño koci āpattikkhandhānaṃ anukkamo atthi. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya. Khaṇḍanti khaṇḍavantaṃ, khaṇḍitaṃ vā. Chiddanti etthāpi eseva nayo . Visabhāgavaṇṇena upaḍḍhaṃ, tatiyabhāgaṃ vā sambhinnavaṇṇaṃ sabalaṃ, visabhāgavaṇṇeheva pana bindūhi antarantarā vimissaṃ kammāsaṃ, ayaṃ imesaṃ viseso. Taṇhādāsabyato mocanavacaneneva tesaṃ sīlānaṃ vivaṭṭupanissayatamāha. Bhujissabhāvakaraṇatoti iminā bhujissakarāni bhujissānīti uttarapadalopenāyaṃ niddesoti dasseti. Aviññūnaṃ appamāṇatāya ‘‘viññuppasatthānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattāti – ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti taṇhāparāmāsena – ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo hutvā tattha nicco dhuvo sassato bhavissāmī’’ti diṭṭhiparāmāsena ca aparāmaṭṭhattā. Parāmaṭṭhunti codetuṃ. Sīlaṃ nāma avippaṭisārādipārampariyena yāvadeva samādhisampādanatthanti āha ‘‘samādhisaṃvattakānī’’ti. Samānabhāvo sāmaññaṃ, paripuṇṇacatupārisuddhibhāvena majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇassa viya bhedābhāvato sīlena sāmaññaṃ sīlasāmaññaṃ, taṃ gato upagatoti sīlasāmaññagato. Tenāha ‘‘samānabhāvūpagatasīlo’’ti.
这里说的“此见”,就是指我和你们都现前亲证的这种见。以彻见四圣谛为义,所以叫“见”。在“一切行无常,一切行是苦,一切法无我”以及“世尊是正自觉者,法是世尊善说的,僧团是善修的”这些见解上彼此一致,就是同见的状态。它在其余应当忆念的诸法中最上、最根本。因为有了这个见,其余诸法就容易成就,所以它是它们的总摄者。也正因如此,它是它们的联结者;就像安上椽子让它们不散落,能摄持、保持,所以叫总摄者。因为是最上,所以是联结者。这些法具有这种联结,所以叫具有联结性的;或者读作saṅghāṭaniyaṃ,意思是与联结相关;或者因专于联结而称saṅghāṭanikaṃ,把k换成y,成为saṅghāṭaniyaṃ。因为这里只从共通性来说,所以用中性词表达。巴利
Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti yā ayaṃ diṭṭhi mayhañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūtā. Catusaccadassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhi, ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti, ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti ca diṭṭhiyā sāmaññaṃ samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ. Aggaṃ itaresaṃ sāraṇīyadhammānaṃ padhānabhāvato. Etasmiṃ sati sukhasiddhito tesaṃ saṅgāhikaṃ, tato eva tesaṃ saṅghāṭanikaṃ gopānasiyo aparipatante katvā saṅgaṇhāti dhāretīti saṅgāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭanti aggabhāvena saṅghāṭabhāvaṃ. Saṅghāṭanaṃ etesaṃ atthīti saṅghāṭanikaṃ, saṅghāṭaniyanti vā pāṭho, saṅghāṭane niyuttanti vā saṅghāṭanikaṃ, ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā saṅghāṭaniyaṃ. Sāmaññato eva gahitattā napuṃsakaniddeso.
493 初道正见也是这样的性质,至于其他诸道的正见,就更不用说了,所以说“这就是入流道之见”。“仅仅如此”的意思是:只要被贪等烦恼中的任何一种缠住了心,就已经叫作“心被缠缚”,更不用说被两种或多种烦恼缠住心了。“于一切处”指在所有八个项目当中,也就是在所有其余的六个项目当中。“妥善安立”是指像修习道之后能现证诸谛那样,正确地安立,因此说“为了觉悟诸谛”。“彼智”就是生起“我确实没有那种缠缚”等的省察智。“属于圣者”就是只属于圣者,是唯圣者所有,因为他们即使只是部分断除,也值得说、应当说,因此说“非属凡夫”。所谓“圣者”,是因为说“生于圣者之中”而说的。因为是出世间之因,所以说为出世间。因此他说“然而那些人的……”等。因为他具有与凡夫不共的特性,因此说“因为凡夫没有”。在一切项目中,即在其余所有六个项目中。巴利
493. Paṭhamamaggasammādiṭṭhipi evaṃsabhāvā, aññamaggasammādiṭṭhīsu vattabbameva natthīti āha ‘‘yāyaṃ sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhī’’ti. Ettāvatāpīti ettakenapi rāgādīsu ekekena pariyuṭṭhitacittatāyapi pariyuṭṭhitacittoyeva nāma hoti, pageva dvīhi, bahūhi vā pariyuṭṭhitacittatāya. Sabbatthāti sabbesu aṭṭhasupi vāresu. Suṭṭhu ṭhapitanti yathā maggabhāvanā upari saccābhisambodho hoti, evaṃ sammā ṭhapitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saccānaṃ bodhāyā’’ti. Taṃ ñāṇanti ‘‘natthi kho me taṃ pariyuṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pavattaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Ariyānaṃ hotīti ariyānameva hoti. Tesañhi ekadesatopi pahīnaṃ vattabbataṃ arahati. Tenāha ‘‘na puthujjanāna’’nti. Ariyanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ariyesu jāta’’nti katvā. Lokuttarahetukatāya lokuttaranti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘yesaṃ panā’’tiādi. Tathā hissa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇatā. Tenāha ‘‘puthujjanānaṃ pana abhāvato’’ti. Sabbavāresūti sabbesu itaresu chasu vāresu.
494 “各自”是指在每个人自己的心里,也就是在我自己的心中。因此说“在自己的心中”。意思是:我在自己的心中证得寂灭,也就是烦恼的止息。这个道理用“这个道理也是一样”来类推。巴利
494.Paccattanti pāṭiyekkaṃ attani mama citteyeva. Tenāha ‘‘attano citte’’ti. ‘‘Paccattaṃ attano citte nibbutiṃ kilesavūpasamaṃ labhāmī’’ti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati.
495 “以这样的见”这句话,是在回指“具足如此之见”这个意思,所以说:“以这样的见,也就是以这样的入流道之见。”巴利
495.Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti idaṃ ‘‘yathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato’’ti imassa atthassa paccāmasananti āha ‘‘tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti evarūpāya sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhiyā’’ti.
496 以本性:是指由决定性的五学处等构成的本性。以僧团甘马的力量:是指通过行敬悦等僧团甘马的力量。幼者是指愚人。童子是指小孩。因为幼者既可以称为童子,也可以称为年轻人,所以这里说为迟钝者。因为诸根迟钝,所以是迟钝者。因此说“眼耳等根迟钝”。不过,年轻人中也有诸根迟钝的,为了排除这种情况,所以说“仰卧的婴儿”。如果他是仰卧的婴儿,又怎么能踏火炭呢?这里所说的“踏”,是指以某种方式触到火炭,所以说“此处彼处”等。诸人的:指老人们的手。因为手皮粗厚,手不会迅速被烧焦。因为身体柔软幼嫩,手会迅速缩回。忍受:是指期待某种利益。巴利
496.Sabhāvenāti niyatapañcasikkhāpadatādisabhāvena. Saṅghakammavasenāti mānattacariyādisaṅghakammavasena. Daharoti bālo. Kumāroti dārako. Yasmā daharo ‘‘kumāro’’ti ca ‘‘yuvā’’ti ca vuccati, tasmā mandoti vuttaṃ. Mandindriyatāya hi mando. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhusotādīnaṃ mandatāyā’’ti. Evampi yuvāvatthāpi keci mandindriyā hontīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘uttānaseyyako’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi uttānaseyyako, kathamassa aṅgārakkamananti? Yathā tathā aṅgārassa phusanaṃ idha ‘‘akkamana’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘ito cito cā’’tiādi. Manussānanti mahallakamanussānaṃ. Na sīghaṃ hattho jhāyati kathinahatthatāya. Khippaṃ paṭisaṃharati mudutaluṇasarīratāya. Adhivāseti kiñci payojanaṃ apekkhitvā.
497 “高高低低的”是指大的和小的。“就在那里”是指就在做灰泥等工作的地方。处理染料是为了配制灰泥等物,运水是为了清洗等事,用小钵是为了涂抹姜黄色土。“厚愿者”是指意愿坚定的人。“小牛”是指已经出生、跟在母牛身边的小牛。“注视”是转开、注视的意思,所以说“注视”。“倾向彼”就是倾向增上戒学等,因为即使在做各种大小杂务时,也只是为了圆满行持学处而做,并且是依如理作意来行持这些事的。缺乏如理作意的人,就站在长老面前说:“我要跟你聊这聊那。”巴利
497.Uccāvacānīti mahantāni ceva khuddakāni ca. Tatthevāti sudhākammādimhiyeva. Kasāvapacanaṃ sudhādisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ, udakānayanaṃ dhovanādiatthaṃ, haliddivaṇṇadhātulepanatthaṃ kucchakaraṇaṃ. Bahalapatthanoti daḷhachando. Vacchakanti nibbattadhenupagavacchaṃ. Apacinātīti apavindati, āloketīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘apaloketī’’ti. Tanninno hotīti adhisīlasikkhādininnova hoti uccāvacānampi kiṃkaraṇīyānaṃ cārittasīlassa pūraṇavaseneva karaṇato, yonisomanasikāravaseneva ca tesaṃ paṭipajjanato. Therassa santike aṭṭhāsi yonisomanasikārābhāvato ‘‘taṃ taṃ samullapissāmī’’ti.
498 498. 因为“力本身就是力”,所以说“具足力”。所谓“作希求状态”,是指通过那个法,生起了一种特别的、有希求的状态。所谓“以全心”,是指在说法的最初、中间和结尾,心都完整无余地运转,也就是以完全、毫无保留的心。巴利
498. Balaṃ eva balatāti āha ‘‘balena samannāgato’’ti. Atthikabhāvaṃ katvāti tena dhammena savisesaṃ atthikabhāvaṃ uppādetvā. Sakalacittenāti desanāyaādimhi majjhe pariyosāneti sabbattheva pavattatāya sakalena anavasesena cittena.
500 500.“本性”:这是圣弟子与凡夫不共的特有本性。“善观察”:指正确地审察。“为证入流果”:指通过现证入流果,也就是已证得的状态,所以他说“以已证入流果之智”。这些是对第一道果的省察智的种种差别,因为转起的行相各不相同。因此他说“以七种大省察智”。以上是诸阿阇梨共同认可的说法:所谓“此为其第一智”等所说的那些省察智,并不是道智——这样流传下来的、前世阿阇梨们共同一致的、通用的解释,就是这部经的义注释义。其中,他说明了理由:“出世间道确实不存在多心刹那。”如果它有多心刹那,就会有不同现观;若如此,就会导致三结等的部分断除,由于圣道无间即证果,便会落入“一分入流者”等状态,或者出现多种果;这一切都不合理。因此,出世间道唯有一个心刹那。巴利
500.Sabhāvoti ariyasāvakassa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇatāya āveṇiko sabhāvo. Suṭṭhu samannesitoti sammadeva upaparikkhito. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti sotāpattiphalassa sacchikaraṇena, sacchikatabhāvenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikatañāṇenā’’ti. Paṭhamamaggaphalassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇavisesā hete pavattiākārabhinnā. Tenevāha ‘‘sattahi mahāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇehī’’ti. Ayaṃ tāva ācariyānaṃ samānakathāti ‘‘idamassa paṭhamaṃ ñāṇa’’ntiādinā vuttāni paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, na maggañāṇānīti evaṃ pavattā paramparāgatā pubbācariyānaṃ samānā sādhāraṇā imissā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathā atthavaṇṇanā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘lokuttaramaggo hi bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthī’’ti. Yadi so bahucittakkhaṇiko siyā nānābhisamayo, tathā sati saṃyojanattayādīnaṃ ekadesappahānaṃ pāpuṇātīti ariyamaggassa anantaraphalattā ekadesasotāpannatādibhāvo āpajjati, phalānaṃ vā anekabhāvo, sabbametaṃ ayuttanti tasmā ekacittakkhaṇikova ariyamaggo.
然而,有诘难论者依据一段经文,否定圣道只存在于一个心刹那。为了指出那段经文,论主说:“因为经中说‘七年’。”因为当有人说“烦恼……迅速地被断除”时,这就等于承认烦恼的断除是迅速的,而道的修习却是缓慢的。在这里,如果刚开始修习道,烦恼就被断除,那么其余的道之修习就没有意义了;如果烦恼是后来才断除的,那么“烦恼迅速地被断除”这句话就是错误的,因为后面将会说到“为证入流果”。因此,这是从经文本身得到认可。所谓“未修习道”,是指未将圣道修习圆满。所谓“了知义味”,是指经文的正确无误之义就是义味,如实了知它。如此破斥诘难论者的主张之后,为了总结所说的义理,而说“这七智”等。其余部分极易理解。巴利
Yaṃ pana suttapadaṃ nissāya vitaṇḍavādī ariyamaggassa ekacittakkhaṇikataṃ paṭikkhipati, taṃ dassento ‘‘satta vassānīti hi vacanato’’ti āha. Kilesā pana lahu…pe… chijjantīti vadantena hi khippaṃ tāva kilesappahānaṃ, dandhapavattikā maggabhāvanāti paṭiññātaṃ hoti. Tattha sace maggassa bhāvanāya āraddhamattāya kilesā pahīyanti, sesā maggabhāvanā niratthakā siyā, atha pacchā kilesappahānaṃ, kilesā pana lahu chijjantīti idaṃ micchā, ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyā’’ti vakkhatīti. Tato suttapaṭijānanato. Maggaṃ abhāvetvāti ariyamaggaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā abhāvetvā. Attharasaṃ viditvāti suttassa aviparīto attho eva attharaso, taṃ yāthāvato ñatvā. Evaṃ vitaṇḍavādivādaṃ bhinditvā vuttamevatthaṃ nigametuṃ ‘‘imāni satta ñāṇānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第9《梵天邀请经》注释巴利
9. Brahmanimantanikasuttavaṇṇanā
501 “我是常的,世间也是常的”,这样生起的见解就是常见。与身俱:是与那个梵的有身一起。梵位:自己的梵所依处。说“无常为常”,是因为在自己身上没有显现出无常性。坚固:牢固、坚密,因为没有灭坏,所以有坚实的意思。因为没有生起和变异,所以是恒常存在的。全:圆满,因此说“无缺”。或者“全”是指没有生等混杂,也就是远离的意思。正因为没有生等,所以是不死殁法。由于常性,没有任何人出生……结生。他承认那个处所及住在那里者的常性。三禅地:指第二、第三、第四禅地。第四禅地的差别就是无想天、净居天和无色界生。遮止:明明存在,却因为不知道而否认说“无”。为无明所行:与无明一起运行,即被无明伴随。这里的具格是表“一起”的意思,所以说“具足”。无智者:缺少智慧的人。成盲者:因为没有慧眼,所以成为盲目;或者说,已经达到盲冥的状态,因此称为“成盲者”。巴利
501. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.30) evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi sassatadiṭṭhi (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.175). Saha kāyenāti saha tena brahmattabhāvena. Brahmaṭṭhānanti attano brahmavatthuṃ. ‘‘Aniccaṃ nicca’’nti vadati aniccatāya attano apaññāyamānattā. Thiranti daḷhaṃ, vināsābhāvato sārabhūtanti attho. Uppādavipariṇāmābhāvato sadā vijjamānaṃ. Kevalanti paripuṇṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akhaṇḍa’’nti. Kevalanti vā jātiādīhi amissaṃ, virahitanti adhippāyo. Uppādādīnaṃ abhāvato eva acavanadhammaṃ. Koci jāyanako vā…pe… upapajjanako vā natthi niccabhāvato. Ṭhānena saddhiṃ tannivāsīnaṃ niccabhāvañhi so paṭijānāti. Tisso jhānabhūmiyoti dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānabhūmiyo. Catutthajjhānabhūmivisesā hi asaññasuddhāvāsāruppabhavā. Paṭibāhatīti santaṃyeva samānaṃ ajānantova natthīti paṭikkhipati. Avijjāya gatoti avijjāya saha gato pavatto. Sahayoge hi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Aññāṇīti avidvā. Paññācakkhuvirahato andho bhūto, andhabhāvaṃ vā pattoti andhībhūto.
502 当时,为了说明世尊在善生林中的安住从未中断,才说“知道世尊住在善生林”。不过,那里是因为当时看不见世尊,才说“观察世尊去了哪里”。说到“看见他正前往梵天界”,这是表明:当时世尊前往梵天界,是经过了好几个心识刹那才发生的,并不是在一个心识刹那内完成。这里也不是指以身体行动来令心转向——因为经文说“就像强壮的人屈伸手臂一样”等等。这里应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。“离欲”是指欲的消失。“被斥退”是指因为对所执取的见解发生反转而受到惊吓。那句“切勿触犯他”的话,就成了对他的支持。巴利
502. Tadā bhagavato subhagavane viharaṇassa avicchinnataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘subhagavane viharatīti ñatvā’’ti. Tattha pana tadāssa bhagavato adassanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kattha nu kho gatoti olokento’’ti. Brahmalokaṃ gacchantaṃ disvāti iminā katipayacittavāravasena tadā bhagavato brahmalokagamanaṃ jātaṃ, na ekacittakkhaṇenāti dasseti. Na cettha kāyagatiyā cittapariṇāmanaṃ adhippetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyyā’’tiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.501). Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Vichandanti chandavigamaṃ. Apasāditoti diṭṭhiyā gāhassa viparivattanena santajjito. ‘‘Metamāsado’’ti vacanena upatthambho hutvā.
“遍入之后”:是指以附身的方式压伏了那个身体。因为像这样压伏之后,他的身体就好像被进入了一样,所以说“进入身体后”。确实,当天、夜叉、龙等附在某个众生身上时,会先阻止这个众生原本正常运作的心识活动,然后附身者以自己的神通威力,让这个众生做出自己想要的笑、说话等动作;而在驱使这个众生做这些动作时,是随着被附身者的心而驱使的。有人说“是依附身者自己的心”,这话不该这么说,因为业所生的神通威力是不可思议的。但另一些人认为,就像那时眼识等的生起只属于被附身者本人,同样,唯作心的生起也只属于他本人,只是由于附身者的威力,才使他的状态变得与平常不同。因此,那些有大威力的众生,附身者是无法附在他们身上的;但在治疗和起尸时,咒术的威力能进入尸体,使它活动。而像高罗刹帝利等尸体能够站起来并开口说话,则完全是由佛陀的威力所致。因为佛陀的威力是不可思议的。“压伏后而住”:是指以自己的威力压伏了整个世间之后而安住。“最胜者”:是指首要者,或者因为具足这样的威力而成为最上者。“见者”:是指见者。由于没有要表达特殊限定的意图,“见者”这个词就是遍及一切、无所遗漏的范围,所以说“见一切”。“一切人”:是指名为“一切人”的一切有情群体。他将其置于自己的掌控之下,因为他是最上者,也是能创造者,所以将其置于自己的掌控之下。由于对世间有自在支配的性质,所以是“自在者”。由于是众生业力的造作者,所以是“作者”。他能创造整个世间,包括不动与动的区分,所以是“创造者”。巴利
Anvāvisitvāti āvisanavasena tassa attabhāvaṃ adhibhavitvā. Tathā abhibhavato hi tassa sarīraṃ paviṭṭho viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sarīraṃ pavisitvā’’ti. Yañhi sattaṃ devayakkhanāgādayo āvisanti, tassa pākatikakiriyamayaṃ cittappavattiṃ nivāretvā attano iddhānubhāvena yaṃ icchitaṃ hasitalapitādi, taṃ tena kārāpenti, kārentā ca āviṭṭhapuggalassa cittavasena kārenti. ‘‘Attanovā’’ti na vattabbametaṃ acinteyyattā kammajassa iddhānubhāvassāti keci. Apare pana yathā tadā cakkhuviññāṇādipavatti āviṭṭhapuggalasseva, evaṃ kiriyamayacittapavattipi tasseva, āvesakānubhāvena pana sāmaññatā parivattati. Tathā hi mahānubhāvaṃ puggalaṃ te āvisituṃ na sakkonti, tikicchāvuṭṭhāpane pana chavasarīraṃ anupavisitvā satantaṃ karoti vijjānubhāvena. Korakhattiyādīnaṃ pana chavasarīrassa uṭṭhānaṃ vacīnicchāraṇañca kevalaṃ buddhānubhāvena. Acinteyyā hi buddhānaṃ buddhānubhāvāti. Abhibhavitvā ṭhitoti sakalalokaṃ attano ānubhāvena abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Jeṭṭhakoti padhāno, tādisaṃ vā ānubhāvasampannattā uttamo. Passatīti daso. Visesavacanicchāya abhāvato anavasesavisayo daso-saddoti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ passatī’’ti. Sabbajananti laddhanāmaṃ sabbasattakāyaṃ. Vase vatteti, seṭṭhattā nimmāpakattā ca attano vase vatteti. Lokassa īsanasīlatāya issaro. Sattānaṃ kammassa kārakabhāvena kattā. Thāvarajaṅgamavibhāgaṃ sakalaṃ lokaṃ nimmānetīti nimmātā.
因为功德殊胜,所以在世间值得称赞,是最殊胜的。而这样的人又是最顶尖的,所以说“最上”。众生的创造,就像这样那样地生成与分化,所以说“你是刹帝利”等等。在禅那等方面,对自己的心已通过修习而获得自在,所以是得自在者。“已生者”,指已经出生的。“具有存在与殊胜出身者”就是堪得自在者,即在胎中存在者,是那些堪得自在者的。因此说“卵生、胎生、湿生的众生”等等。巴利
Guṇavisesena loke pāsaṃsattā seṭṭho. Tādiso ca ukkaṭṭhatamo hotīti āha ‘‘uttamo’’ti. Sattānaṃ nimmānaṃ tathā tathā sajanaṃ visajanaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘tvaṃ khattiyo’’tiādi. Jhānādīsu attano citte ca ciṇṇavasittā vasī. Bhūtānanti nibbattānaṃ. Bhavaṃ abhijātaṃ arahantīti bhabyā, sambhavesino, tesaṃ bhabyānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṇḍajajalābujā sattā’’tiādi.
地等是常的、坚固的、永恒的。那些以“无常”等说法贬斥它们、厌恶它们的有情,因为说不如实之语,命终时堕入恶趣。而那些以“常、坚固”等说法称赞地等的,因为说如实之语,得以投生到梵身天。魔想通过正说和反说,借地等来阐明宣示对诸行遍知的过患,从而使他们远离遍知,所以才说了“贬斥地者”等话。在这里,魔罗用地等界和大种来代表人间,用鬼神代表四大王天,用天代表其余欲界天,用生主代表自己的住处,用梵代表梵身天。但应当知道,光音天等因为不在他的范围之内,所以没有被魔罗抓到。依渴爱与邪见之力,就是依渴爱欢喜和邪见欢喜之力。对“这是我的,这是我的我”感到欢喜的人,就是欢喜者、喜欢者,或者有欢喜习性的人。显示住于梵天神教导者们的大神威力,意思是把聚集在那里的梵天神们的大神威力,说成是因为住于那位大梵天王的教导而产生的,并让他们看见。以名声,就是以威神力。以光辉,就是以庄严。将我领进梵天神众,就是在那种具备自在等成就的梵天神众中,他让我进入。由于杀害大众,就是因为以令大众的出离依止之功德毁灭的威力而杀害。无名声,就是与名声相反的无名誉之威德力。巴利
Pathavīādayo niccā dhuvā sassatā. Ye tesaṃ ‘‘aniccā’’tiādinā garahakā jigucchā sattā, te ayathābhūtavāditāya matakāle apāyaniṭṭhā ahesuṃ. Ye pana pathavīādīnaṃ ‘‘niccā dhuvā’’tiādinā pasaṃsakā, te yathābhūtavāditāya brahmakāyūpagā ahesunti māro pāpimā anvayato byatirekato ca pathavīādimukhena saṅkhārānaṃ pariññāpaññāpane ādīnavaṃ vibhāveti tato vivecetukāmo. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīgarahakā’’tiādi. Ettha ca māro pathavīādidhātumahābhūtaggahaṇena manussalokaṃ, bhūtaggahaṇena cātumahārājike, devaggahaṇena avasesakāmadevalokaṃ, pajāpatiggahaṇena attano ṭhānaṃ, brahmaggahaṇena brahmakāyike gaṇhi. Ābhassarādayo pana avisayatāya eva anena aggahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti taṇhābhinandanāya diṭṭhābhinandanāya ca vasena. ‘‘Etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti abhinandino abhinandakā, abhinandanasīlā vā. Brahmuno ovāde ṭhitānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ dassetīti tesaṃ tattha sannipatitabrahmānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ tassa mahābrahmuno ovāde ṭhitattā nibbattaṃ katvā dasseti. Yasenāti ānubhāvena. Siriyāti sobhāya. Maṃ brahmaparisaṃ upanesīti yādisā brahmaparisā issariyādisampattiyā, tattha maṃ uyyojesi. Mahājanassa māraṇatoti mahājanassa vivaṭṭūpanissayaguṇavināsanena ānubhāvena māraṇato. Ayasanti yasapaṭipakkhaṃ akittikammānubhāvañcāti attho.
503 “遍满百年”这句话,是针对一百年而说的。“依止而卧”就是近依止,近依止本身就是近依止者,就像说“venayiko”那样,这里说的是“近依止者”。这里提到“卧”,只是为了举例说明,为了说明这一点,才说了“我去”等话。由于界有多种含义,这里应当理解为转起的含义。“在我之处卧者”,就是在我的处所、我的范围内转起者。“排除后”,就是压低后,或者征服后。“于灌木丛之土块”这里,所谓灌木丛之土块,是一种铺展在地面上生长的蔓草类植物。巴利
503.Kasiṇaṃ āyunti vassasataṃ sandhāya vadati. Upanissāya setīti upasayo, upasayova opasāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8) āha ‘‘samīpasayo’’ti. Sayaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattanti dassetuṃ ‘‘maṃ gacchanta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ vattanattho daṭṭhabbo. Mama vatthusmiṃ sayanakoti mayhaṃ ṭhāne visaye vattanako. Bāhitvāti nīcaṃ katvā, abhibhavitvā vā. Jajjharikāgumbatoti ettha jajjharikā nāma pathaviṃ pattharitvā jātā ekā gacchajāti.
“以此”是指通过“如果确实是你,比丘”等话语来说的。这位就是梵天神。“劝诱”意思是拉拢。“呵责”意思是压制。“以其余的词句”是指用“依事处而住的”“可随意处置的”“应被排除的”这些词句。“你将为我执持守护”意思是你将成为我的守护者。“较矮小者”意思是更矮小、更低劣、身形卑微的。巴利
Imināti ‘‘sace kho tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādivacanena. Esa brahmā. Upalāpetīti saṅgaṇhāti. Apasādetīti niggaṇhāti. Sesapadehīti vatthusāyiko yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyoti imehi padehi. Mayhaṃ ārakkhaṃ gaṇhissasīti mama ārakkhako bhavissasi. Lakuṇḍakataranti nīcataraṃ nihīnavuttisarīraṃ.
连能够触到一点点都看不到,更不用说智的广大了——这就是这段话的意思。“Nipphatti”(成就)就是完成,也就是果。因为果要依着因才能到达、才能证得,所以称为“gati”(去处)。“Ānubhāva”(威神力)就是影响力。它因为照耀、光耀的作用而称为“juti”(光耀)。由于以广大的威神力压服他人,所以被称为“mahesa”(大自在),也就是“mahesakkho”(大有威力者)。这种压服,是通过名声的成就和眷属的成就来体现的,因此说“mahāyaso mahāparivāro”(大名闻、大眷属)。巴利
Phusitumpi samatthaṃ kiñci na passati, pageva ñāṇavibhavanti adhippāyo. Nipphattinti nipphajjanaṃ, phalanti attho. Tañhi kāraṇavasena gantabbato adhigantabbato gatīti vuccati. Ānubhāvanti pabhāvaṃ. So hi jotanaṭṭhena virocanaṭṭhena jutīti vuccati. Mahatā ānubhāvena paresaṃ abhibhavanato mahesoti akkhāyatīti mahesakkho. Tayidaṃ abhibhavanaṃ kittisampattiyā parivārasampattiyā cāti āha ‘‘mahāyaso mahāparivāro’’ti.
“Pariharantī”的意思是:把须弥山置于右侧然后绕行。“Disā”是方向,这里是处格意义的独立主格,所以注释说“disāsu virocamānā”,就是在各方闪耀。也可以说是以自己的光辉而闪耀。“Tehī”指那些日月。“Tattakena pamāṇenā”是说:由那些日月所照耀的、称为一个世间界的范围有多大,就是以那么大的范围。这个轮围界是诸佛出世的地方,是最殊胜、最上等、最首要的。所以往生到这里的多数天神,比其他轮围界的天神更殊胜地运作。确实,娑婆主梵天曾带着一万梵天神眷属来到世尊面前。因此说“ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattatī”,就是在此千轮围界中,你的威权在运行。现在为了如实显示“ettha te vattate vaso”所说的威权运行,就说了“paroparañca jānāsī”等。其中,为了显示应把第一偈中说的“ettha”一词带进来理解,注释说“ettha cakkavāḷasahasse”。“Uccanīca”是指按出身、家族、容貌、财富、眷属等而说的殊胜与不殊胜。通过“这个有威力,这个是普通人”这一句,显示他对众生的胜劣了知是就自身现状而言,不是就众生的来处而言。至于后面将要说的“sattānaṃ āgatiṃ gatiṃ”,那是就了知欲界众生的执取与舍弃而已,不是了知业果。因为如果他能从众生的来处了知,那也应该能了知自己的来处,但他并没有这种了知。所以那样说:“itthambhāvoti idaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ”等。“Rāgayogato rāgo etassa atthīti vā rāgo”,是说他有贪,所以是贪者;而“virajjanasīlo virāgī”,是说有离贪之性,所以是离贪者;这就是“rāgavirāginaṃ”。“Sahassibrahmā”是说,你因为只了知小千世界,所以名为千梵。“Tayā”是表示从格的具格用法。“Catuhatthāyā”是说,有一个本来应靠许多肘的布幔围墙才能制成的布幅尺寸;就像有人想用一块纵长四肘、横宽二肘的破布去做它,又像有人想沉入脚踝深的水中,却因为不知道量度而苦恼。这里是在呵责他。巴利
Pariharantīti sineruṃ dakkhiṇato katvā parivattanti. Disāti bhummatthe etaṃ paccattavacananti āha ‘‘disāsu virocamānā’’ti. Attano jutiyā dibbamānāya vā. Tehīti candimasūriyehi. Tattakena pamāṇenāti yattake candimasūriyehi obhāsiyamāno lokadhātusaṅkhāto eko loko, tattakena pamāṇena. Idaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ padhānaṃ, tasmā yebhuyyena etthupapannā devatā aññesu cakkavāḷesu devatā abhibhuyya vattanti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati dasasahassabrahmaparivāro bhagavato santikaṃ upagañchi. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattatī’’ti. Idāni ‘‘ettha te vattate vaso’’ti vuttaṃ vase vattanaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘paroparañca jānāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttaṃ ettha-saddaṃ ānetvā attho veditabboti dassento ‘‘ettha cakkavāḷasahasse’’ti āha. Uccanīceti jātikularūpabhogaparivārādivasena uḷāre ca anuḷāre ca. Ayaṃ iddhoayaṃ pakatimanussoti iminā ‘‘sarūpato evassa sattānaṃ paroparajānanaṃ, na samudāgamato’’ti dasseti. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘sattānaṃ āgatiṃ gatinti, taṃ kāmaloke sattānaṃ ādānanikkhepajānanamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na kammavipākajānanaṃ. Yadi hi samudāgamato jāneyya, attanopi jāneyya, na cassa taṃ atthīti, tathā āha ‘‘itthambhāvotiidaṃ cakkavāḷa’’ntiādi. Rāgayogato rāgo etassa atthīti vā rāgo, virajjanasīlo virāgī, taṃ rāgavirāginaṃ. Sahassibrahmā nāma tvaṃ cūḷaniyā eva lokadhātuyā jānanato. Tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Catuhatthāyāti anekahatthena sāṇipākārena kātabbapaṭappamāṇaṃ dīghato catuhatthāya, vitthārato dvihatthāya pilotikāya kātuṃ vāyamanto viya gopphake udake nimujjitukāmo viya ca pamāṇaṃ ajānanto vihaññatīti niggaṇhāti.
504 那个“身”,就是指那个群体。即使到了应当被了知的地步,意思是:暂且不说我那些不共于他人、以戒等为首的功德殊胜,单是这种世俗的、微不足道的、应当被了知的地步,他到了都这样。这个人比这些人极度卑下,所以是“应被卑视者”,那种状态就是“卑下性”,因此说:“我怎么会比你更卑下呢?”巴利
504.Taṃ kāyanti tadeva nikāyaṃ. Jānitabbaṭṭhānaṃ patvāpīti anaññasādhāraṇā mayhaṃ sīlādayo guṇavisesā tāva tiṭṭhantu, īdisaṃ lokiyaṃ parittakaṃ jānitabbaṭṭhānampi patvā. Ayaṃ imesaṃ atisayena nīcoti nīceyyo, tassa bhāvo nīceyyanti āha ‘‘tayā nīcatarabhāvo pana mayhaṃ kuto’’ti.
“得下界生者”,是指从更高层天死后,在较低层天获得再生。为了把这样简略说过的含义详细展示出来,所以说了“于佛陀未出世时”。“令作得下界生者”,就是作了得下界生的祈愿。譬如某人造了许多无间业,其中在那里面最重、最强的那个业就给予结生,其余那些则成为它的助缘,而不是给予结生者。同样地,当四种色界禅那被修习时,其中在那里面由欲、愿、胜解等而最为殊胜、且带有造作的那个禅那,就给予结生,其余那些因为没得到机会,便成为它的助缘,而不是给予结生者。正是由那所生起的禅那,未来才有后有的再生,所以说“修习了殊胜的第三禅那后”。“于其中”,指遍净天梵世间。“又于其中”,指光音天梵世间。“于最初时”,指在那一有中的最初时候。“两者”,指过去的、自己投生的地方,以及在那里投生之因,也就是自己所作的业,这两者。因为时间过了太久而忘失。“度过”,是指他们这样进行时,就那时那行为的生起刹那而言,是正在进行的努力。巴利
Heṭṭhūpapattikoti uparūparito cavitvā heṭṭhā laddhūpapattiko. Evaṃ saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘anuppanne buddhuppāde’’ti āha. Heṭṭhūpapattikaṃ katvāti heṭṭhūpapattikaṃ patthanaṃ katvā. Yathā kenaci bahūsu ānantariyesu katesu yaṃ tattha garutaraṃ balavaṃ, tadeva paṭisandhiṃ deti, itarāni pana tassa anubalappadāyakāni honti, na paṭisandhidāyakāni, evaṃ catūsu rūpajjhānesu bhāvitesu yaṃ tattha garutaraṃ chandapaṇidhiadhimokkhādivasena sābhisaṅkhārañca, tadeva ca paṭisandhiṃ deti, itarāni pana aladdhokāsatāya tassa anubalappadāyakāni honti, na paṭisandhidāyakāni, tannibbattitajjhāneneva āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti āha ‘‘tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā’’ti. Tatthāti subhakiṇhabrahmaloke. Puna tatthāti ābhassarabrahmaloke. Paṭhamakāleti tasmiṃ bhave paṭhamasmiṃ kāle. Ubhayanti atītaṃ attano nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nibbattiyā hetubhūtaṃ attano katakammanti ubhayaṃ. Pamussitvā kālassa ciratarabhāvato. Vītināmeti paṭipajjantīti ca tadā tassā kiriyāya pavattikkhaṇaṃ upādāya pavattamānapayogo.
让他喝,就是给他喝。对口渴的,就是对干渴的。在炎热时,就是暑热之时。被暑热逼恼的,就是被暑热之苦和口渴压垮的。这里说的是施水。誓戒与戒行,就是以受持的方式成为誓愿,因为以常行戒的形态长期践行的缘故,称为戒行。像从睡梦中醒来一样随念,意思是:就像睡醒的人回忆梦境那样,我以宿住随念智回忆你过去生所住之处,如同以一切知智亲眼现见。巴利
Apāyesīti pāyesi. Pipāsiteti tasite. Ghammanīti ghammakāle. Sampareteti ghammapariḷāhena pipāsāya abhibhūte. Nti pānīyadānaṃ. Vatasīlavattanti samādānavasena vatabhūtaṃ cārittasīlabhāvena samāciṇṇattā sīlavattaṃ. Suttappabuddhova anussarāmīti supitvā pabuddhamatto viya supinaṃ tava pubbanivutthaṃ mama pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena anussarāmi, sabbaññutaññāṇena viya paccakkhato passāmīti attho.
Karamara 指的是被抢走后带过来的人。Kammasajja 就是准备好打仗,意思是拿起武器等的人。巴利
Karamareti vilumpitvā ānīte. Kammasajjanti yuddhasajjaṃ, āvudhādāyininti attho.
在“羚羊岸”那里:指的是恒河岸边一个地方,因为羚羊很多,所以被称为“羚羊岸”。被抓住带走:指被强盗当成俘虏,强行带往他们自己的地盘。巴利
Eṇīkūlasminti eṇīmigabāhullena ‘‘eṇīkūla’’nti saṅkhaṃ gate gaṅgāya tīrappadese. Gayhaka nīyamānanti gayhavasena karamarabhāvena corehi attano ṭhānaṃ nīyamānaṃ.
通过嫁娶的方式结交朋友。他们对我连想都没想过:我们这样一起玩耍的时候,恒河的那头龙象竟然发怒了。苏苏卡兰:就是那头发怒的可怕龙象发出的“苏苏”呼吸声。巴利
Āvāhavivāhavasena mittasanthavaṃ katvā. ‘‘Evaṃ amhesu kīḷantesu gaṅgeyyako nāgo kupito’’ti mayi saññampi na karontīti. Susukāranti susūti pavattaṃ bheravanāganissāsaṃ.
夺来的船:因为想伤害他们,就用阻挡去路的办法把船夺过来、扣下来。Luddena 指那个残忍的人。Manussakappā 是为了伤害那些乘船来的人。巴利
Gahītanāvanti viheṭhetukāmatāya gatinivāraṇavasena gahitaṃ niggahitaṃ nāvaṃ. Luddenāti kurūrena. Manussakappāti nāvāgatānaṃ manussānaṃ viheṭhetukāmatāya.
“Baddhacaro”就是指依附他人而生活的人。所以经文说“内弟子”。“Taṃ nissāyeva”的意思是:即使他受到国王的供养,他也会舍弃国王,只依止那位合适的内弟子。巴利
Baddhacaroti paṭibaddhacariyo. Tenāha ‘‘antevāsiko’’ti. Taṃ nissāyevāti raññā upaṭṭhiyamānopi rājānaṃ pahāya taṃ kappaṃ antevāsiṃ nissāyeva.
他以为这人是具足圆满智慧者、具足苦行者,认为这人确实有智慧、具足苦行,于是对他生起敬重与推崇。巴利
Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññīti ayaṃ sammadeva buddhimā vatasampannoti amaññi sambhāvesi ca.
所谓Nānattabhāvesu是指种种不同的、各别各别的自体。巴利
Nānattabhāvesūti nānā visuṃ visuṃ attabhāvesu.
“确实”就是确定无疑的意思。“我的这个寿命”是指我那个如前所说、在各种生存状态中不断流转的寿命。您不仅知道我的寿命,还了知其他一切应当了知的事物,没有任何东西是您不知道的。因为您就是佛陀、正自觉者。如果不是这样,这个道理又怎么能被知道呢?正因为您是正自觉者,您那炽燃、闪耀的威神力,照耀着整个梵天界,放射光明,持续安住。梵天以这番话宣说了导师无可比拟、无与伦比的特质。巴利
Addhāti ekaṃsena. Mametamāyunti mayhaṃ etaṃ yathāvuttaṃ tattha tattha bhave pavattaṃ āyuṃ. Na kevalaṃ mama āyumeva, atha kho aññampi sabbaññeyyaṃ jānāsi, na tuyhaṃ aviditaṃ nāma atthi. Tathā hi buddho sammāsambuddho tuvaṃ. No ce kathamayamattho ñāto? Tathā hi sammāsambuddhattā eva te ayaṃ jalito jotamāno ānubhāvo obhāsayaṃ sabbampi brahmalokaṃ obhāsento dibbamāno tiṭṭhatīti satthu asamasamataṃ pavedesi.
“以地性”就是指以大地本身的性质。因此注释里说“以大地本质”。这里要说明的是:因为像“一切行寂止”这类经文是从共通的角度来说的,而“那里没有地”这类经文则是从不共的角度来说的,所以涅槃确实可以透过“没有大地的性质”这一方式来理解。为了排除那种理解,转而把握大地不与别法共有的特性,所以才说“以大地自己的地性”。“未能达到”就是没能到达、没能证得。这里所谓的“达到大地”,是指以“这是我的”等方式去执取它,所以说“他没有以渴爱、邪见、我慢这些执取去执取它”。巴利
Pathavattenāti pathavīattena. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīsabhāvenā’’ti. Ettha ca yasmā – ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti’’ādinā (mahāva. 7; dī. ni. 2.64, 67; ma. ni. 1.281; saṃ. ni. 1.172) sādhāraṇato, ‘‘yattha neva pathavī’’ti asādhāraṇato ca pathaviyā asabhāvena nibbānassa gahetabbatā atthi, taṃ nivattetvā pathaviyā anaññasādhāraṇaṃ sabhāvaṃ gahetuṃ ‘‘pathaviyā pathavattenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāpahosinti na pāpuṇiṃ. Idha pathaviyā pāpuṇanaṃ nāma ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā gahaṇanti āha ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhimānaggāhehi na gaṇhi’’nti.
“Vāditāyāti”的意思是:因为有好争论的习性。“Sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvāti”——先指出“一切”这个词,也就是世尊说过的“梵天神,我确实知道一切”里面的“一切”一词,然后以反诘的方式回应说“君,如果你对一切的一切性都未曾体验过”,这样就把这个词指出来了。“Akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhantoti”——世尊是针对自身五蕴而说“一切”这个词的,他却按“所有一切”的方式来理解,借着“一切”这个词能指称多种含义的共通性来挑这个词的毛病。因此注释里说“但导师……”等。其中的意思是:如果世尊对“一切”未曾体验,那他是在问世间是否处于“什么都没有一切”的无余状态吗?如果对一切的一切性、以无余的方式都未曾体验、未曾证得,那它就像虚空中的花一样,根本不存在。反过来,如果他认为确实有“未曾体验”的东西存在,那么对他而言,若存在以一切性为形式的“未曾体验之物”,“一切”这个词就是错的。因此说“千万别只是空话”等。巴利
Vāditāyāti vādasīlatāya. Sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvāti ‘‘sabbaṃ kho ahaṃ brahme’’tiādinā bhagavatā vuttaṃ sabba-saddaṃ – ‘‘sace kho te mārisa sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūta’’nti paccanubhāsanavasena niddisitvā. Akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhantoti bhagavatā sakkāyasabbaṃ sandhāya sabba-sadde gahite sabbasabbavasena tadatthaparivattanena sabba-saddavacanīyatāsāmaññena ca dosaṃ gaṇhanto. Tenāha ‘‘satthā panā’’tiādi. Tattha yadi sabbaṃ ananubhūtaṃ ‘‘natthi sabba’’nti loke anavasesaṃ pucchati. Sace sabbassa sabbattena anavasesasabhāvena ananubhūtaṃ appattaṃ, taṃ gaganakusumaṃ viya kiñci na siyā. Athassa ananubhūtaṃ atthīti assa sabbattena ananubhūtaṃ yadi atthi, ‘‘sabba’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ micchā, sabbaṃ nāma taṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘mā heva te rittakamevā’’tiādi.
我说“我将说一切,也将说未曾经历”,意思是:我既说“一切”,也说“未曾经历”,这有什么错呢?“举出理由”是指他为了说明一切以一切的方式存在、未曾经历者也存在,而指出理由。“应被了知”是指应当通过道果省察智来了知,特别是因为超越一切有为法的殊胜性而应了知。“不可见”在这里是就涅槃在有见无见这一对中的第二项来说的,意思是“因为不进入眼识的范围,所以称为不可见”。或者,因为远离一切有为法,它没有可展示之处,所以称为不可见。它没有边际,所以称为无边。因此说“那即”等。巴利
Ahaṃ sabbañca vakkhāmi, ananubhūtañca vakkhāmīti ahaṃ ‘‘sabba’’nti ca vakkhāmi, ‘‘ananubhūta’’nti ca vakkhāmi, ettha ko dosoti adhippāyo. Kāraṇaṃ āharantoti sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūtassa atthibhāve kāraṇaṃ niddisanto. Vijānitabbanti maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi visesato sabbasaṅkhatavisiṭṭhatāya jānitabbaṃ. Anidassananti idaṃ nibbānassa sanidassanaduke dutiyapadasahitatādassananti adhippāyena ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇassa āpāthaṃ anupagamanato anidassanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhatavidhuratāya vā natthi etassa nidassananti anidassanaṃ. Natthi etassa antoti anantaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayida’’ntiādi.
“有”是指由缘所生的。“非有”是指不由缘所生,意思是涅槃。因为完全没有使它暗淡的原因,所以它从一切处发光,称为“一切处光明”。因此说“确实从涅槃……”等。正如所说:“那里没有黑暗。”(《导论》104)“普光”就是以显著、殊胜的方式存在。因为它无色,也没有方位,所以从一切处生起、存在,因此称为一切处光明。因此说“在东方等方向中……”等。“进入”:他们在这里进入,所以叫进入处;把这个“进入”的s音变成bh音,再省略vi音,就说成“pabha”(光)。因此说“名为渡口”等。“建立自己的论点”:世尊说:这样,我既说了一切,也说了未曾经历的事,而你没能理解我的意思,没有经过思考就贸然执取过失,这是错误的。世尊这样斥责梵天神,建立了自己的论点。巴利
Bhūtānīti paccayasambhūtāni. Asambhūtanti paccayehi asambhūtaṃ, nibbānanti attho. Apabhassarabhāvahetūnaṃ sabbaso abhāvā sabbato pabhāti sabbatopabhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānato hī’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. (Netti. 104) pabhūtamevāti pakaṭṭhabhāvena ukkaṭṭhabhāvena vijjamānameva. Arūpībhāvena adesikattā sabbato pabhavati vijjatīti sabbatopabhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puratthimadisādīsū’’tiādi. Pavisanti etthāti pavisaṃ, tadeva sa-kārassa bha-kāraṃ, vi-kārassa ca lopaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pabha’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘titthassa nāma’’nti. Vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesīti evaṃ mayā sabbañca vuttaṃ, ananubhūtañca vuttaṃ, tattha yaṃ tayā adhippāyaṃ ajānantena sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāya dosaggahaṇaṃ, taṃ micchāti brahmānaṃ niggaṇhanto bhagavā attano vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesi.
所执取的执取是指以“这是常”等说法所执取的那种执取。导师在在处处透过指出过失来驳斥他,他被驳得无话可说,找不到任何可以执取的依靠,就想用嬉戏玩闹的方式来掩饰自己的失败,于是放弃辩论,想以神通变化来展示嬉戏的神变。意思是:你如果有本事就对我隐身吧,但你是做不到的。想回到根本结生是指想以自己原本的身体状态站立。因为这与结生时生起的状态相似,所以称为根本结生。对其他是指对下面其他身类的较低等梵天。他心想:就让这家伙以变化出来的身体站着吧,不要以本来的形色站着。由于他无法撤除那个变化身,便开始制造能遮蔽自己身体的黑暗。导师破除了那片黑暗。因此说“或者根本结生……”等等。巴利
Gahitagahitanti ‘‘idaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā gahitagahitaṃ gāhaṃ. Tattha tattha dosadassanamukhena niggaṇhantena satthārā vissajjāpito kiñci gahetabbaṃ attano paṭisaraṇaṃ adisvā parājayaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ laḷitakaṃkātukāmo vādaṃ pahāya iddhiyā pāṭihāriyalīḷaṃ dassetukāmo. Yadi sakkosi mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ, na pana sakkhissasīti adhippāyo. Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantukāmoti attano pākatikena attabhāvena ṭhātukāmo. So hi paṭisandhikāle nibbattasadisatāya mūlapaṭisandhīti vutto. Aññesanti heṭṭhā aññakāyikānaṃ brahmūnaṃ. Na adāsi abhisaṅkhatakāyenevāyaṃ tiṭṭhatu, na pākatikarūpenāti cittaṃ uppādesi. Tena so abhisaṅkhatakāyaṃ apanetuṃ avisahanto attabhāvapaṭicchādakaṃ andhakāraṃ nimminituṃ ārabhi. Satthā taṃ tamaṃ viddhaṃseti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mūlapaṭisandhiṃ vā’’tiādi.
“在有中”就是指“我就在有当中”。为了说明这个 eva 字是用在处所上的,注释者说“我既已看见有中的怖畏”——也就是以智之眼如实看见一切有当中的生等怖畏。“有情有”是指被称为有情的有。因为以业有为缘,在再生有当中安立“有情”这个名称。“非有”就是解脱。虽然在寻求,但因为还没有得到方法,所以只看见有而已。或者这里应当这样理解:看见有情的有,也看见那些寻求非有、寻求寂灭的有情仍然在有中受生。“不称赞”——由于没有“啊,实为乐!”这样的称赞状态,所以我不乐著。这是相用语。或者“称赞”一词本身就是执取之义,所以说“不称赞”,即“不寻求”。这里,以“有”一词显示苦谛,以“欢喜”一词显示集谛,以“非有”一词显示灭谛,以“不执取欢喜”显示道谛,因此说“这样显示四圣谛”。这就是以偈颂显示四圣谛。然而导师随顺那些梵天神的意乐,详细显示诸谛,使他们达到观,并以阿拉汉果为说法作结。那些梵天神中,有些立于入流果,有些立于一来果,有些立于不来果,有些立于阿拉汉果。因此说“导师显示诸谛而说法”等。生起稀有者即已生稀有。连同根本而有,即连同渴爱与无明为根本而有。巴利
Bhavevāhanti bhave eva ahaṃ. Ayañca eva-saddo aṭṭhānapayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhave bhayaṃ disvāyevā’’ti, sabbasmiṃ bhave jātiādibhayaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā yāthāvato disvā. Sattabhavanti sattasaṅkhātaṃ bhavaṃ. Kammabhavapaccaye hi upapattibhave sattasamaññā. Vibhavanti vimuttiṃ. Pariyesamānampi upāyassa anadhigatattā bhaveyeva disvā. Bhavañca vibhavesinaṃ vibhavaṃ nibbutiṃ esamānānaṃ sattānaṃ bhavaṃ, bhavesu uppattiñca disvāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Na abhivadinti ‘‘aho vata sukha’’nti evaṃ abhivadāpanākārābhāvato na abhinivisiṃ, lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ. Gāhattho eva vā abhivāda-saddoti āha ‘‘nābhivadi’’nti, ‘‘nagavesi’’nti. Bhavaggahaṇenettha dukkhasaccaṃ, nandīgahaṇena samudayasaccaṃ, vibhavaggahaṇena nirodhasaccaṃ, nandiñca na upādiyinti iminā maggasaccaṃ pakāsitanti āha ‘‘iti cattāri saccāni pakāsento’’ti. Tadidaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ gāthāya vibhāvanadassanaṃ. Satthā pana tesaṃ brahmūnaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ saccāni vitthārato pakāsento vipassanaṃ pāpetvā arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Te ca brahmāno keci sotāpattiphale, keci sakadāgāmiphale, keci anāgāmiphale, keci arahatte ca patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saccāni pakāsento satthā dhammaṃ desesī’’tiādi. Acchariyajātāti sañjātacchariyā. Samūlaṃ bhavanti taṇhāvijjāhi samūlaṃ bhavaṃ.
505 “超越了我的领域”:这是说,通过彻底超越欲界的修行道路,超越了我的范围。那么,他怎么能知道那些人已经进入了圣者的境界呢?他是通过把握理路来推知的——以理路把握而推断:“沙门乔达摩说法时,揭示轮回的过患和涅槃的功德,让可受教化的众生当下亲见涅槃。他的开示不会落空,不会白费,就像因陀罗掷出的金刚杵一样。凡是安住于他教法的人,在轮回中再也见不到了。”他就是以这种理路把握、以推断而了知。所谓“如果你是这样随觉者”,意思是:正如你宣说他人对真理的现证,同样,你以适合自己的方式,以自证智觉悟、现观法而安住。不要将那个法传授给别人,即不要将你所现观的法导向声闻的现观。魔说“此”,是指向紧接着所说的安立于梵天界而言,为了显示那些,他说“未生起时”等。然而,对于投生于恶趣,则是对采取了邪命外道、尼乾子等出家生活的外道师,或者对任何出家后行邪道的人而说的。“未生起”即未产生,“未达到”是其意义。“不虚说”是指,正如魔不能在上面再多说什么,如此以那样的上之说。“邀请之语”即告知之语。梵是最上的邀请,或者此处有梵的邀请,因此是梵邀请经。其中凡在义理上未分别的,那是很容易理解的。巴利
505.Mamavasaṃ ativattitānīti sabbaso kāmadhātusamatikkamanapaṭipadāya mayhaṃ visayaṃ atikkamitāni. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ tesaṃ ariyabhūmisamokkamanaṃ jānātīti? Nayaggāhato – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo dhammaṃ desento saṃsāre ādīnavaṃ, nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsento veneyyajanaṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhameva karoti, tassa desanā avañjhā amoghā indena vissaṭṭhavajirasadisā, tassa ca āṇāya ṭhitā saṃsāre na dissantevā’’ti nayaggāhena anumānena jānāti. Sace tvaṃ evaṃ anubuddhoti yathā tvaṃ paresaṃ saccābhisambodhaṃ vadati, evaṃ tvaṃ attano anurūpato sayambhuñāṇena buddho dhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhito. Taṃ dhammaṃ mā upanayasīti tayā paṭividdhadhammaṃ mā sāvakapaṭivedhaṃ pāpesi. Idanti idaṃ anantaraṃ vuttaṃ brahmaloke patiṭṭhānaṃyeva sandhāya māro vadati, te dassento ‘‘anuppanne hī’’tiādimāha. Apāyapatiṭṭhānaṃ pana ājīvakanigaṇṭhādipabbajjaṃ upagate titthakare, ye keci vā pabbajitvā micchāpaṭipanne jane sandhāya vadati. Anuppanneti asañjāte, appatteti attho. Anullapanatāyāti yathā māro upari kiñci uttaraṃ lapituṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ tathā uttarabhāsanena. Nimantanavacanenāti viññāpanavacanena. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ nimantanaṃ, brahmuno vā nimantanaṃ ettha atthīti brahmanimantanikaṃ, suttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
第10《魔诃责经》注释巴利
10. Māratajjanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
506 “进入仓”是指:因为这里是粪便隐藏的地方,所以叫“仓”;这里说的“仓”是指它的内部。变得适合而进去,就是“进入”。因为他化作了一个与那里相称的细微身体,所以进到了里面。“重重”就像说极其沉重。这是把 u 音变成 o 音来说的,意思是感觉非常沉重。也可以读作“garugaru viya”。“豆食”是因省略后半个词而成为“豆”,意思是被豆食堆积、充满,就像装满了豆一样。所以说“像吃了豆食的人的肚子”。为了不省略后半个词而显示其义,说“像装满豆的袋子”。“如湿豆”是指像湿豆之袋。这意思是想:这在我腹中先前是什么沉重感呢?究竟是如何生起的呢?“以方便”是指以途径、以正理。然而为了从反面显示其无方便,说了“如果然而……”等语。或者,是针对他自己而说“不要伤害如来”。正如在“如来为天人所敬,我们礼敬僧伽,愿得安稳”等句中,圣僧伽被称为如来,同样,属于其类的圣补特伽罗,以及像先前的两位上首弟子那样,圆满经过百千劫再加一阿僧祇劫的巴拉密而来的,这位大长老也是如此而来,所以是如来。他正站在门闩外,所以说“站在门闩外”。巴利
506.Koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭhoti āsayo vaccaguttaṭṭhānatāya koṭṭhaṃ, tassa abbhantarañhettha koṭṭhaṃ. Anurūpo hutvā paviṭṭho anupaviṭṭho. Sukhumañhi tadanucchavikaṃ attabhāvaṃ māpetvā ayaṃ tattha paviṭṭho. Garugaro viyāti garukagaruko viya. U-kārassa hi o-kāraṃ katvā ayaṃ niddeso, ativiya garuko maññeti attho. Garugaru viya icceva vā pāṭho. Māsabhattaṃ māso uttarapadalopena, māsabhattena ācitaṃ pūritaṃ māsācitaṃ maññe. Tenāha ‘‘māsabhattaṃ bhuttassa kucchi viyā’’ti. Uttarapadalopena vinā atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘māsapūritapasibbako viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tintamāso viyāti tintamāso pasibbako viya. Kiṃ nu kho etaṃ mama kucchiyaṃ pubbaṃ bhārikattaṃ, kiṃ nu kho kathaṃ nu kho jātanti adhippāyo? Upāyenāti pathena ñāyena. Byatirekato panassa anupāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attānameva vā sandhāya ‘‘mā tathāgataṃ vihesesī’’ti āha. Yathā hi ariyasaṅgho ‘‘tathāgataṃ devamanussapūjitaṃ, saṅghaṃ namassāma suvatthi hotū’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.18; su. ni. 241) tathāgatoti vuccati, evaṃ tappariyāpannā ariyapuggalā, yathā ca purimakā dutiyaaggasāvakā kappānaṃ satasahassādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā āgatā, ayampi mahāthero tathā āgatoti tathāgatoti. Patiaggaḷeva aṭṭhāsīti aggaḷassa bahibhāge aṭṭhāsi.
507 507. 所谓树神,是指四天王天中比较低劣的一类天众。因为他们早已习惯了人的气味,所以并不太厌恶,因此说“对于住在虚空中的天神”。“令生病”就是产生痛苦。“城里人”就是娇生惯养的人。“极清净”就是容貌完全美好。“亲属那一份”就是属于亲属的部分。因为在无始的轮回中,确实没有任何一个众生完全没有亲属那一份,这就是要表达的意思。“这个”就是指“你是我的外甥”这句话。“依照传统”就是依照“他曾是我的外甥,如今却处于魔的境界”这一传统而说的。或者,aññassa vā vesamaṃ dhuro vidhuro是“与其他不同”之意。因此说“与其他不同”。“以少许之苦”就是以安乐。“行走于道路”就是行路者。“以此”就是依于火葬堆。“水洞”就是流水洞。“从等至”就是从灭尽定。“等至之果”就是灭尽定之果。巴利
507. Rukkhadevatā nāma cātumahārājikesu nihīno kāyo, tasmā nesaṃ manussagandho paricitattā nātijegucchoti āha ‘‘ākāsaṭṭhadevatāna’’nti. Ābādhaṃ karotīti dukkhaṃ janeti. Nāgarikoti sukumāro. Paricokkhoti sabbaso sucirūpo. Ñātikoṭinti ñātibhāgaṃ. Anādimati hi saṃsāre ñātibhāgarahito nāma satto kassacipi natthīti adhippāyo. Idanti ‘‘so me tvaṃ bhāgineyyo hosī’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Paveṇivasenāti tadā mayhaṃ bhāgineyyo hutvā idāni māraṭṭhāne ṭhitoti imissā paveṇiyā vasena vuttaṃ. Aññassa vā vesamaṃ dhuro vidhuro. Tenāha ‘‘aññehi saddhiṃ asadiso’’ti. Appadukkhenāti sukheneva. Panthānaṃ avanti gacchantīti pathāvino. Ettakenāti ettāvatā citakasannisayena. Udakaleṇanti udakanissandanaleṇaṃ. Samāpattitoti nirodhasamāpattito. Samāpattiphalanti nirodhasamāpattiphalaṃ.
508 用十种骂人的事,就是用这十种骂人的事,一点也不放过地全用上。责骂,就是呵斥、指责。抨击,就是用不间断的话刺伤他们。令苦,就是让他们心里生起痛苦。对此,是说那些比丘,因为你们谩骂等行为,使比丘们生起烦恼。所以这里的用意是:破坏者魔罗由此得到了可乘之机。能侍奉所应侍奉之象者,就是象夫之类的人;他们因为以低贱的方式谋生,就像象夫一样,所以叫象夫,但在文句脉络中,连同他们的同伴,被统称为居士。黑,就是出身低贱;从足生,就是从脚所生,意即脚的子孙;生懈怠,就是由于不从事农耕、经商等劳作而产生的懒惰;除粪道,就是从粪坑中排出粪便的通道。巴利
508.Dasahi akkosavatthūhīti dasahipi akkosavatthūhi, tato kiñci ahāpentā. Paribhāsathāti garahatha. Ghaṭṭethāti anūnāhi kathāhi imesu ovijjhatha. Dukkhāpethāti citte dukkhaṃ janetha. Etesanti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tumhākaṃ akkosanādīhi bhikkhūnaṃ kilesuppattiyā. Tenettha dūsī māro otāraṃ labhati nāmāti adhippāyo. Upaṭṭhātabbaṃ ibhaṃ arahantīti ibbhā, hatthibhaṇḍakā, hīnajīvikatāya hete ibbhā viyāti ibbhā, te pana sadutiyakavasena ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti vuttā. Kaṇhāti kaṇhābhijātikā. Pādato jātattā pādānaṃ apaccā. Ālasiyajātāti kasivaṇijjādikammassa akaraṇena sañjātālasiyā. Gūthaniddhamanapanāḷīti vaccakūpato gūthassa nikkhamapadeso.
人类不会有不善,因为他们没有那样的特殊业力条件。被附身者的心相续,因附身者的威神力而转变——这个意思前面已经说过了。“不合宜的所缘”是指在比丘们面前出现女人的形象,在比丘尼们面前出现男人的形象,诸如此类,或者其他不适合出家人、与出家人身份不相称的所缘。“懊悔所缘”是指那些看到之后会成为懊悔因缘的事物。“涂胶杆”是指涂了胶的捕鸟竿。巴利
Manussānaṃ akusalaṃ na bhaveyya tesaṃ tādisāya abhisandhiyā abhāvato. Āvesakassa ānubhāvena āviṭṭhassa cittasantati viparivattatīti vuttovāyamattho. Visabhāgavatthunti bhikkhūnaṃ santike itthirūpaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ santike purisarūpanti īdisaṃ, aññaṃ vā pabbajitānaṃ asāruppaṃ visabhāgavatthuṃ. Vippaṭisārārammaṇanti passantānaṃ vippaṭisārassa paccayaṃ. Lepayaṭṭhinti lepalittaṃ vākurayaṭṭhiṃ.
510 “以喜悦之力”是指由在家生活所引发的喜悦之力。“变成别样”是指兴奋踊跃的状态。“依前所说之理”,就是按先前所说的那样:“假如魔罗附着在人的身体上……”等等。如果魔罗真的那样做,人就不会有善,善只会属于魔罗;但魔罗并没有附着在身体上,却示现了那样令人生信、可作为信心对象的事物。所以说“正如……”。巴利
510.Somanassavasenāti gehassitasomanassavasena. Aññathattanti uppilāvitattaṃ. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘sace māro manussānaṃ sarīre adhimuccitvā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena. Yadi mārova tathā kareyya, manussānaṃ kusalaṃ na bhaveyya, mārasseva bhaveyya, sarīre pana anadhimuccitvā tādisaṃ pasādanīyaṃ pasādavatthuṃ dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi.
511 被不净想所熟习:以“整个身体是不净的”这种想所伴随的禅那,就是不净想;以那个不净想反复熟习、反复修习。以心,就是以心意。多,是指频繁、经常。住,是指正在安住的人,意思是多安住于不净等至的人。退缩,是指因为在那里面由于厌恶而停住,所以内心收缩。回缩,是指退避。回还,是指转回去。正因为这样,心对那所缘就是不感到欢喜信乐。对于味渴爱,是指对甘甜等味道这类对象的爱染。巴利
511.Asubhasaññāparicitenāti sakalaṃ kāyaṃ asubhanti pavattāya saññāya sahagatajjhānaṃ asubhasaññā, tena paricitena paribhāvitena. Cetasā cittena. Bahulanti abhiṇhaṃ. Viharatoti viharantassa, asubhasamāpattibahulassāti attho. Patilīyatīti saṅkucati tattha paṭikūlatāya saṇṭhitattā. Patikuṭatīti apasakkati. Pativattatīti nivattati. Tato eva na sampasāriyati. Rasataṇhāyāti madhurādirasavisayāya taṇhāya.
对一切世间都不感到欢喜想:这是指在欲有、色有、无色有这三种存在状态中,以不欢喜的方式生起的观禅修习。这也就是厌离随观。所谓“在世间种种缤纷事物中”,是指在像大象、马、车乘、宫殿、楼阁等各类事物,以及园林、美景胜地等各类世间缤纷悦目之处。“已止息贪的”,是指贪已止息、贪已平息;“已止息嗔与痴的”,在这里也是同样的道理。他们这样取这些业处来修习,是因为这些业处对所有人都适合。巴利
Sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāti tīsupi bhavesu aruccanavasena pavattā vipassanābhāvanā. Nibbidānupassanā hesā. Lokacitresūti hatthiassarathapāsādakūṭāgārādibhedesu ceva ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādibhedesu ca loke cittavicittesu. Rāgasantāni vūpasantarāgāni. Dosamohasantānīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Imesaṃ evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ sabbesaṃ sappāyabhāvato.
512 “握着石子”:用石头尖端(比喻)说明,那是指一块能被拳头完全包住的碎石,所以说“能握在拳头里大小的石头”。意思是能被拳头容纳。这确实是石头大小的下限。“象王”就是巨大的象。有些论师认为“那伽”一词有“巨大”的含义。或者是为了区别于“龙”等其他含义,才特别说“象王”。为了阐明“以整个身体转回来观望”这句话的含义,才说了“正如……”等语。这里的“vā”字表示决定义,所以说“完全不知道分寸”。而“连同回转观望”等说法,只是按字面意思来理解。所谓“于崇高者”,即对于具足崇高功德的世尊。因为在当时含摄天神的世间中,除了世尊之外,确实没有任何众生具备如此殊胜的功德特质。巴利
512.Sakkharaṃgahetvāti sakkharāsīsena tattakaṃ bhinnapāsāṇamuṭṭhinti āha ‘‘antomuṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhanapamāṇaṃ pāsāṇa’’nti. Muṭṭhipariyāpannanti attho. Ayañhi pāsāṇassa heṭṭhimakoṭi. Hatthināgoti mahāhatthī. Mahantapariyāyo nāga-saddoti keci. Ahināgādito vā visesanatthaṃ hatthināgoti vuttaṃ. Sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesīti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na vāyanti ettha vā-saddo avadhāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘neva pamāṇaṃ aññāsī’’ti. Sahāpalokanāyāti ca vacanatoti iminā vacanena imaṃ vacanamattaṃ gahetvāti adhippāyo. Uḷāreti uḷāraguṇe. Bhagavantañhi ṭhapetvā natthi tadā sadevake loke tādiso guṇavisesayuttoti.
各自感受、与铁矛共同存在的六种触处,就叫六触处,也就是苦。因为那个地狱里有这六触处,所以叫有六触处的地狱。因此说“六触……缘……”。被贯穿,就是被刺穿;那里有几百种被桩子贯穿的情形,所以叫被桩贯穿的地狱。因为它是特殊因缘所生的感受,所以叫应受感受的;不需要靠别的因缘造作,只由自身一一各自感受,所以叫各自感受的。与铁矛一起,是指从脚底开始不间断地击打而来、由五十个人一起握持的铁矛,和从头顶而来的铁矛。由于与铁矛的性质相同,这里用单数;而实际上有上百根铁矛落下。以这个道理,他依于惯用语而说“依止”。如是说,即“那时你应当知道,我在那地狱中被烧煮一千年”这样所说。出离,即存在于出离之中,也就是最终的意思。因此说“异熟出离受”,即异熟终结的感受。更为苦,如同灯火熄灭那一刻变得很大一样。巴利
Visuṃ visuṃ paccattavedaniyo ayasūlena saddhiṃ bhūtāni cha phassāyatanāni etassāti cha phassāyatanaṃ, dukkhaṃ. Taṃ ettha atthīti cha phassāyataniko, nirayo. Tenāha ‘‘chasu phassā…pe… paccayo’’ti. Samāhanatīti samāhato, anekasatabhedo saṅkusamāhato ettha atthīti saṅkusamāhato, nirayo. Visesapaccayatāya vedanāya ṭhitoti vedaniyo, kāraṇākārakena vinā paccattaṃ sayameva vedaniyoti paccattavedaniyo. Ayasūlena saddhiṃ ayasūlanti pādapadesato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ abhihananavasena āgatena paṇṇāsāya janehi gahitena ayasūlena saha sīsapadesato paṭṭhāya āgataṃ. Ayasūlabhāvasāmaññena cetaṃ ekavacanaṃ, satamattāni patitāni sūlāni. Iminā te ṭhānena cintetvāti nissitavohārena nissayaṃ vadati. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘tadā jāneyyāsi vassasahassaṃ me niraye paccamānassā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhānimanti vuṭṭhāne bhavaṃ, antimanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vipākavuṭṭhānavedana’’nti, vipākassa pariyosānaṃ vedananti attho. Dukkhatarā hoti padīpassa vijjhāyanakkhaṇe mahantabhāvo viya.
513 击打、敲打。能各自产生个别感受的,是指那些能一一独立造成巨大痛苦的。与铁无关的地狱,应当依据《天使经》(中部第三集第261经)来说明。关于它的详细解释,后面自然会出现。大长老为了震慑魔罗,引用这段过去的事,借机显示自己智慧的力量,说出这首偈颂:“凡是能了知此事的……”它的意思是:那位有大神通的人,对于此业和业果,就像放在手掌中的余甘子果一样,现前亲眼了知。由于彻底断尽了一切烦恼,这位比丘是正自觉者的上首弟子;魔罗啊,你触犯、打击了这样具足崇高功德的比丘,因为你一向具足黑暗的恶法,未来必将遭受巨大的痛苦。巴利
513.Ghaṭṭayitvā pothetvā. Pāṭiyekkavedanājanakāti paccekaṃ mahādukkhasamuppādakā. Ayato apagato nirayo, so devadūtasuttena (ma. ni. 3.261) dīpetabbo. Atthavaṇṇanā panassa parato sayameva āgamissati. Imaṃ pana atītavatthuṃ āharitvā attano ñāṇānubhāvadīpanamukhena māraṃ santajjento mahāthero ‘‘yoetamabhijānātī’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yo mahābhiñño etaṃ kammaṃ kammaphalañca hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya abhimukhaṃ katvā paccakkhato jānāti. Sabbaso bhinnakilesatāya bhikkhu sammāsambuddhassa aggasāvako, tādisaṃ uḷāraguṇaṃ āsajja ghaṭṭayitvā ekantakāḷakehi pāpadhammehi samannāgatattā kaṇha māra āyatiṃ mahādukkhaṃ vindissasi.
把水作为依托:那里是以大海之水作为依止处,因为那是投生在那里的众生共同业果所感得的。那些天宫确实能存续一劫之久,所以说“存续一劫的”。“它们的”,指的是那些天宫的。对于上述天宫的情形、那些天女的圆满成就,以及它的原因,他都亲自现前了知。“用脚趾摇动”:在东园,他用脚趾摇动了由大近事女毗舍佉所建、饰有千间楼阁的大殿堂,所以说“此事应依《摇动殿堂经》来说明”。这里的“此”,是指“凡是最胜殿……”这首偈颂所含的义理,应依《小爱尽解脱经》(中部第一集393经)本身来说明。巴利
Udakaṃ vatthuṃ katvāti tattha nibbattanakasattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammaphalena mahāsamuddaudakameva adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tathā hi tāni kappaṭṭhitikāni honti. Tenāha ‘‘kappaṭṭhāyino’’ti. Tesanti vimānānaṃ. Etaṃ yathāvuttavimānavatthuṃ tāsaṃ accharānaṃ sampattiṃ, tassa ca kāraṇaṃ attapaccakkhaṃ katvā jānāti. Pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayīti pubbārāme visākhāya mahāupāsikāya kāritaṃ sahassagabbhapaṭimaṇḍitamahāpāsādaṃ attano pādaṅguṭṭhena kampesi. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pāsādakampanasuttena dīpetabba’’nti. Idanti ‘‘yo vejayanta’’nti imissā gāthāya atthajātaṃ cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttisutteneva (ma. ni. 1.393) dīpetabbaṃ.
那位梵天神大众刚这样一想,就在梵天界中立刻前往善法梵天神集会堂。“他们”指大目犍连等长老。“各自于一方”意思是:大目犍连长老在东方,大迦叶长老在南方,玛哈咖毕那长老在西方,阿那律长老在北方。这样,四位长老在梵天神众的聚会中,围绕坐在中央的世尊,分别坐在四方。“所说的偈颂”,是指“凡是询问梵天神的……”这首偈颂。“依《某梵天经》”:应依照大品所收的《某梵天经》(相应部第一集176经)来说明,即:“那个时候,刚好有一位梵天神生起了这样的恶见……”等等。巴利
Tassa brahmagaṇassa tathācintanasamanantarameva tasmiṃ brahmaloke sudhammaṃ brahmasabhaṃ gantvā. Tepīti mahāmoggallānādayo. Paccekaṃ disāsūti mahāmoggallānatthero puratthimadisāyaṃ, mahākassapatthero dakkhiṇadisāyaṃ, mahākappinatthero pacchimadisāyaṃ, anuruddhatthero uttaradisāyanti evaṃ cattāro therā brahmaparisamatthake majjhe nisinnassa bhagavato samantato catuddisā nisīdiṃsu. Gāthā vuttāti ‘‘yo brahmaṃ paripucchatī’’ti gāthā vuttā. Aññatarabrahmasuttenāti – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa brahmuno evarūpaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.176) mahāvagge āgatena aññatarabrahmasuttena.
他以禅那解脱而触证:这是依靠禅那与解脱,以神通智触证。“林”:语法上与赡部洲相关,是说(他)触到了赡部洲。因为赡部洲森林茂密,所以这里把它称为“林”。因此说“阎浮树丛之主”。“东毗提诃人的洲”:指东毗提诃人洲居民所居的洲,也就是东毗提诃人洲。所谓“地上卧者”,指的是西牛货洲人和北俱卢洲人。因为他们没有家宅财产,只睡在地上,不住在宫殿等地方。“获得”:就是生起。“不要存有这样的期望”:正如过去杜斯魔的期望那样,你的这种期望长久以来只会带来无益,所以不要存有这样的期望——这是(目犍连长老)对魔罗的教诫。其余各处都很容易理解。巴利
Jhānavimokkhena phusīti jhānavimokkhasannissayena abhiññāñāṇena phassayi. Vananti jambudīpaṃ aphassayīti sambandho. Jambudīpo hi vanabahulatāya idha ‘‘vana’’nti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘jambusaṇḍassa issaro’’ti. Pubbavidehānaṃ dīpanti pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ dīpaṃ, pubbavidehadīpanti attho. Bhūmisayā narā nāma aparagoyānakā uttarakurukā ca. Yasmā te gehapariggahābhāvato bhūmiyaṃyeva sayanti, na pāsādādīsu. Paṭilabhīti uppādesi. Etaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsīti esā yathā pubbe dūsimārassa, evaṃ tuyhaṃ āsā dīgharattaṃ anatthāvahā, tasmā edisaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsīti mārassa ovādaṃ adāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha suviññeyyameva.